All posts in “Buyer Guides”

Best Robot Vacuums

BEST ROBOT VACUUMS

1iRobot Roomba 960 with Wi-Fi Connectivity

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

First on our list is the Roomba 960 from iRobot. iRobot have more than 25-years of experience working with robotics and with every new Roomba it really shows. Like others from the manufacturer, this Roomba cleans hard and carpeted floors. It benefits from the 3-stage cleaning system that loosens, then lifts and sucks any pet hair, dust and dirt. With 5X suction it’s stronger than earlier models. As part of the 3-stage system, the two multi-surface brushes, made from tough rubber, can adjust themselves and flex to keep contact with your floors. It also features a high-quality filter that removes around 99% of all dust, pollen and allergens, even if it’s incredibly small.

As amazing as those features are though, there’s many other distinctive features to this Roomba 960.  What we particularly like is the iAdapt 2.0 navigation that uses vSLAM technology which enables the vacuum to track its surroundings and clean an entire area. It also has great features like auto recharge and resume capabilities and can even be used with Google Assistant or Alexa for a fun way to clean your house.

That’s not all though, because thanks to the iRobot Home App, you can fully customized and schedule your Roomba so that it’ll even clean or not clean while you’re not at home. What could be better than coming home from work to clean floors?

Pros

  • checkPerfect for homes with pets
  • checkCompatible with Google Assistant and Alexa
  • checkAdvanced Dirt Detect tech

Cons

  • cross-altNeeds a lot of rescuing

Specs

  • Dimensions 13.8 x 13.8 x 3.6-inches
  • Battery life 75-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Dual Multi-Surface Rubber Brushes
  • Extra Features Works with Google Assistant and Amazon Alexa
2Neato Robotics Botvac D7 Connected Wi-Fi Robot Vacuum

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next in our guide is the Neato Robotics D7 Connected robot vacuum which is quite a hike in price, but worth every penny if you’re looking for a high-tech and high-performance device. First things first, it’s got the Wi-Fi connectivity that has become a standard in many robot vacuums. This means that via the Neato app you can clean the floors in your home from wherever you are, at any time of the day. Combine that with the fact it’s another with the Alexa/Google Assistant compatibility and we’re already foaming at the mouth over it.

That’s not all it has to offer though, with a superior runtime of 120-minutes – that’s a lot of time it need to clean your floors. If it runs out, as you’d expect it’ll just go back to base for a recharge and start again without stopping until the whole floor is clear of dirt and debris. A clever addition Neato have included is the CornerClever tech that means it can get into corners and along walls closer than other models.

With excellent LaserSmart navigation and mapping it can plot out the best course and remember where it’s cleaned before. It also uses real-time object detection as well, to provide a more controlled and methodical clean than other robot vacs that often just bump around randomly. There’s even two different power modes, depending on what you need and prefer. You can either opt for the Turbo, which is super-powered, big, bold and capable of more superior hair pickup. Or you can choose Eco, which is a much more energy-efficient, quieter mode that will clean for longer.

Pros

  • checkGenerously long runtime
  • checkCornerClever tech for harder-to-reach areas
  • checkChoice of two modes

Cons

  • cross-altPlastic construction could be better quality

Specs

  • Dimensions 12.7 x 13.2 x 3.9-inches
  • Battery life 120-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Spiral combo brush and side brush
  • Extra features Compatibility with Google Home and Alexa, Ultra performance filter
3ECOVACS DEEBOT M81Pro Robotic Vacuum Cleaner

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The EVOVACS DEEBOT M81Pros is a rather stylish looking robot vacuum. However, it’s not just good looks that’s on offer here. Sure, it has the Alexa compatibility that you get with many others, it’s also got the Wi-Fi connectivity, that again comes with many. However, what we want to highlight right from the bat is the rather awesome 5-stage cleaning system that not only sweeps, lifts and vacuums dirt, but also mops and dries. All at the same damn time. If you’re not impressed even a little by that, you need to check your pulse.

The fact that it can vacuum and mop, makes it ideal for both carpeted and bare floors. There’s even the choice of four different cleaning modes, depending on the surfaces and areas you’re cleaning. You can go for the full-on assault on dirt that is the Intensive Cleaning Mode or opt for Edge Cleaning to finish a job properly. If you don’t require a full clean though, you can choose Spot Cleaning to target those select areas where there’s debris and dirt buildup or where you’ve spilled some chips!

Two other features of the ECOVACS DEEBOT that we particularly love are the 100-minutes runtime and the extra-large dustbin. This just adds to the convenience of the robot vac and means you don’t have to worry about emptying it as often. Compared to others on the market, the price tag is a little more affordable. Worth more than a passing glance

Pros

  • check5-stage cleaning system
  • checkGenerously-sized dustbin
  • checkCapable of vacuuming and mopping

Cons

  • cross-altNot the most intuitive

Specs

  • Dimensions 13.7 x 3.1 x 13.7-inches
  • Battery life 100-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type V-shaped main brush, dual side brush
  • Extra features Vacuum and mop combo, Alexa compatible
4iRobot Roomba 980 Robot Vacuum with Wi-Fi

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Back with the masters of the robot vacuum, iRobot again, for another Roomba model. This, the 980 model provides 10x more power and offers much deeper cleaning capabilities when used on carpets. That already makes it a little more powerful and therefore a more thorough cleaning device than the 600 and 700 series Roombas. Additionally, it benefits from that slick 3.6-inch height which means it can creep under furniture, but really that’s no different to others.

What we love about this, as we do with others, is the fact that it can be controlled via the App or using your Amazon Alexa or Google Assistant. Although it’s a convenience more than anything, it’s hard not to have fun shouting commands at it. To ensure you have clean floors throughout your property, there’s the Auto-Adjust cleaning head that will adapt its height to ensure the multi-surface brushes are close to the floor as possible.

As you can use it with the advanced iRobot Home app, you are able to control where and when your Roomba cleans. You can choose whether it passes over the floor once or twice, gives the edges a final clean and whether it should utilize its Power Boost or not. As is the case with most Roombas, you get the benefit of the high-efficiency filter, which helps to remove around 99% of debris, dirt, dust and pet hair.

Pros

  • checkPower boost option for deeper carpet cleaning
  • check120-minutes runtime
  • checkHigh-efficiency filter

Cons

  • cross-altApp is quite basic compared to other brands and models

Specs

  • Dimensions 13.9 x 13.9 x 3.6-inches
  • Battery life 120-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Tangle-free dual multi-surface brushes, edge-sweeper brush
  • Extra features Advanced Dirt Detect tech, Compatible with Alexa/Google Assistant
5Neato Botvac D80 Robot Vacuum for Pet

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Neato Botvac D80 is what we’re highlighting now. This is a great robot vacuum, particularly if you’ve got pets in your household. It uses Neato’s own LaserSmart tech to map out the flooring in your property, while detecting objects in real-time so that it doesn’t just bum around, it cleans methodically. You get the Advanced SpinFlow Power Clean system that works in conjunction with the spiral lade brush and the side brush to collect up all kinds of dirt, debris and pet hair on all types of flooring.

Auto Scheduling is one of our favorite features of the D80, which can be accessed using the controls and the on-board display screen. You can use this to fully program when the vac cleans and where. However, don’t worry if you need to use it outside of scheduled times, because you can just push start and choose the cleaning mode that’s best. Another great feature of the D-shaped design, that benefits from a brush that is 50% larger due to that style than circular robots.

In fact, in a single cleaning session it will cover an area of 3000-square-feet. Thanks to its 0.7-liter dirt bin, you don’t have to clean it out after every use. The design of the dirt bin is also a lot more convenient than others on the market, as you just lift it up and out of the vacuum and then empty it in the garbage.

Pros

  • checkD-shape offers brush that’s 50% bigger than circular bots
  • checkAuto-Schedule makes it easy to program
  • checkSpinFlow System and CornerClever tech

Cons

  • cross-altTends to bump into things a lot

Specs

  • Dimensions 12.7 x 13.2 x 3.9-inches
  • Battery life 60-minutes
  • Wi-Fi No
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Spiral blade brush and combo brush
  • Extra features Advanced SpinFlow Power Clean, LaserSmart tech, CornerClever tech
6eufy RoboVac 11

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

One of the few in our guide that’s not iRobot or Neato is this great little robot vac from eufy. The eufy RoboVac 11 offers the high suction and self-charging capabilities that you’d expect from a robotic vacuum. This model has been designed specifically with thin carpets and hard floors in mind and benefits from 1000Pa of vacuuming power and three brushes, comprising of a main rolling brush and side brushes.

With the high-performance lithium-ion rechargeable battery powering it, you get around 1.5-hours of runtime. Although this is a straightforward and even, plain some would say, model, it has been built with regular use in mind. For one thing, it’s got protective tempered glass that stops it from getting scratched and otherwise damaged and has an infrared sensor that helps it avoid obstacles. There’s also special technology integrated into it that helps it to avoid falls.

Aside from the above, there’s also a top-quality filter that can help you to keep the level of allergens, pet hair and general dirt in your home at an absolute minimum. Compared to others this also has one distinct advantage in that it is around 0.5-inches slimmer. This enables it to get rid of the dirt from corners, under furniture and other areas different robot vacs can’t. While it might not suit your flooring, particularly if you don’t have dark-colored flooring or deep carpets, it does offer you three different cleaning modes, Max, Spot and Edge.

Pros

  • checkRolling brush and two side brushes
  • check1000Pa suction power
  • checkThree cleaning modes

Cons

  • cross-altNot able to schedule days of week

Specs

  • Dimensions 13 x 12.6 x 3.1-inches
  • Battery life 90-minutes
  • Wi-Fi No
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Rolling brush and side brushes
  • Extra features Tempered glass covering for protection against scratches, infrared-sensor
7Samsung POWERbot Robot Vacuum

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

You’ve got a Samsung television and smartphone, so why not a robotic vacuum cleaner made by the South Korean. However, there’s more to the Samsung POWERbot than just the brand’s sterling reputation. It provides a whopping 40x stronger level of suction compared to others on the market for an incredibly thorough clean. Rather than just bumping around without any sense it utilizes the Full View Sensor 2.0 and Visionary Mapping Plus to plan out the most optimal path for cleaning, while avoiding any obstacles that may be in its path. Like some of the others in our guide it features a Coverage Map on the app that plots where it’s cleaned and where it hasn’t.

The wider-than-normal brush provides greater sweeping and suction, with the addition of the Edge Clean Master which helps to keep edges and corners cleaner. Now, we’re not going to lie, this requires quite the investment really, but when you consider in addition to the above that it’s also got Wi-Fi connectivity and is compatible with Alexa and Google Assistant. This means tat you don’t have to constantly return to the charging dock or interact directly with the robot vac to control it. You can just bark your orders and the cleaner will do as it told.

With it you also get intelligent power control which means that the vac itself will detect the different surface types it’s passing over and adjust its suction appropriately. The CycloneForce Tech means that your vac doesn’t lose suction power and clogs less. You really don’t have to do much, especially as you can schedule the times it cleans, access controls via the app when you’re not there and if you don’t fancy barking orders at it, there’s a handy remote control.

Pros

  • checkCycloneForce Tech preventing any reductions in power and less clogging
  • check40z more powerful vacuum
  • checkFull View Sensor 2.0 and Visionary Mapping Plus

Cons

  • cross-altOnly able to schedule one day or a daily program

Specs

  • Dimensions 13.7 x 13.4 x 3.8-inches
  • Battery life 90-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Combo brush
  • Extra features Edge Clean Master, EasyPass wheels, CycloneForce Tech
8iRobot Roomba 690 Robot Vacuum

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The final iRobot Roomba in our guide is the slick, high-class and sophisticated 690. This has the same three-stage cleaning system as other lines from the company and benefits from the same dual multi-surface brushes to remove just about any dirt and debris, including pet hair, from your floors. iRobot’s own Dirt Detect Tech is also utilized to stunning effect by the 690 robo vac, which ensures the 690 will work harder at cleaning high-traffic areas that are likely to have more dirt.

The scheduling is more comprehensive with the iRobot than other robot vacuum models and the fact it runs for around 90-minutes on a single charge, you really don’t have to do much. When it runs out of power, it returns to the dock and charges itself before heading out again to get back to work, if necessary. Also, as it has Wi-Fi connectivity a feature-full App and Alexa/Google Assistant compatibility, your days of laborious manual vacuuming are long gone.

One of the biggest draws to this robot vacuum for us is the middle-range price tag. It’s certainly not the cheapest but considering the iRobot branding and the fact it comes with so many great features, we think it’s a steal. One to consider, if you’re looking for the best quality for the best price.

Pros

  • checkGreat value for money
  • checkDirt Detect Technology
  • checkAlexa and Google Assistant compatibility

Cons

  • cross-altBumps into walls and baseboards quite hard

Specs

  • Dimensions 13 x 13 x 3.6 -inches
  • Battery life 90-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Dual multi-surface brushes
  • Extra features 3-stage cleaning system, Dirt Detect technology, iAdapt vSLAM Tech
9eufy BoostIQ RoboVac 11+ Robot Vac 11+

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Don’t worry, you’re not seeing double. This is like the RoboVac 11 but with that little + on the end of its name. It’s therefore an updated version of the same device. What’s new with this one compared to the other? Power Boost as been tweaked and replaced by BoostIQ. This helps to increase and enhance the suction power of the vacuum when necessary. It also benefits from an improved bumper at the front to help it glide more effortlessly underneath and around furniture while protecting it against wear and tear.

It’s not just the above that’s been updated, the standard three-point cleaning system has also been enhanced thanks to the wider rolling brush and the redesigned rolling brush. So, there’s enough to get excited about, even if you’ve used the other RoboVac 11 before or are looking for something with a bit more to it.

As you’d expect of a robot vacuum, the RoboVac will find its way back to the charging base when its power level drops low to make sure it gets there before it runs out. It may not have Alexa or Google Assistant compatibility, but it does have a full 100-minutes run time and can be automatically set to vacuum at certain times of the day. The 1000Pa suction strength is also particularly attractive.

Pros

  • checkUpdated BoostIQ Tech
  • checkImproved three-point cleaning system
  • check100-minute runtime

Cons

  • cross-altNot great with cords and cables

Specs

  • Dimensions 12.8 x 12.8 x 3.4-inches
  • Battery life 100-minutes
  • Wi-Fi No
  • Scheduling No
  • Brush Type Rolling brush and two side brushes
  • Extra features BoostIQ Technology and Dual anti-collision systems
10ECOVACS DEEBOT N79S Robot Vacuum Cleaner

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next in our guide is another, and our last from ECOVACS. The N79S is an updated version of a previous model, the N79. This version has everything the N79 offered, with the addition of Alexa and Google compatibility and the new Max Mode Suction Power. It shares a lot in common with the other model we’ve featured from the brand, including the virtual mapping software that ensures the robot vacuum doesn’t just clean random spots, but works in a methodical way.

Thanks to the mapping tech, it’s also able, like many of the others, to detect objects and obstacles and plan its journey around them. In terms of the actual cleaning, you’re given four different modes to choose from. There’s Single Room mode, Spot Mode, Edge Mode and Auto-Clean mode. This means that you can get the most thorough clean possible. Also helping to ensure it cleans as thoroughly as possible is the three-stage cleaning system the vac uses that helps to remove as much dirt as it can from the flooring.

We love the fact that all these great robot vacuums, for the most part, feature the Alexa and Google Assistant connectivity. Doesn’t it completely epitomize laziness by not only not lifting a finger to vacuum your flooring, but also just barking orders to the poor little robot doing the hard work for you? When you want to give your vocal chords a rest, there’s always the remote control or the app.

Pros

  • checkFour cleaning modes
  • checkAlexa and Google connectivity
  • checkLarger wheels for climbing

Cons

  • cross-altSometimes gets stuck

Specs

  • Dimensions 33 x 33 x 7.8-inches
  • Battery life 100-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Main brush and side brushes
  • Extra features Smartphone app, Alexa and Google Assistant controls, larger wheels for climbing
11Samsung Powerbot R9250 Robot Vacuum Cleaner

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

From the geniuses at Samsung we have yet another Powerbot robot vacuum cleaner we want to discuss. just when you thought it was safe to put your feet back down on the floor, Samsung have made it even safer with the R9250 model of their popular POWERBot range of robot vacuum cleaners. Regardless of the type of flooring you have in your home, this robot will make light work of it with 50x more power than other similar items. The CycloneForce Tech, an invention from Samsung, is utilized to give a more consistent level of suction power and to reduce clogging. This is possible thanks to the centrifugal forces separating the dirt and debris into a separate chamber.

When the comes to the subject of actual cleaning ability, this Samsung, like the other, also makes use of the Full View Sensor and Visionary Mapping Plus and you have access to a coverage map via the app that shows you exactly what has and hasn’t been cleaned. If that wasn’t all, the Alexa and Google Assistant functions make vacuuming a lot of fun and the fact that you can just point a light beam from the remote and the vac will clean that spot, is something we’re still foaming at the mouth about with giddy glee.

Alongside the nice touches that sets this apart from other Samsung models, you also get the EasyPass Wheels for traversing over obstacles, the effective combo brush and the ability to fully program a schedule for your robot vac’s cleaning time. This makes it worth the high-ticket price, if you can afford. What’s more, the filter is completely washable, so you can always ensure you’re using the vac at its highest efficiency and effectiveness.

Pros

  • checkWashable filter
  • checkPoint cleaning function
  • checkFull View Sensor and Visionary Mapping Plus

Cons

  • cross-altMay break or push things approximately lighter than 10lbs

Specs

  • Dimensions 14.9 x 14.3 x 5.3inches
  • Battery life 90-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Combo brush
  • Extra features Point Cleaning, Google and Alexa compatible and washable filter
12Dyson 360 Eye Robot Vacuum

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Never let it be said that Dyson will be outdone by anyone in the vacuum cleaner market. Not content with having one of arguably the best and undeniably the most popular manual vacuum cleaner range, they had to go and have a try and robot vacuum cleaners. This brings us to the 360 Eye Robot Vacuum. The first thing you’ll notice is that it looks like a weapon, and then there’s the ever-present symbol that it’s a Dyson product – the cyclonic tech. This is undeniably a slick little machine, but there’s more to it, as with any Dyson, than just sexy curves and smart and futuristic coloring.

For starters, it has the extremely powerful and efficient Dyson digital V2 motor. This is a light and small motor that helps to generate the powerful suction you’d expect from a Dyson. Eye Robot by name and Eye Robot by nature, thanks to the 360-eye vision system that this cleaner uses to scope out your entire room to work out the best way to navigate around your place. It also benefits from the connection to a very detailed and feature-full App that’s available for both Android and iOS devices. The app allows you to analyze data, schedule and control your vacuum.

Its main brush has a large width and uses carbon fiber and nylon bristles to give you edge-to-edge cleaning and to cover larger floors. As mentioned earlier, it features Radial Root cyclone tech that separates the dust from the dirt, ensuring that everything is sucked into the bin. As is the case with most of these, you can shout commands at it using your Google Home or Amazon Alex, but one thing that sets it apart from the others is the fact that it comes complete with tank tracks to ensure it maneuvers fine over all flooring. Expensive, sure, but stunning, nonetheless.

Pros

  • checkTank tracks for wheels
  • checkRadial root cyclone tech
  • check360-degree view of room

Cons

  • cross-altExtremely expensive

Specs

  • Dimensions 9.4 x 9.1 x 4.7-inches
  • Battery life 75-minutes
  • Wi-Fi Yes
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Full-width brush bar, bristles for carpets and hard floors
  • Extra features Digital V2 Motor, Tank Tracks, 360-degrees viewing system
13ILIFE A4s Robot Vacuum Cleaner

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

From one extreme end of the price range to the other, if you’re looking for a cost-effective, but worth the investment, robot vacuum, look no further than the ILIFE A4s. This is by far the least expensive in our guide and it’s not hard to see why. This does not use any special navigational hardware and will just clean in a random pattern. It’s also not got Amazon or Google connectivity or a Wi-Fi connection. You may be wondering what it does have. Well, would we ever let you down by showcasing a product that was too far below par? Is that what you’d expect from Men’s Gear?

Despite its shortcomings and downsides, there’s a lot to love about the ILIFE A4s, beyond its low price. For example, it can be programmed to get to work while you’re not around, it features the rather nifty Gen-3 CyclonePower cleaning system for sufficiently strong suction power. You also get the benefit of built-in sensors that help it avoid bumping things too much or falling down the stairs.

Probably the thing we love the most about this vacuum cleaner is its incredibly long battery life. With a total of 140-minutes of runtime on a single battery a real possibility, that sets it apart from many of the others above. So, sure, it may not be an all-singing-all-dancing-everything-but-the-kitchen-sink kinda robo vac, but we still think it’s worth some serious consideration.

Pros

  • check140-minutes runtime on single charge
  • checkGen-3 CyclonePower suction
  • checkMultiple sensors

Cons

  • cross-altCan get stuck under furniture

Specs

  • Dimensions 12.2 x 12.2 x 3.0-inches
  • Battery life 140-minutes
  • Wi-Fi No
  • Scheduling Yes
  • Brush Type Tangle-free roller brush and side brushes
  • Extra features Gen-three CyclonePower cleaning system, Remote Control,

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

Top features of a robot vacuum

As you’ve seen, there’s a wide variety of robot vacuum cleaners to choose from nowadays. Although we’ve managed to whittle what’s out there down to a list of 13, that may still seem like a lot. To help make your decision easier, it’s important to think about what features are the most important. Some of the top features you should consider are:

  • Cleaning performance – How strong its suction power is, the kind of floors it will work on and whether it gets pet hair along with normal dust and debris too. Cleaning performance comes down to the type of motors used, the type of brushes used and whether it relies on a navigational system or not.
  • Battery Life – Depending on how big your home is, you’ll want a robot vacuum with a suitable runtime on a single charge. The best on the market right now offer 120-minutes or even more. However, if you’ve only got a small room or property, there’s options that offer 60-minutes maximum runtime.
  • Scheduling – This is an important feature to look out for as it can allow you to program specific times and days when you want the robot vacuum to work. Scheduling capabilities vary from model to model though, so be sure to look at them closely.
  • Alexa and Google Assistant Connectivity – Most modern robot vacuum cleaners now come with connectivity to Google Assistant and Alexa. This is great as it means you don’t have to worry about reaching down to touch the vac or its base and instead can just bark orders at it.

How does a robot vacuum work?

Obviously, you’re more interested in the robotic side of things, than the vacuuming and suction side of things. There are two main ways a robot vacuum finds its way around your home – using sensors and mapping. The sensors a robot vacuum utilizes helps it to pick-up and detect where obstacles and other dangers are. The most common of these are – obstacle sensors, cliff sensors and wall sensors.

Are robot vacuums easy to clean?

So, you may well be sold on having a robotic helper to clean the floors in your home. However, one thing you would be right to consider is just how often or how much is involved in cleaning the robot vacuum. Most robotic vacuum cleaners don’t require much in the way of maintenance. They have filters that need to be cleaned periodically and dust/rubbish bins that need to be emptied.

That’s usually it and depending on how good the filter is or how big the dustbin is, the frequency of emptying and cleaning these components will vary from brand to brand and model to model. You may on occasion have to clean the brushes, but this again, is not a frequent job.

How long does a robot vacuum battery last on average?

On average, most of the best on the market offer between 100 and 140-minutes runtime on a single charge. However, this obviously changes from model to model. We’ve featured models in our guide, for instance, that offer 140-minutes runtime and are cheaper than many offering just 60-minutes. Deciding on runtime should be something, as noted earlier, that you take into consideration and base it on how much floorspace you need to clean. Many models only offer 60-minutes of vacuuming, but for smaller properties or homes that don’t have pets and a lot of mess, this will often suffice.

How easy is it to set-up a robot vacuum?

Again, this is something that will vary from model to model, but generally, modern robot vacuum cleaners require little to no setup really. The robots themselves will scan your home, if they have navigational and mapping tech, and work out their own pathways and go from there.

Say Goodbye to Vacuuming!

Okay, so you won’t be able to say goodbye to all the vacuuming around your property, especially if you’ve got kids, pets and lots of people living in your home. However, with the help of a robot vacuum, you can lighten your load considerably. We hope you enjoyed our look at the best of the best on the market and we especially hope it helps you to make the best decision for you and your home.

The way we see it, although the Roombas from iRobot are the best and most intuitive on the market, there’s a lot of positives that could be said for others we highlighted. It really comes down to what you’re looking for and what you don’t want to deal with. If you’re okay with the occasional lifting and resetting of a robot vacuum, there’s a model for you. Whereas if you don’t want to have to do much, there’s also a model for you.

Robot vacuum cleaners will only keep getting better and better, which is kind scary to think about, considering how good they are right now. So, rather than feel the need to spend your Saturday, or worse still, that precious time after work when you get home, vacuuming, get a robotic servant to do it for you.

Best 6 Under Desk Treadmills

BEST UNDER DESK TREADMILLS

1Rebel Desk Treadmill 1000 Under Desk Treadmill

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The first treadmill for work in our guide is this rather awesome Rebel Treadmill 1000 under desk treadmill from Rebel Desk. Rebel Desk is a company that was established by Kathleen Hale after she had put up with the pain and strain on her joints and muscles that working at a desk all day, long enough. Thus, the office treadmill was born. As one of the first purpose-built treadmills for work on the market, it’s still one of the best. With Rebel Desk you get a slick, appealing and reliable exercise station that, although it’s simplistic and minimalist in design, this makes it a fuss-free piece of equipment.

If you don’t like having to deal with a complicated setup or assembling your office treadmill, then the Rebel Treadmill 1000 is perfect. It comes fully assembled, weighs just 88lbs and is easy enough to setup. All you need to do is take it from the box, roll it into place beneath your standing desk or any tall counter, place the connected console onto the desk and press start. There’s really nothing else to it. With an ultra-quiet 1.5hp DC operation motor, you’ll be able to walk while working, without fear of disturbing your fellow colleagues or anyone else you may be talking to. That includes those on the phone, on video chats and just people in your office.

Robust and sturdy, the Rebel 1000 has a stainless-steel construction and as capable of handling a maximum weight of 250-pounds, it’s a good allrounder. The fact that it comes with a 20-years warranty for the frame, 2-years warrant for the motor and 1-year warranty for labor and parts, means your significant investment is suitably protected. There’s cheaper models on the market. This much is true, but if you’re looking for more than just an affordable treadmill, but one that’s effective and easy to use, then this is a great option. Consider being a Rebel Desk Jockey, with this great treadmill.

Pros

  • checkExtremely lightweight and portable
  • checkVery quiet running motor
  • checkAffordable and competitively priced
  • checkDoes not require assembly
  • checkComfortable walking on in socks/slippers
  • checkCushioned deck prevents joint/knee damage

Cons

  • cross-altSide rails not very strong
  • cross-altOften sounds creaky when used

Specs

  • Weight 250lbs
  • Dimensions 63 x 24-inches
  • Speed Range 0.5 – 2.0mph
  • Running Area 18.1 x 49.6-inches
  • Step Up Height 4.0-inches
2LifeSpan Fitness TR1200-DT3 Under Desk Treadmill

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next up we have the LifeSpan TR1200-DT3 model, which is a streamlined and upgraded version of the manufacturer’s TR800-DT3 treadmill. This has been built with a much lower step-up height and wider walking area. Given it’s got a slightly more powerful motor that provides 2.25hp, compared to the above, it still works surprisingly quiet. That’s even regardless the intensity or speed of your workout. This obviously makes it highly desirable for both home and work use as an under desk treadmill. The console that comes with the TR1200-DT3 has a cool, contemporary look and feel and is small enough to sit on a desk, beside your phone and computer without taking too much space up.

LifeSpan have also ensured that the console is quick and simple to use and as well as starting and stopping the machine, you can also alter the speed from 0.4 all the way up to 4mph. From the screen you can check out your progress during workouts, with metrics for step count, elapsed time, calories burned, distanced covered and speed. Thanks to the Bluetooth connectivity, you can sync the console with the exclusive Active Trac App and use this to monitor your fitness progress over time. This obviously helps you by giving you greater control over your workouts and the results you gain from them.

Rather than relying on a pedometer, the treadmill uses Intelli-Step to record the number of steps you walk during a workout. There’s also the addition of the Intelli-Guard feature that detects any non-movement and pauses the belt automatically incase you have stepped off it to use the toilet or deal with a call or an appointment. If you’re looking for a durable starter under desk treadmill that provides you with enough features, has a large weight capacity and more comfortable walking area, this is for you.

Pros

  • checkWider speed range than others from 0.4 to 4mph
  • checkAdvanced Inteilli-Guard and Intelli-Step features
  • check6 shock absorbers to protect your joints
  • checkBluetooth-connectivity for syncing to Active Trac App
  • checkKey for safe emergency stops
  • checkGenerous weight capacity of 350lbs

Cons

  • cross-altThe buttons need to be pressed very hard
  • cross-altIrritating beeps when buttons pressed

Specs

  • Weight 350lbs
  • Dimensions 63 x 28.5 x 7.25-inches
  • Speed Range 0.4 – 4.0mph
  • Running Area 20 x 50-inches
  • Step Up Height 4.6-inches
3IPO Smart Walk Folding Treadmill

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The IPO Folding treadmill won the reddot award 2018 and it’s not hard to see why it was considered a top product. It’s got an incredibly slimline design that borrows from modern smartphone designs, integrating sports tech and pushing the standards for treadmills. The width of the running belt is a roomy 18-inches, the same width as standard treadmills found at gyms. Despite the size though, it weighs a rather lightweight 64lbs, 200% lighter than a standard model. What we especially like about this is the various storage options it benefits from.

For starters it has a pulley-style design that means it can be moved and slid out under your desk or out from it, as necessary. As they’re made from great rubber, they are highly resistant to wear and tear, and won’t scratch the flooring in your office or wherever you set it up. As well as its slimline and low profile making it easy to store under things, it also comes with magnetic wall stickers that mean it can be affixed to the wall when its not being used.

In terms of using it, this has been kitted out with smart, interactive features that make controlling it a cinch. To start the treadmill, you take three steps. To speed it up, you run or walk faster on the front section, and when you want to maintain speed you move to the middle section and then to lower your speed again you move to the back. The digital LED display allows you to keep track of your distance, steps and time. Again, this is another that’s powered by a strong, but quiet motor producing 0.5hp.

Pros

  • checkPlenty of storage options
  • checkIntelligent speed control options
  • checkOptional hydraulic handrail
  • checkSmart and interactive controls
  • checkLightweight and compact
  • checkDouble speed option with handrail

Cons

  • cross-altCould provide more detailed metrics
  • cross-altSmart functionality could be better

Specs

  • Weight 220lbs
  • Dimensions 57 x 26 x 3.5-inches
  • Speed Range 0.37 – 4.97mph
  • Running Area 47 x 18-inches
  • Step Up Height N/A
4Titan Fitness Under Desk Walking Treadmill

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

From the highly regarded and industry leading gym equipment and fitness brand Titan Fitness, comes the next under desk treadmill in our guide. Its walking area is similarly wide like many others in our guide at 18-inches, while being a little longer at 53-inches. Despite its bigger size though, it still retains a similarly low-profile of 8-inches high and is therefore compatible with a wide variety of standing desks. Titan Fitness have also ensured that it’s virtually good-to-go straight out of its box. You simply need to plug it in and press a few buttons and you can start working out as you work.

With the Titan Fitness under desk walking treadmill, you get the benefit of a handy and incredibly detailed computer. Metrics displayed on the screen include time, speed, laps, steps, distance traveled, and calories burned. There’s also buttons that enable you to select different speed options, whether you’re adjusting it using the presets or the up and down button. You also start and stop the machine from the computer console. Speaking of speed, this treadmill can run from 0 to 4mph, so isn’t really designed to run on, but will provide more than enough of a walking workout for you.

A nice bonus for this treadmill is the fact that it’s compatible with the FITSHOW App. You can use this to track your fitness routine and progress over a longer period than just each day. Really, if you’re looking for a no-nonsense at desk treadmill, the Titan Fitness might be a great option.

Pros

  • checkComprehensive, yet simple to use console
  • checkLow 8-inch profile
  • checkCapable of reaching 4mph
  • checkTracks a full range of metrics
  • checkReasonable weight capacity for price
  • checkCompatible with FITSHOW App

Cons

  • cross-altConsole cycles through the metrics
  • cross-altHeavy unit is hard to move

Specs

  • Weight 250lbs
  • Dimensions 65 x 25 x 8-inches
  • Speed Range 0 – 4mph
  • Running Area 53 x 18-inches
  • Step Up Height 6-inches
5iMovR ThermoTread GT Desk Treadmill

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

From iMovR comes our next one, namely the ThermoTread GT Desk Treadmill. This is a very professional and aesthetically-pleasing machine that’s been made with at home and office use firmly in mind. One of the things that iMovR have clearly put a lot of time and effort into is the noise level generated by the treadmill and its working motor. Even as it produces a healthy and robust 3.0HP and 4000RPM, it still only produces around 42.7dB of noise. For those of you whom that’s just numbers to, that’s less than the noise generated by a standard office HVAC system. So, if you’re looking for a quiet operating model, this could be for you.

That’s not all though, as the motor has been specifically designed with lower speeds in mind, it remains reliable and lasts for much longer than running treadmills. Its maximum speed may not sound too impressive at 2.5mph, but trust us on this, that’s more than enough when you’re trying to field sales calls and carry out boring data entry on Excel. The lower speed also makes it a lot safer to use in the work environment and you’re less likely to experience fatigue or cardio exhaustion. The clever design also benefits from a silent-running cooling fan that stops the motor burning out, even when it’s used every day for several hours.

The cherry on an already tasty piece of cake (sorry, speaking of cake might not be doing a lot of good when you’re trying to keep fit and lose weight, but anyway), is the console with its clear and bright LCD touchscreen. This is as easy to use as a smartphone and therefore not like those complicated monitors at the gym. It displays metrics such as your distance travelled, walking speed, walking time, standing time and of course, calories burned. It also comes with a USB port for downloading upgrades to the software. Bakelite material that’s 1-inch thick has been incorporated to give the treadmill a more stable standing and this is also bolstered by 6 shock absorbers. Awesome.

Pros

  • checkEasy to use touchscreen LCD console
  • checkUSB port for future-proofing software
  • checkSilent-running fan ensures motor stays cool
  • checkExceptionally quiet, but powerful motor
  • check6 shock absorbers reduces fatigue
  • check6 shock absorbers reduces fatigue

Cons

  • cross-altHarder to move around, as it weighs 147lbs
  • cross-altLow high-speed option

Specs

  • Weight 400lbs
  • Dimensions 67.5 x 28.35 x 9.5-inches
  • Speed Range 0.5 – 2.5mph
  • Running Area 20 x 50-inches
  • Step Up Height 5-inches
6Conquer Under Desk Portable Electric Treadmill

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Last in our guide is this model from Conquer Equipment, who have been offering high-quality fitness equipment, standing desks, racing products, cycling accessories and a whole lot more since back in 208. So, yes, they know a thing or two about designing and producing under desk treadmills that are high-performance and easy to use. That’s exactly what could be said about this electric walking treadmill. Its low-profile and compact design makes it the perfect choice for your home office or business premises. The fact that it’s on the market for such a competitively affordable price, makes it hard to pass on.

Consider its price though, you’d probably imagine its low speed would be much lower than its 0.6 to 3.7MPH but Conquer Equipment do know their stuff. If you’re worried about lugging it around from one place to the other in your office or home, don’t. Conquer Equipment have ensured that it can be easily moved and stored, thanks to the two wheels incorporated into the front of the machine. Additionally, it can also be folded up vertically to a space-saving 53-inches high. From the moment you get your hands on this cool thing, you can use it, as it does not require any assembly whatsoever. So, if you’re not a fan of flatpack and complicated upside-down instructions, it’s for you.

There’s no clunky console. However, you do have the benefit of a remote control. It can be a bit of a pain having to bend over to turn on and off your treadmill, especially if you’ve already worked up quite a sweat. With the remote control though, you can start, stop and adjust the speed of the treadmill. Although we’re not going to discuss it in detail here, it’s worth noting that Conquer Equipment have designed and produced several excellent accessories, such as the Portable Standing Desk Workstation and the Height-adjustable Standing Desk. Check them out.

Pros

  • checkBudget price, but well-designed
  • checkSpeed range, perfect for walking
  • checkHandy wheels for easy storage
  • checkPractical vertical storage options
  • checkNo assembly required to setup
  • checkEasy to use controls

Cons

  • cross-altCould benefit with a display
  • cross-altRemote has a flimsy design

Specs

  • Weight 188lbs
  • Dimensions 54 x 23 x 5.5-inches
  • Speed Range 0.6 – 3.7MPH
  • Running Area 41.5 x 16-inches
  • Step Up Height N/A

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

Things to consider when buying an under desk treadmill

Even though we’ve managed to present you with an easier an easy to digest guide to what we feel are the 6 best treadmills for walking on while you work that are available now. It may be that you need help with whittling that list down further. We don’t blame you, as there’s not too much between many of the treadmills highlighted above.

Of course, one of the best ways to figure out what would be the best treadmill for you and your work environment, would be to look at the things you need to consider when buying one. In this section, we’ve listed the features, specification and other details that you should always think carefully about when choosing a at your desk-style treadmill.

  • Brand – As we will discuss in greater detail towards the end of this guide, there’s a huge difference between a treadmill that’s been designed for walking on and one that’s a running treadmill that’s been repurposed. Why are we noting that here? Because, in order to ensure you buy one specially-designed for walking on, you need to choose a reputable brand. The brands whose products we’ve reviewed above are 6 that we would highly recommend.
  • Price – The cost is never something you should solely make a buying decision on, but it should always be taken into consideration. Under desk treadmills are available at various price points and this is usually dictated by the range of features they have. In order to get the best under desk treadmill, you need to consider features you really want and whether your budget will allow it.
  • Treadmill Weight – The actual weight of the treadmill is something you’ll have to think about. If you’re intending on moving the treadmill at all or need to because of work or cleaning being done in your place of work or home office, it’s better that its as lightweight as possible. That’s why we’ve highlighted that specification along with other important details for the treadmills we’ve reviewed above.
  • Capacity – Although this is hopefully common-sense, it’s important you check the maximum weight capacity of an under desk treadmill before investing in it. Not all are designed and built equally, and it’s important to find the right one for your size and weight to prevent accidents or damages from occurring. It may be a little humbling, but you need to be honest with yourself and buy the treadmill that’s most appropriate for your actual weight, not the weight you are in your head.
  • Noise Level – Obviously, as you’ll be working while working out, you need to pay close attention to the level of noise different under desk treadmills generate. This is especially important if you work in a busy office space with others or spend a lot of time on the phone, talking to colleagues, customers and/or clients. No-one wants to hear something that’s even louder than the office air con unit or a trash compacter working through tons of garbage. Several of the treadmill models featured above benefit from having near-silent running motors powering them.
  • Safety Features – Safety should always be a priority when using exercise equipment. It’s best to look for a treadmill with as wide a tread as possible, for the available space you have in your office or workplace. Many under desk treadmills come complete with shock absorbers that help reduce the chance of experiencing pain in your joints, muscles and bones. Many models feature emergency stop keys and other automatic stop functions.
  • Console – While the largest part of the treadmill will be the desk component, if you’re looking to get the best out of your daily workouts as possible, it’s important to find one with a good console. It should have a clear and visible screen to provide you with the necessary metrics and data you need to assess your performance. Although many don’t, most highlighted above feature some display and console of some kind. Metrics worth ensuring that a treadmill tracks and displays includes – time, speed, steps walked, distance travelled, and calories burned.
  • Speed – The speed capacity of under desk treadmills is also important, because although you will spend most of your time working and walking, there may be breaks from work when you want to run. Having a treadmill with and adjustable speed, is obviously a must. Remember, you’re not looking to be racing to a sprint, but you want a reasonable range to choose from.
  • Available Space – It’s also important that you consider the available space you have under your desk. The dimensions have been highlighted clearly in the specifications of each under desk model we’ve covered in our guide above. If you’ve got a particularly small desk, it may be worth investing in a larger one. As under desk treadmills are meant to be used with standing desks, you should measure for one to ensure you have the available space.
  • Handy Extras – In addition to the above many under desk treadmills feature notable extras, whether its extra functions, features or accessories. Remote controls are especially handy, as they give you the convenience and hassle-free ability to switch your treadmill on, off or alter the speed without reaching to touch it or even the console. Another handy extra is USB ports and Bluetooth connectivity that helps you to sync up the treadmill with your smartphone or activity tracker. This adds a whole extra dimension to your workout and allows you to track your progress more comprehensively.

Benefits of using an under desk treadmill

Perhaps you’re still on the fence a little and need a nudge in the right direction as to whether you should invest in one of these special treadmills or not. Obviously, any amount of working out or fitness you do in your life will help you. However, if the gym scares you or you just don’t have the time available in your schedule, it’s worth knowing just how good walking can be for your health in general. To give you an idea, we’ve put together a list of the major benefits that come from walking regularly, by using an under the desk treadmill.

  • Walking on a regular basis helps to increase your metabolism and in turn build lean muscles while burning calories and shifting unwanted fat.
  • Helps to improve your balance and coordination, that in turn can not only help your fitness and ability to work out, but also with your ability to work at your job.
  • Can be mood enhancing, so if you’re prone to feeling down or low, or just under it all at work a little, walking can improve your state of mind, while boosting your self-confidence and mental cognition, which contributes to better self-esteem and sleeping patterns. All of which will make you feel more positive about each working day and push you to achieve more and do better.
  • Strengthens your bones and muscles, as it helps to improve your blood circulation.
  • Reduces your chances of suffering from type 2 diabetes, hypertension and even heart diseases by over 50%. If that’s not motivational enough, we’re not quite sure what really would be!
  • Reduces the amount of unnecessary pressure placed on your muscles and joints, while correcting your posture and helping to reduce low back and joint pain.
  • Helps to stimulate your mind, which can have a positive effect on the quality of your work and your productivity levels.

How to use an under desk treadmill properly

Before investing in one of the great treadmills we’ve featured above, its also worth thinking about how you use an under desk treadmill properly. We’ve highlighted some of the important safety considerations you need to make to ensure you get the best out of using an under desk treadmill.

  • Note the Weight Capacity – The maximum capacity is not there just for fun, it’s there because that’s the amount of weight that treadmill is able to cope with, while in use. Even if it does run for some time with more weight than stated in the paperwork or in our review, over time it will eventually wear down much quicker than it would if you’d followed the guidelines.
  • Footwear – First things first, invest in a good pair of shoes that encourage good posture, won’t damage the treadmill belt and are, crucially, comfortable to wear for long periods of time.
  • Walking speed – Ideally you should aim to walk at a speed of around 1 to 2mph while you are working. Although you can build up your speed a little, you need to be careful because the faster you walk, the faster it may be to speak on the phone and use the computer. Additionally, walking too quickly too soon will increase how much you sweat.
  • Safety Clips – Most under desk treadmills come with safety clips. Even if you’re sure you won’t fall, it’s still best to use these as they will prevent accidents.
  • Session Length – Although you may be tempted to walk on your under desk treadmill all day, you don’t have to. It’s thought that around 30-minutes a day is a sufficient amount of time to spend walking. Particularly in the beginning anyway. As you get used to it, you could consider increasing your session lengths.

Walking treadmill vs Running treadmill – What’s the difference?

As the demand for treadmills suitable for under desks and in workplaces has increased over the last decade or so, you will find that there is a huge difference in quality. While many under desk treadmills are designed specifically for use in the workplace and in offices, others are simply retreading of treadmills that were designed for use in a gym setting.

Although that might not seem like a particularly big deal, there are some differences between the two that are important to note. The speed range, for example, is one area where there’s a big difference between workplace treadmills and those that have been repurposed. If the treadmill has a speed range of anything more than around 4.0mph, then it was probably used in a gym or as a home gym treadmill before. Office treadmills tend to be quieter too, so if you find a model that makes a lot of noisy, it may be the case that it is just a running treadmill that’s been remarketed or repurposed for the working walkers crowd.

There’s also the important fact that running treadmills are not generally designed to function well at lower speeds over longer periods of time. They simply don’t have the appropriate motor torque rating for this kind of use. If you’re a little confused, let us explain it a little better. If your treadmill has a peak torque range designed for higher walking and running speeds, it will burn out far quicker if you are only using it for slower walking speeds.

So, if you’re looking to walk on a treadmill at work, you need to invest in one that has been specifically designed with that use in mind. You can usually tell this, over and above the tips mentioned above, by whether it’s from a reputable brand. For example, Rebel Desk, Conquer Equipment and iMovR, along with Titan and LifeSpan all make purpose-built standing desk and workstation-compatible treadmills.

Tread Lightly, Sure, but Make Sure You Do Tread!

That’s it dudes, we’ve reached the point in our guide where we like to take a little time to wind things up. We really hope you appreciate the work we’ve put in and enjoyed looking at the different options for treadmills that are suitable for under your desk, whether it’s at the office or in your home. We’re sure we’ve shown enough of a variety that you’ll be able to find the right model for you. You really need to decide whether you want to invest in or not. That’s why we’ve emphasized the benefits in our buyer’s guide. Before all that though, what have we learned from our look at the best of the best compact walking treadmills?

We’ve learned that there was more choice than even our team at Men’s Gear were aware of. That’s saying a lot, considering how much we love gadgets and gizmos here. There’s a wide price range, sure. What we were very surprised about though, was the fact that very often, some of our favorite models were the lower-priced models. That’s not to say that the most expensive, weren’t worth the investment. But it just goes to show that price isn’t always the best thing to guide whether something is of good quality or not. There’s more involved.

That’s why when looking for that treadmill that you can use with that fancy workstation or standing desk, that you should always consider more. You’ll undoubtedly have a budget, but you need to think about things like weight capacity, the level of speed you want to walk at and how detailed you want to be able to track your progress. Determining these, will help you to figure out the best model for you.

With that, there’s not a lot else to say. It’s a more crucial time than ever to break from the trappings of our sedentary lifestyles. With obesity and other health issues a real problem, one way to combat this is with these ingenious fitness machines. Just walking 20 to 30-minutes a day can make all the difference. So, really, what are you waiting for exactly?

Best 12 Tent Heaters

BEST TENT HEATERS

1Mr. Heater’s Indoor Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We will warm up with a look at this indoor heater from Mr. Heater. These guys know a thing or two about tent heaters which is why it won’t be the only creation we’ll be featuring from them in this buyer guide. You can choose to get this model in either a red and green color or a camouflage design perfect for camping.

It works by adding a one-pound propane canister which is placed on top of a sturdy but compact stand. To get it working it simply needs a push of a button and a turn of the gas valve. The head of the product can be swiveled up to 45-degrees to make sure you and all the family keep warm inside the tent after a day of adventuring.

The head is also home to one of the many safety features woven into its impeccable design. There is a wire guard covering the head at all times to prevent accidental burns. It also has an automatic shut-off system in case oxygen levels dwindle too low. Yet, many will be ready to praise its ability to switch itself off if it falls over as the best safety feature of them all. Your tent will never become the campfire with this awesome and safe tent heater.

Pros

  • check3,800 BTU per hour
  • checkLightweight and compact
  • checkColor options
  • checkSimple operation
  • checkExtensive safety features
  • checkHeats up to 95 square feet

Cons

  • cross-altBetter options for large groups

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Propane
2Coleman Tent Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Coleman is a familiar name on some of our buyer guides. They somehow manage to pull the goods out of the bag with lots of fantastic product within their niche. Their tendency to produce quality shines through again with this tent heater.

This is another model powered with a propane canister. You will have to buy the 16.4-ounce propane can yourself, but once you have it inserted it will last around 14 hours. Plenty of time to keep you and the guys warm on your weekend fishing trip. The design makes use of catalytic technology so no flame is present and therefore making it even safer for use inside your tent.

This model is a real winner when it comes to the convenience factor. It has been made with a built-in handle for easy transportation. Also worth mentioning is the base which can be detached ready for it to be hung up in the perfect location using the eyelets. You could even hang it from the top of the inside of your tent! Hit that button to learn more about this Coleman product.

Pros

  • checkRenowned outdoor brand
  • checkSafer flameless operation
  • checkBuilt-in handle for easy transportation
  • checkEyelets let you hang it up
  • checkDetachable base
  • check1,500 BTU per hour

Cons

  • cross-altPropane canister sold separately

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Propane/Catalytic
3TMS Camping Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Changing direction a little bit, we will now take a look at the TMS Camping Heater. At first glance, you may not think this is a tent heater, but it really is. It just has to be incorporated with a specific type of tent. It can only be used with a tent that has a stove pipe vent. However, if you still like the look and the features on offer, there is nothing stopping you from using this tent heater as your main campfire.

One of the most awesome features on offer here is the heater’s cooking tubes. With this product in your getaway arsenal, you will be able to enjoy some baked potatoes around the campfire as you discuss the latest cool products you saw on Men’s Gear.

The top grate is also a key part of this tent heater’s design. When flat, this grate can be used as a sort of drying rack. It’s perfect for wet socks after a day’s hiking or to warm your gloves up. When the grate is upright, it doubles as a handle to make transporting this tent heater even easier.

The stove design may put a few men off who are already thinking to the cold morning after the beers around the campfire. Yes, one of you boys has to clean the stove. Well, this design makes it less of a task due to easier access to the leftover ash. Learn more by clicking the button below.

Pros

  • checkSophisticated stove design
  • checkCan cook food!
  • checkGrate to dry clothes
  • checkEasy-access ashtray
  • checkDual airflow for safety
  • checkStove tools included

Cons

  • cross-altOnly for specific tents

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Stove
4Martin Portable Camping Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Martin has brought us back to the orthodox designs we were seeing before that phenomenal stove tent heater dropped by. This highly-portable tent heater will be your new best buddy on any camping trip or fishing expedition. It’s an absolute beast that operates at 3,100 BTUs per hour. However, you can tailor its heating power with an adjustable control to match the size of your tent and your needs.

All you need to do is add your own propane canister of one pound in weight (equal to other models that ask for a canister of 16.4 ounces!). Then, adjust the metal dish to the area of the tent that you want to feel the most intensity of the heat. This adjustable dish is another great feature that lets you tailor the product to your needs.

There are many other impressive features that will help you decide if this tent heater is right for you. The cylinder base can be extended to improve the product’s stability. The base even benefits from large foot paddles to reduce any chance of it falling over when switched on. Safety features include an automatic shut-off if the flame is extinguished and it has a safety grid over the head of the product. Have you warmed up to it now?

Pros

  • checkPowerful performance (3,100 BTU)
  • checkAdjustable heat settings
  • checkRotating dish
  • checkExtendable base with foot paddles
  • checkMultiple safety features

Cons

  • cross-altAgain, no canister included

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Propane
5Mumba Portable Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The first electric tent heater on our list comes from Mumba. The use of electricity allows users to more accurately control this tent heater. It can produce low or high heats and adequately warm up different spaces between 40 and 90 square feet.

The product is constructed using insulating material. If you worry that your younger kids may get burned, then that worry can be extinguished here. The shell of the heater will never pose a threat and an internal safety function will automatically turn off the tent heater if its temperature exceeds 176-degrees Fahrenheit. Other safety features include a clever self-shutdown if the product tips over.

This is one of the most compact and lightweight tent heaters on the current market. It has an oscillating feature to blow hot air around your tent quicker. But it’s not just tents that it’s great for. Simply grab the on-board handle and take it to your study, your shed or your man cave. Wherever you take it you will be guaranteed efficient warmth.

Pros

  • checkOne-year warranty
  • checkAccurate low and high settings
  • checkInsulated for protection
  • checkMultiple internal safety features
  • checkCompact and light with handle
  • checkMultipurpose use

Cons

  • cross-altSolar pack or vehicle power needed

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Electric
6Mr. Heater Portable Tent Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

At the halfway stage of our buyer guide looking at the best tent heaters, we find one of the most powerful models to date. This Mr. Heater creation is a 4,000 to 9,000 BTU heater, meaning it can easily warm up the biggest tents and rooms. In fact, it will be sufficient to keep a space of 200 square feet warm.

It’s a clean burner to reduce the maintenance needed to keep it in perfect order. This convenience continues to be seen in the model’s handle which can be erected when needing to transport it but can be folded down to make it more compact when not in use.

Due to its mammoth power, it’s a good job that Mr. Heater puts your safety as their priority. This tent heater has a wire guard covering the heating component to prevent accidental burns. It also has an automatic shutdown feature in light of certain dangerous and common situations. If your tent heater tips over, if your pilot light goes out, or if low oxygen levels are detected, this machine will stop working instantly.

Pros

  • checkOne-year warranty
  • checkExtreme power warms 200sft
  • checkEasy maintenance
  • checkCollapsing handle
  • checkAuto-shutdown safety features

Cons

  • cross-altNot shipped to California
  • cross-altPropane tank not included

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Propane
7Advanced Mini Tent Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Number seven is a little bit of an oddball. Unlike many of the other tent heaters which can be used inside or outside your quality tent, this model is probably best used near the campfire. To use this model, you place it on top of a stove. The heater will then transfer the burning flame into radial heat. It’s certainly a unique way of keeping the frost at bay.

To be able to function in this way, the tent heater is made with 400 grams of stainless steel. The only issue is that you will need to also have a stove with you. A stove may have already been packed in the car but if not, this heater is adding a little more bulk and inconvenience to your trip.

Other than that, there are certainly no complaints from us. It will be able to heat up its near vicinity effectively and in an efficient manner. If you’re looking for one of the best tent heaters for a camping trip, hunting weekend, mountaineering adventure or to have on your boat, then this model should be considered. To find out more about this Advanced heater, click the button below so you can learn more.

Pros

  • checkHigh-temp resistant stainless steel
  • checkHeats up spaces efficiently
  • checkMultifunctional
  • checkWarranty included
  • checkUnique design

Cons

  • cross-altMust be used with a stove
  • cross-alt For use outside of the tent

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Stove – Propane – Radial heat
8Martin Camping Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another quality option is this tent heater made by Martin. It looks a bit like a megaphone but it’s certainly more useful in the forest. It’s designed with foldable legs, so you can stand it securely on any flooring or terrain. You can adjust the temperature by easily turning the dial to the setting you need. Whether you have it on a low or high setting, the heater will remain completely efficient thanks to catalytic technology. Catalytic models are renowned in the industry as some of the most heat-saving and reliable creations.

To get it working, you simply add a one-pound canister of propane gas. This will generate a staggering 3,000 BTUs and give you seven hours of warmth. Quite enough time to get you and the guys discussing the day’s adventure over some camp food.

If you’re bringing the kids on a camping trip, this tent heater could be a front runner. Propane models are much safer around the little ones and it also features some additional safety features. The heater will automatically turn itself off if the flame extinguishes, keeping you and the whole family safe. Don’t let the cold stop you from exploring nature with the Martin Camping heater!

Pros

  • checkEfficient performance
  • checkMultiple safety features
  • checkFoldable legs adapt to the terrain
  • checkDial to adjust heat settings
  • check3,000 BTUs

Cons

  • cross-altNot the cheapest

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Propane
9Allegro Tent Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We might have picked up on the previous model being priced slightly above average, but this model from Allegro is certainly the most expensive on our list. But there is a reason for it which we will get to shortly. This design is another electric camping heater which will require you to dig out a solar power device or similar power bank tool.

Once this mean green machine is up and working, it has the power to increase the nearby temperature by a whopping 50-degrees Fahrenheit. This explains its price tag. This also makes it a model that will be best used by guys who are extreme explorers or men who really love adventuring in the outdoors during ice-cold conditions. Maybe the perfect addition to your hunting cabin?

Despite its brute power and heating capabilities, the product is not overly big and is, in fact, quite a lightweight tent heater. It may also surprise you that the guys over at Allegro have made this model to go inside a work tent. That’s not to say it cannot be used around the camp’s seating area or your man den.

Pros

  • checkCompact design
  • checkLightweight for easy transportation
  • checkNine-feet cord length
  • checkCSA certified
  • check5115 BTUs per hour
  • checkIncreases temp by 50-degrees Fahrenheit

Cons

  • cross-altVery costly

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Electric
10Coleman Portable Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

You could always choose this catalytic flameless heater instead. The second appearance from Coleman on our tent heater buyer guide brings us to a model that can be used anywhere from inside your tent to inside the golf caddy.

Once you have bought your own propane canister, simply attach it in seconds and enjoy 1,500 BTUs warranting you comfort and warmth. It follows suit to its other model by offering many quality design features. Owners can carry the tent heater using the built-in handle and can then rest it down on a stable base with extended paddles. These paddles give you extra peace of mind that it will remain sturdy on uneven surfaces.

However, the base is detachable. Why would you want to detach such a sturdy base? Good question. The answer is in one of its other cool features. The tent heater has strategically-placed holes that help you tie it up. This way, the tent heater doesn’t have to sit on the ground while you and your buddies fight for the most-heated positions. You can attach it to the top of the inside of your tent or tie it to a tree to give a different angle of heating. Let this tent heater keep you warm and enjoy its accompanying five-year warranty.

Pros

  • checkTrusted manufacturer
  • checkBuilt-in and convenient handle
  • check1,500 BTUs
  • checkSturdy detachable base with paddles
  • checkEyelets to hang the heater up
  • checkExtensive five-year warranty

Cons

  • cross-altFirst propane canister not included

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Propane
11Prokth Portable Camping Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Earlier, we saw a tent heater that used a stove to transfer into radial heat. Well, here is a second option for the guys that liked that unique setup. The product you purchase is the heating component and legs for a gas stove. It doesn’t come with a stove of any kind. Again, this may be inconvenient to some light-packing campers but to many who already plan on bringing a stove, it won’t be a burden.

The heater is protected in a stainless-steel cover and a rust-proof shield that also provides an element of safety. The whole design is exceptionally compact so if it’s forcing you to bring along a stove as well, you can at least benefit from the small dimensions on the tent heater.

On the neck of the tent heater is a valve which allows you to control the airflow. By controlling the airflow, you can control how much heat it gives off and tailor it to your tent or space. The product comes with a carrying bag to make storage and transportation easier. You also get a warranty with this tent heater to give some added payment protection.

Pros

  • checkUnique functioning
  • checkStainless steel design
  • checkRust resistant
  • checkCompact dimensions
  • checkTravel bag included
  • checkValve to control temperature

Cons

  • cross-altRequires a stove to work
  • cross-altGas tank/stove not included

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Stove – Propane
12Honeywell 360-Degree Tent Heater

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We will finish our buyer guide of the best tent heaters with a look at an electrical model that brings a new dimension to the table. Forget about fighting for the best spot in front of the tent heater and instead choose this 360-degree heater which will keep everyone warm. The tent heater not only keeps everyone warm, but research also shows that sitting in a circle will encourage good conversation. Not that our readers will be short of interesting topics.

This Honeywell tent heater comes at a competitive price and combines convenience with performance. First off, it’s super easy to operate and easy to tailor it to the temperature you and the guys need. It has two dials. One dial can be used to set the intensity of the blowers while the other sets the temperature. It even has a fan-only setting.

Other awesome inclusions are a carrying handle and an extra-wide base to enhance its sturdiness and safety. Safety is a big deal to this tent heater which also has an automatic shutdown feature in case it tips over. And that includes if it tips over in any of its 360-degree direction!

Pros

  • checkTwo easy-to-use dials
  • checkInnovative 360-degree design
  • checkAffordable tent heater
  • checkCarrying handle
  • checkSturdy base
  • checkExceptional safety features

Cons

  • cross-altRequires electrical current (power bank)

Specs

  • Tent Heater Type Electric

BONUS PRODUCT

1Firsermo Heated Sleeping Bag

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Our tent heaters have been all about keeping you warm on your weekend adventures. However, on our search for the best tent heaters, we came across a unique and innovative camping item that will also keep you warm – and we couldn’t help ourselves in wanting to show it to you. So here it is. Let’s take a look at the Firsermo Heated Sleeping Bag.

This sleeping bag has been made with an enclosed adapter to keep you warm when the mercury drops overnight. It can be powered using an electrical source or a power bank. You can even manage the temperature of the sleeping bag from an app on your phone. But that’s not all. The app can even be adjusted so the temperature of the foot area of the sleeping bag is different from the waist area.

You may be a little bit wary of a sleeping bag with an electrical current in the outdoors. However, these bags are completely waterproof, safe and tested in the USA, the EU, China and Japan. They are super comfortable too and made with breathable fabric which has a soft texture. The product comes in a choice of four awesome colors and can be washed after removing the heating element. You even get a convenient bag to make transporting it simple.

Pros

  • checkTailored temperature to zones
  • checkTested and 100% safe
  • checkMachine washable for convenience
  • checkTemperature controlled by an app
  • checkInnovative product

Cons

  • cross-altRequires power bank

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What Type Of Tent Heaters Are Available?

Tent heaters come in all shapes and sizes. Yet, aside from their difference in appearance, there are some significant differences in how they function and keep us warm. Here is a breakdown of the most common types:

Propane tent heaters – these tent heaters are powered by a canister of propane gas. The gas is used as a fuel to provide the heat. Many of these models are made to be compatible with a one-pound/16.4-ounce propane canister which lasts many hours. In the majority of cases, the tent heater isn’t supplied with these propane cans. You will have to buy your own and you will have to make sure you buy the right size for your tent heater. Don’t forget to check the packaging before setting off on a camping trip or you will be left to rub sticks together to keep warm.

Catalytic tent heaters – this is where some confusion comes in. Some people often question whether a tent heater is a propane heater or a catalytic heater. A catalytic tent heater is a heater which uses catalyzed reactions to grind down molecules, resulting in heat production. They are an excellent option because of their primary benefits. They are much more efficient than heaters that are not catalytic heaters. A tent heater that uses propane gas may well be a catalytic heater. Therefore, some propane heaters listed above are also catalytic heaters. Don’t worry because we’ve spelled them out for you!

Electric heaters – another type of popular tent heater is an electric heater. These also have some extraordinary benefits for happy campers. The use of electric means these heaters often have dials to adjust temperature setting and even fan settings. This makes them much easier to tailor to the exact temperature you need for the space you need to heat up.

However, there are some drawbacks to this sort of heater. Electric heaters need power to work. Unlike buying a cheap canister of propane, they’re more of a head-scratcher when needing to be used in the outdoors. There are two popular ways around this conundrum. You can now buy solar power packs to convert sunlight into an electrical charge. These packs are a great investment and can then be used to power your electrical tent heater, smartphone and more. Alternatively, you can buy one or two power banks and use these pre-charged resources to power the heater and stay warm.

Stove tent heaters – the final type of tent heater is probably the design you’re least likely to come across. These are tent heaters that require the firepower from a stove to make them work. These heaters can come in different shapes, including dish-like models and round pot-like designs (see products seven and 11 above for a comparison).

Because they use a stove to get them working, they are can be often considered as another type of propane tent heater. Just like you don’t get the propane canister on those models, you don’t get the propane-powered stoves on these.

However, not all heaters that require a stove work in the same way. Some products will convert the heat into radial heat to provide an innovative way of spreading warmth. On the other hand, like the dish design just above in product 11, these work in a similar way to many propane heaters.

What Are BTUs?

Among the featured tent heaters in our buyer guide, you will have noticed a repeated reference to a product’s BTU rating. These ratings are important to understand the performance capabilities of each heater. Therefore, we need to explain what BTUs are, so you make the best decision when buying.

BTU stands for British Thermal Unit. It’s a measurement of heat that is used across many different types of heating appliances and products. Specifically, BTU measures the heat that is required to be able to increase one pound of water by one degree Fahrenheit. The bottom line is that the more BTUs than a tent heater can generate, the more warmth and heat it can provide efficiently.

How To Choose The Best Tent Heater?

Would you rush and choose the first piece of ground to pitch your tent? Of course not, and the same applies to buying a tent heater. These decisions shouldn’t be rushed to make sure you find the best model that works for you, your family, or your wolfpack, here are three top tips before buying:

Heater type – as we just explained the differences between the most popular types of tent heaters, you can use this knowledge to get the right design that works for your upcoming venture. If you don’t own a stove or a power bank then the electric heaters and stove tent heaters won’t be for you. In that case, try and find a propane-powered heater instead.

Dimensions – some heaters can be carried on your person while some will need to be loaded and unloaded from the car. Remember to consider the dimensions and weight of these heaters against the ways you will transport them.

Power – we just explained BTUs. You can use this information along with product specifications to find a heater that will work with the square feet you need heating up.

What Are The Safest Tent Heaters?

The idea of adding a heater to a tent – which is likely to be highly flammable – may concern some of us. Even more so if our kids are joining us on an adventure. However, despite the initial thoughts of putting a heater inside a tent, they’re actually very safe. It should be said that not all heaters – even camping heaters – can be put inside a tent. Always consult your specific product’s instructions or manufacturing guidelines if you’re unsure.

Many of the best designs have a number of safety features to prevent accidental injury or bigger disasters. Along with tent heaters that are flameless. These are the safest types of tent heaters. Many of these ones have been designed with cages around the main heating mechanism and wide stable bases to prevent them from tipping over.

If they do tip over, the best tent heaters will automatically switch themselves off. Many have also been fine-tuned to shut down in a number of other situations, such as when low oxygen is detected or if the flame has unknowingly gone out. It’s these features that you should look out for when trying to find the safest tent heaters.

You should also look out for CSA certificates. These certificates are issued by the CSA group who have tried and tested different appliances before going to market. Tent heaters will need these certificates to ensure they function accordingly to guidelines and safety regulations. If the tent heater you’re looking at doesn’t have a CSA certificate, don’t give it a second glance.

Pitch Up, Warm Up!

Thanks for joining another one of our buyer guides giving you the lowdown on cool gear all men should own. We’ve had the privilege of showing you some of the best tent heaters on the market and some truly special ones from the likes of Coleman, Martin, Honeywell, Allegro and TMS. It’s certainly a difficult choice between them.

We put our top 12 together to offer you many options for different types of heaters with different designs and capabilities. Not to forget we cater to all budgets here on Men’s Gear. Despite showing you the different models, all the tent heaters on our guide ooze quality.

Remember to take into account our advice when making your decision and consider these tent heaters against your wants and needs. We did the same and we’re currently sat around the campsite enjoying the editor’s pick. Once again, thanks for taking part and we are keen to see you with us again on another buyer guide soon!

Is that a bear…

Best Brookstone Massagers

BEST BROOKSTONE MASSAGERS

1Brookstone Cordless Shiatsu Neck & Back Massager with Heat

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

First in our guide is this Brookstone Shiatsu neck and back massager. This conveniently designed massager helps to easily relieve tension and pain in tired and tight muscles anywhere on your neck or back. It’s incredibly easy to use – simply slide your hands into the comfortable handles and you’re ready to go. Thanks to the rechargeable battery and cordless design, you’re able to use it just about anywhere without feeling tethered to a mains supply or any annoying cable getting in the way. To hit the spot you need massaged most, you simply raise or lower the handles to place the satisfyingly-deep kneading nodes over the areas that need it most.

In total, there’s eight nodes incorporated into the design, all ready to work hard for you. With three different intensity levels to choose from and two massaging mods, you’ll find it easy to find the right setting for your aches and pains. The addition of heat provides your shoulders, neck and back muscles with even more relief.

The last thing you’d want when using a massager, like this Brookstone massager is to feel weighed down. Fortunately, it only weighs 4.05-pounds, which is hardly going to add undue pressure. It’s just perfect, in fact, and will leave your muscles feeling as if Kaito or Hinata have worked their expert hands over you. Although a little on the pricey side, it more than makes up for its efficiency and convivence.

Pros

  • checkEasy to use
  • checkOption of heated pads for extra relief
  • checkLightweight and cordless

Cons

  • cross-altCould be warmer

Specs

  • Weight 4.0lbs
  • Target Area Neck and Back
  • Heated Yes
  • Cordless Yes
2Brookstone Max 2 Cordless Dual-Node Percussion Massager

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next up is this rather awesome Brookstone handheld massager. Again, this benefits from a rechargeable battery and cordless design, but also offers the versatility of being handheld. That means that virtually anywhere on your body, or a partner’s can be massaged until it feels better. With a 3.8-pounds sturdy machine-engineered aluminum body, it’s built to last without feeling too cumbersome or heavy. It can be directed across problem areas at whatever angle with the use of the two ergonomic and conveniently placed handles.

As this is a percussion massager, the nodes move up and down giving you a much deeper massage. The versatility of this device is matched by the variety of options you have. As well as the choice of three specific programs for different deep tissue massages, there’s also the option to customize your experience further. You can do this by choosing the massage speed that’s best for you, from 1,750 to 2,550RMS.

Looking for a soothing, energizing or maybe even a pulsating massage? This can provide the massage experience you’re looking for. We really like the fact that you can use this device on your own or with the help of a willing partner too.

Pros

  • checkCompetitively priced
  • checkWide range of speeds
  • checkThree preset massage programs

Cons

  • cross-altWorks better with cord

Specs

  • Weight 3.8lbs
  • Target Area All over
  • Heated No
  • Cordless Yes
3Brookstone Active Sport Massager

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Perhaps you are more specifically looking for the best Brookstone massager to combine with your sporting activities. This Brookstone Active Sport Massager is a worthy contender for that kind of use. It has been designed specifically to target your hard-working muscles, whether you’re hitting the gym to buff up or have been training hard for that 10k or triathlon. Although it is not cordless like a lot of the other models in this guide, it offers a lot of versatility in that it features interchangeable nods.

There’s a total of three different nodes to choose from – the wide-coverage node for greater surface areas, along with the ball and pinpoint node for greater intensity on precise areas. The fact that it’s a percussion-style massager means that it works into the muscle tissue deeper for greater relief. Combine that with the adjustable speed control and you have all you need for the perfect DIY massage after a strenuous workout.

As we noted, this is not cordless, but that won’t matter much as it’s got an extremely generous seven-foot cable. What’s more, at just 2.12-pounds it is rather lightweight and easy to maneuver to target the areas where you need it most.

Pros

  • checkThree interchangeable nodes
  • checkSeven-foot power cord
  • checkDeep and penetrating massages

Cons

  • cross-altNot cordless

Specs

  • Weight 2.12lbs
  • Target Area All over
  • Heated No
  • Cordless No
4Brookstone Shiatsu Neck and Back Massager with Heat (Corded)

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If this looks familiar to the Brookstone Shiatsu neck and back massager we featured at the top, that’s because it is virtually the same device. The main difference between this version and that one is that it is corded, not cordless. Although we’d generally consider the other to be best because it’s cordless, we appreciate that this may be more within your price range if you’re looking to save a little money. Essentially, it’s the same machine though, you’re just tethered to the mains, that’s all.

As the above model, it’s designed to target pain and tension specifically in the back and neck region of your body. Using it is easy – you just slip your hands into the grips and then slide the strap up and down your body, working the nodes over the troubled areas. There’s eight nodes in total, all ready to work their magic. It may not be a Swedish masseuse named Olga, but it’s the next best thing and more convenient too.

In addition to the nodes though, there’s also the option to add a little heat, increasing the effectiveness. The cord aside, the design is still incredibly lightweight. So, you get all the benefit of a great massage, that you can perform on yourself, without adding extra strain and pressure on your muscles.

Pros

  • checkEight effective massage nodes
  • checkOption of heat
  • checkTwo massage programs

Cons

  • cross-altHeat could be a bit better

Specs

  • Weight 4lbs
  • Target Area Neck and Back
  • Heated Yes
  • Cordless No
5Brookstone Shiatsu Foot Massager with Heat

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Spend a lot of your feet at work and in life in general? For tired and aching feet, you need the next Brookstone massager in our guide. That is, this Brookstone Shiatsu foot massager with heat. Slip your feet into the holes after a long and hard day or week and allow the dynamic-squeeze air compression and deep-kneading massage rollers work their magic on your feet. What we especially love and we’re sure you’ll love too is the fact that it has a streamlined design that will fir just about anywhere.

So, whether you just want to use it at home or take it to work with you, you can benefit from the relief to all that pain and discomfort. Like many Brookstone massagers in our guide you have the choice of three different auto-massage programs – energize, pulse and soothe. In addition to the air compression and kneading rollers, there’s also the element of heat that will help to increase its effectiveness.

Although it’s not cordless, it does come with a cord wrap incorporated into the design which ensures your cable is always kept out of the way. As feet are obviously not the most hygienic things in the world, another great feature is the zip-out and removable linings that Brookstone have included into the design. That means you can clean them between uses. Give your feet the attention they deserve.

Pros

  • checkCombination of air compression and kneading rollers
  • checkHeat element for extra pain relief
  • checkBuilt-in cable tidy

Cons

  • cross-altMay be too rough for some

Specs

  • Weight 12.65lbs
  • Target Area Feet
  • Heated Yes
  • Cordless No

6Brookstone 2-in-1 Tapping and Shiatsu Neck and Shoulder Massager

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Who doesn’t like to see their money go a little further? Well, that’s what’s possible when you choose this 2-in-1 Brookstone massager. Two in one is very apt, as that’s just what it offers – two popular massage techniques for the price of one. The two massage types are the Shiatsu and Tapping. While the Shiatsu form of massage involved deep-kneading and circular motions on specific acupressure points, the Tapping form is more percussive and involves light-knocking movements.

This model is designed in a similar way to the other neck and shoulder and back massagers already mentioned in the guide. You have two handles that you slip your hands into and can move the massaging nodes over the areas you are looking to target. As well as a choice between either tapping or shiatsu, you can also choose to benefit from both at the same time. Therefore, you’ll get an even more effective massage session using it.

Like many of the top Brookstone massages though, it also has the additional element of heat to give your muscles and all those nasty knots relief. As if that wasn’t enough versatility, you also can choose from three levels of intensity.

Pros

  • checkWeighted straps for the best position
  • checkHeating element
  • checkShiatsu and Tapping massage

Cons

  • cross-altNot cordless

Specs

  • Weight N/A
  • Target Area Neck and Shoulder
  • Heated Yes
  • Cordless No
7Brookstone 3D Back Massager

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Do you find there’s that one spot at the small of your back that always feels tight or achy, but unless you go to a massage therapist, you can’t reach it? With this Brookstone back massager, that’s no longer a problem. This model is called a 3D massager because it offers a design that almost-perfectly follows the contours of your back muscles. It has a total of 12 Shiatsu massage nodes that deeply knead at those tired and strained muscles in both your upper and lower back, depending on the way you position it.

Although it’s not cordless, it’s designed to fit on your chair, so it’s not really the type of massager you need to move around to get the best use out of it. It does, however, mean that you need to ensure you have a chair close enough to a mains supply. Brookstone have designed the massager to fit in most chairs, so whether you’re planning on using it at home or while you’re at work, you can.

The LEDs is perhaps the most curious feature. Curious or ridiculous, but it does help to highlight where exactly the massager is soothing. As a nice extra, the color changes when the direction of the massage program has changed. A must for all desk jockeys and high-flying call center sales reps.

Pros

  • check12 deep-kneading modes
  • check3D design contours with your back
  • checkFits in almost any chair

Cons

  • cross-altInterestingly, too powerful for some

Specs

  • Weight 6.6lbs
  • Target Area Back
  • Heated No
  • Cordless No
8

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Do you love those massage chairs you often get at gyms, sports centers and some spas? Although it would be great to spend time in one of them, every day, it’s not really an option. Well, not unless you want to take lots of time off work. That is, unless you fancy investing in this rather awesome Brookstone massage chair topper. With it, you can turn just about any chair into a fully-functioning massage chair.

The rolling and Shiatsu nodes work their way over the entire area of your back giving it an amazing massage. It’s also able to target specific parts of your back with precision. A great addition to the design is the dynamic-squeeze chambers of air that sit at the waist and hips contracting and expanding. What is their purpose? To simulate the actions of a professional massage therapist. As well as making you feel better, it also helps to increase your circulation.

By far, our favorite feature of this massaging accessory is the fact it comes with a remote control. Having full access to all the controls means that you don’t have to get out of your seat to change the different settings. You, therefore, just need to sit back and relax and can switch and change the different zones you want to target, operating the air chambers, switching the heat, intensity and style. Want an incredible massage at work? Get the Brookstone massage chair topper.

Pros

  • checkHandheld remote control
  • checkMimics a real massage therapist’s squeezing
  • checkTransforms any chair into a massage chair

Cons

  • cross-altNot as effective for taller guys

Specs

  • Weight 15.56lbs
  • Target Area Back and Shoulders
  • Heated Yes
  • Cordless No
9Brookstone Rock and Recline Shiatsu Massage Chair

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Whereas the products we’ve featured up to this point in our guide have been small massagers, the next is a full-on Brookstone massage chair. Brookstone are well-known for their high-end massage chairs. If you have very limited space, that doesn’t mean you’re not able to have a massage chair. Not as this specific model, which is appropriately called the Rock and Recline. It has a more compact size, but with the same reclining functionality as a full-size model.

At the end of a rough day at work, you can come home and sink into the chair and let the Shiatsu, rolling and tapping motions work at your aching and tight muscles. Once settled, recline and the special L-track rollers can work their magic up and down your back and underneath your glutes. You have the option to choose between four effective auto programs, Energize, Stress Relief, Relax and Quick.

In a similar fashion to most of the top Brookstone massagers, there’s the option to add heat into the mix when you’re enjoying a deep and satisfying time. The heat helps to work through that tension and increase your circulation, as well as a plethora of other great benefits too. Our favorite feature, without a doubt, though, is the handheld remote control. This means you can relax and switch through the different presets and customize your experience, without getting up out of the seat. Ultimate in relaxation!

Pros

  • checkDelivers exceptional relief to back and glutes
  • checkFour preset massage programs
  • checkHeat can be added to any program

Cons

  • cross-altMaximum capacity 265lbs

Specs

  • Weight 82lbs
  • Target Area Back and Glutes
  • Heated Yes
  • Cordless No
10Brookstone ReAct Shiatsu Massage Chair

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Sometimes a more cumbersome and bulkier shaped massager is not practical for shoving in your gym bag or taking to work with you for during your breaks. That’s when you are looking for something more portable. Something perhaps like one of the most compact of all the Brookstone handheld massagers, in other words, this mobile sport massager. Thanks to the large percussion massage node, it still manages to pack a suitably calming and relaxing punch, despite being a lot smaller compared to others on the market.

Its handheld design makes it relatively easy to maneuver over the parts of your body that hurt the most. So, if it’s leg day and you need to soothe your hard-worked quads or arm day and your biceps are aching, this is the perfect accessory for you. The fact that it’s cordless makes us love it even more, as you don’t have to worry about a pain in the neck cable getting in the way of, well, massaging that pain in your neck.

It’s also incredibly versatile thanks to the adjustable speed settings, so you can switch it up a gear for a more intense massage or relax with a slower and deeper one.

Pros

  • checkCompact and lightweight
  • checkCordless for extra portability
  • checkLarge node

Cons

  • cross-altNo heat setting or vibration

Specs

  • Weight 2.15lbs
  • Target Area All over
  • Heated No
  • Cordles Yes
11Brookstone ReAct Shiatsu Massage Chair

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The penultimate Brookstone massager on our list is another full-on, but still very compact and lightweight (considering) massage chair. The Brookstone ReAct massage chair is perfect if you regularly have aching and tense muscles that need a little bit of TLC. It doesn’t matter if you injured yourself playing golf at the weekend, or whether it was pulling a muscle on the job or just because you want to chill out in front of some Netflix, the ReAct may be the addition to your home or office you need. This chair features the deep-kneading Shiatsu-style nodes that many Brookstone products are known for. They have been proven to help encourage and stimulate natural muscle recovery, while relieving tightness and soothe those painful muscles.

It offers a full-body design with a special L-channel that massages all the way from the top of your back and shoulders down to underneath your thighs in a continuous track. This style of massage helps to send you into a much deeper and relaxed mood. Although there are only two main preset massage programs, for Back separately and Full Body, it is more than enough to really feel the benefit.

You even have the option of using the spot massage feature to target areas in more need than others. Heat can also be added to either of the programs to help intensify the experience and results. Don’t want to get up from your seat to change the settings? You don’t have to as they can be located on your right-hand side of the chair itself. Brookstone have done it again with this chair – not one you should skip passed too quickly.

Pros

  • checkRemoveable neck pillow for extra support
  • checkBack and Full Body preset massage programs
  • checkConvenient onboard control panel

Cons

  • cross-altDoes not recline

Specs

  • Weight 61lbs
  • Target Area Back, Glutes and Thighs
  • Heated Yes
  • Cordless No
12Brookstone S2 Shiatsu Massaging Heated Seat Topper

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We find ourselves looking at another topper-style massager that can turn even the most unforgiving and anything-but-relaxing chair into the kind of seat that is built for kings. The Brookstone S2 is another massager topper that offers the high-quality shiatsu-style massage we’ve all come to expect from the company and their amazing products. Despite its portable design, the S2 chair topper still features four nodes that move in three directions. That is, back and forth, counter-clockwise and clockwise. This means that you can target any of the three main areas of your back – lower, middle or upper.

If that wasn’t enough, the width of the nodes can be adjusted to ensure they’re covering all important and especially needy areas. It’ll come as no surprise when you consider the name that you have the option to add a little heat to the occasion. Heat and massage are general a good combination. Warmth on aching and tense muscles can help relieve them on its own almost as much as massaging them.

This chair is perfect if you’ve been longing for a more cost-effective solution to your need for a weekly or even daily massage. Not all of us have the time, even if we have the money, to pay for massages on an almost-daily basis. With the massage chair topper, you pay once and benefit repeatedly!

Pros

  • checkExtremely compact and portable
  • checkHeated element enhances the massage
  • checkFour nodes that move in three different ways

Cons

  • cross-altNo vibration

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

Things to Consider when Buying a Brookstone Massager

There’s several important things you need to consider when buying a Brookstone massager. However, perhaps the most crucial of them all is, what parts of the body and muscle groups is it designed for? As you’ll have undoubtedly seen from the guide above, there are many different massagers and not all of them are made equal. While some are designed to target your strained muscles and all those knots in your neck and shoulders, others are designed to target the other end of the body – your feet.

  • Choose the Right Massager for the Aches You Feel – With that in mind, you need to be careful to choose the right massager that’s going to help you. If you find you have the most trouble in your feet, for instance, it’d be a waste of money investing in a full-on back and body massage chair. Particularly when you can get a perfectly fine foot massager for a fraction of the price. Likewise, if most of your tension was felt in your neck, a massager designed for the back would be as useful as a chocolate fireplace. So, rather than getting swept up by what the fanciest and most kitted out models have and can do, think about what you need in a massager.
  • Corded or Cordless, How Portable do you Need it to be? – Another important thing you would need to consider is how portable you need your massager to be. Are you planning on taking it to work, gym and just about anywhere else you can think of where it wouldn’t be odd? In that case, a cordless Brookstone massager is really what you want. Then, you can benefit from the stress and strain relief, without being tethered to a mains supply.
  • Want Some Warmth with Your Massage? – Do you really benefit from warming your muscles when relaxing them? In that case, you would be right to consider investing in one of the top Brookstone massagers that feature the option to heat the nods and padding.
  • Cost – Obviously, you should never base any buying decision on just the price alone. You want, for instance, to ensure that you’re not only getting a product that falls within your budget. You Want one that offers you real value for the price tag. Often, the cheapest, particularly when it comes to portable and at-home use massagers, are not going to be the best. That’s not to say that you should spend more than you’re able to just to get the best of the best of the best. You need to take a more balanced approach and look at everything you want in a massager and try and match that criteria as closely as you can.

What are the Main Health Benefits of Using a Massager?

Although there are plenty out there, and reading this, that love massage just for the pampering and attention it gives them, most like receiving massages because of the numerous health benefits. While you could argue that there’s really no comparison between a real hands-on expert masseuse, modern massagers, Brookstone personal massagers, offer the next best thing.

As such, you can expect similar health benefits from using the best Brookstone massager you can buy. Primarily, those health benefits will be felt directly in the target areas you’re planning on using the massager. So, those knots in your back will disappear, as is the case with those strained and pulled quads from that hardcore workout. There are some common health benefits that you can gain as a nice bonus while soothing those aches and pains. It’s important to note that these will vary from person to person and area of the body to area of the body. However, the most common include:

  • Increasing the recovery of your muscles, particularly after workouts, strenuous activity or an injury
  • Reduce muscular pain
  • Enhance your circulation
  • Increase your suppleness and flexibility
  • Reduce your heartrate
  • Promote improved sleep

What’s So Special About the Brookstone Brand?

You may wonder why, when there’s plenty of other brands to choose from, we decided to focus in on Brookstone and their selection of massage products. You’d be very justified to wonder and think that. The short answer is that they’re popular. But a short answer doesn’t really answer the question. So, a longer and more detailed answer is called for.

One of the reasons the team here at Men’s Gear really like the Brookstone brand, is that it’s a sign of reliability. Brookstone have been in the retail business in one form or another since the 1960’s. There’s no way a company can be in business that long and not learn from its successes and mistakes and continue to streamline and tailor its offerings so that they’re the best they’ll ever be.

Okay, okay, there’s plenty of ways a company could be in business that long and not better themselves as a result. Brookstone aren’t one of those kinds of businesses.

Another thing that draws people to Brookstone and makes the brand so special is their attention to detail, built quality and functionality of their massagers. Simply put, their massagers are often the best-in-class for their kind and far better value than other brands. Take any one of the top Brookstone massagers featured in our guide and you’ll find that they all have sturdy builds, are versatile and have a plethora of different features that makes them that little bit better than others.

People see the Brookstone name, think of the highly-sought-after massage chairs that the company does so well, and feel compelled to buy something with the name emblazoned across it.

How Well do Brookstone Massagers Work?

With any type of gadget or accessory like this, that has been designed to mimic or simulate something that a human normally handles, it is not always cut and dry that it’ll actually be effective or not. That’s why it’s important to consult reviews and why you shouldn’t just base what you read in a product description.

Some work a lot better than others and it’s not always down to price. We’ve looked at several in the guide above that were really, truly and utterly beautiful. As noted earlier, it’s crucial that you choose the right Brookstone massager for the problem areas on your body. You also need to be aware that there’s a tendency with cordless massagers to not provide the same intensity or speed as their fully corded counterparts.

Again, a lot of this is relative. If you’ve only got minor aches and pains, you’ll only need a gentle massager. whereas if you’ve got this strain here and another knot there, you’ll be better with either a larger two-in-one model or one that offers deeper kneading and even percussion massage, in addition to some warmth too.

Massage Those Aches and Pains Away!

Well, there’s our guide to the top Brookstone Massagers out there on the market. We’re sure you’ll find no other guide to the best massagers released from Brookstone online. We’ve tried to cover all bases – providing you with a rundown of our favorite 12 massagers, along with an insightful buyer’s guide.

You hopefully have a better understanding of what to look for and consider when choosing from the multitude of Brookstone portable and corded massagers there are available. Furthermore, you should have a better idea of the functions and features you should be on the look for, particularly if they’re relevant to your specific aches and pains.

We’ve done everything for you, apart from actually choosing the one you should definitely pick (unless you decide to go with one of the ‘Top Picks’ at the top of the page and if so, we’ll give ourselves a pat on the back and offer you a polite ‘you’re welcome’). That final decision is entirely up to you. The only thing we can definitely say with a lot of confidence is that your brand new Brookstone massager is among the shortlisted selection on this page.

Go find it!

Best 20 Key Organizers

BEST KEY ORGANIZERS

1KeySmart Pro Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The first key organizer going down a storm in the Men’s Gear research lab is the KeySmart Key Organizer. To call it a key organizer does it an injustice. First off, this product does store up to 10 keys securely and neatly in its casing. However, just as we have had the rise of smart doorbells and smart watches, we now have a smart key organizer. This key organizer can be tracked using Bluetooth via a free app so you never lose your keys. The app can even make the organizer play a tune to make locating it even easier. Move aside empty pizza boxes and bowls of popcorn from last night’s game – you have places to be!

On top of the ability to find your keys using the app, this key organizer will even help you find your smartphone. Through some clever configuration, you can press a button of this key organizer and it will make your smartphone ring. It will even ring when you have left it on silent. Additional features include a space to keep your car key fob, an LED light and a cool bottle opener. This certainly is a sophisticated key organizer which is made even better with a two-year warranty.

Pros

  • checkAccompanying app helps locate keys
  • checkHelps find your smartphone
  • checkBottle opener attached
  • checkSpace for a car fib
  • checkSleek design

Cons

  • cross-altPricier than other options

Specs

  • Key capacity 10
  • Color White
  • Dimensions 3.6 x 0.6 x 0.6in
  • Weight 0.8oz
2Carbocage Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If the previous key organizer was a “swarve” and sophisticated gent wearing a suit, the Carbocage Key Organizer is a survival expert living in the jungle. There are no flashy features that can locate phones. And there are certainly no apps around. Yet, this one is just as great in a whole other way. This product was manufactured in Germany using reliable carbon fiber to make it both solid and lightweight. It is then put together using quality stainless steel bolts. If you want a key organizer to last then this may be your best option.

This model can hold slightly more than the previous key organizer with a capacity for up to 14 keys. One of the most innovative features here is its double-asymmetrical design. By making such a design, owners can locate the key they need by feeling them. This saves you time and adds to its convenience factor.

Pros

  • checkExceptionally made with German manufacturing
  • checkReliable materials including steel and carbon
  • checkLightweight design
  • checkLarge flat key capacity
  • checkConvenient double-asymmetrical design
  • checkCost-effective option

Cons

  • cross-altNo room for a car fob

Specs

  • Key capacity 14
  • Color Carbon
  • Dimensions 3.3 x 1.1 x 0.5in
  • Weight 0.48oz
3Northwall Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next up is the Northwall Key Organizer. This product has made our list of the best key organizers because it has been able to match cool rugged aesthetics with unrivaled practicality. In fact, there may be no competing with it for men that work with their hands and with tools. Maybe the perfect gift for a bro or a father?

The holder aspect of the design can cater to regular flat keys, key fobs and even some small tools. Yet, you may not even need to add some of your tools to it because it comes equipped with one of its own. There is a compact and sleek tool already inserted into the design. This stainless-steel tool includes a flathead screwdriver, a box opener and a bottle opener ready for Monday Night Football.

All of this quality comes in a casing of 100% vegetable tanned leather. This leather is available in a black or brown color. But it’s not just for aesthetic value. The leather acts as a soft cushion between your keys and valuable smartphone cases. With this key organizer, your keys are safe and so is your smartphone!

Pros

  • checkAesthetic balance between sleek and rugged
  • checkMultipurpose tool included
  • checkAccommodates fobs and small tools
  • checkChoice of leather color
  • checkBottle opener included

Cons

  • cross-altLimited plastic spacers included

Specs

  • Key capacity 10
  • Color Black or brown
  • Dimensions 2.95 x 0.75 x 0.59in
  • Weight 1.41oz
4Keytec Premium key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Keytec Premium Key Organizer proves that good things come in small packages. This cool design is not just nice to look at, but it’s also made to last. By using aircraft grade and high-resistant zinc, they have ensured longevity from their product. Cleverly, they have then put this quality material together while including anti-loosening washers to make sure your keys never fall out.

One of the issues when buying this product is that it must be assembled by you when it arrives. The good news is that assembling the product does not take much effort at all. Keytec will even send buyers an instructional assembly video straight to their inbox.

However, we’ve saved the best features until last. Keytec has jumped on the chance to make their key organizer multipurpose like other manufacturers. This time, they have added a bottle opener, two holes to work as spanners and most inventively, they have even made a phone stand. Whether you’re commuting to the office or jetting off, you now have hands-free access when watching videos and films from your device.

Pros

  • checkMade with high-quality materials
  • checkAnti-loosening washers to count on
  • checkMultifunctional accessories included
  • checkUnique smartphone stand feature

Cons

  • cross-altUnique smartphone stand feature

Specs

  • Key capacity 16
  • Color Black, silver or gold
  • Dimensions 3 x 0.6 x 0.6in
  • Weight 0.96oz
5KeySmart Classic Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

In a choice of three phenomenal colors, the KeySmart Key organizer is a real winner. Stop the jingle and eliminate the bulk with this key organizer with a lot to offer. For starters, the product is one of the most modern looking key organizers on the market. Its sleek design does not just add to its appeal, but it also makes the product more compact and keeps your keys more secure.

This model has space for up to 14 flat keys and can accommodate office fobs and large car keys because of the attached loop. If this isn’t enough for you the manufacturers sell expansion packs so you can add more keys to your key organizer. You can also choose to buy the company’s accessories and add them to your purchase. Again, this is another design which requires assembly on your part – but again it doesn’t require too much effort.

Pros

  • checkLarge capacity
  • checkExceptional modern design
  • checkSleek and compact
  • checkAttached loop for fobs
  • checkAccessories and expansion packs available

Cons

  • cross-altAdditional accessories must be bought

Specs

  • Key capacity 14
  • Color Black, blue or red
  • Dimensions 3.9 x 2 x 0.4in
  • Weight 0.8oz
6KeyBiner Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The KeyBiner model certainly draws a contrast to many of the modern and sleek options out there. This key organizer is a true USA work and one of the most practical options on our list of the best key organizers. In terms of durability, the product is made of titanium to provide outstanding strength and resistance.

When it comes down to features, this USA-made item is just as impressive. It may be able to store up to 14 keys, but it also has a few other tricks up its sleeve. In fact, it is one of the most multifunctional key organizers available by offering a bottle opener, a screwdriver element, a carabiner, a file and a key ring to attach bigger keys and fobs. Hit the button below to discover more about this key organizer.

Pros

  • checkExtensive multifunctionality
  • checkDurable materials you can trust
  • checkUSA made
  • checkLarge key capacity
  • checkRing to accommodate larger items

Cons

  • cross-altMore expensive option

Specs

  • Key capacity 14
  • Color Silver
  • Dimensions 6.3 x 3 x 0.2in
  • Weight 1.6oz
7ThorKey Pocket Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

For those that like a touch of leather on their cool accessories, here is a second option in that department. The Thorkey Pocket Key Organizer protects its keys in high-quality Italian grain leather. The leather adds character while also adds to its durability. Not to forget that leather bound key organizers prevent scratches on your shiny new smartphone. You can even choose the color of the leather between a classical black and a timeless cognac.

The key organizer here doesn’t just make you look like a real gent, it’s super practical too. Its capacity of ten keys is made better by the fact it can also hold car keys and office fobs. Never get locked out of the office or stranded in a car lot with this personal aid. Some of the poor-quality key organizers become loose over time. This will never happen with the ThorKey design because it has been made in a way to securely lock down your keys always and never risk bolts becoming loose over a long period. The icing on the cake is that this exceptional key organizer is supplied with a money-back guarantee.

Pros

  • checkChoice of leather color
  • checkSecure locking design
  • checkLoop for larger keys and fobs
  • checkMoney-back guarantee included

Cons

  • cross-altSmaller capacity in comparison

Specs

  • Key capacity: 10
  • Color Cognac or black
  • Dimensions 3 x 0.8 x 0.6in
  • Weight 0.64oz
8Cineik Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next onto the main stage is the Cineik Key organizer. You will notice in the specs section that the guys and gals over at Cineik are claiming this model will hold a substantial 51 keys. This has been confirmed as possible by past customers when also using the ring attached, making this a must-have key organizer for men of certain occupancies. If you’re a security guard of a large establishment then you just found your new working buddy.

Other than its significant key capacity, there are no other thrills here. Yet, this doesn’t mean that the product is short of quality. The manufacturers have applied a lot of attention to create a well-made key organizer to last a lifetime. They have used reliable materials and then applied polish to make it even more durable.

Pros

  • checkOutstanding key capacity
  • checkMade with trusted materials
  • checkPolished to protect your product
  • checkMade in the USA
  • checkSplit ring included

Cons

  • cross-altNo thrills and extras

Specs

  • Key capacity 51
  • Color Silver
  • Dimensions 9 x 7 x 1in
  • Weight 4oz
9McDoer Smart Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Whereas many designs have added the familiar extras, this is a key organizer that has thought outside the box. Along with a large 20-key capacity, they have added the usual bottle owner but also a cash stash tube, a sim card opener and a carabiner opener. Never get locked out of your home or your smartphone with this key organizer!

Using this product is made easier thanks to an accompanying instruction guide. Setting it up and tailoring the item for your number of keys is effortless because it can be assembled using just a coin. It comes with extra bits and pieces in case the product does break. If it does end up beyond repair, you can fall back on a full-refund-or-replacement guarantee. It comes in a stylish box, making this one of the better options when looking for the perfect gift for men.

Pros

  • checkConsiderable capacity
  • checkInnovative additions
  • checkSim card opener included
  • checkStash cash included
  • checkReliable guarantee

Cons

  • cross-altStash-cash feature adds bulk

Specs

  • Key capacity 20
  • Color Silver and black
  • Dimensions 5.1 x 3.1 x 1in
  • Weight 3.2oz
10KeyBar Everyday Key Holder

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

This key organizer doesn’t hold as many keys like some of the others, making it more suitable for urban dwellers with offices to go to – rather than security personnel. Nevertheless, it’s one of the coolest and most practical designs. We say this because the keys face one of two ways so you can organize your keys to the different sides as you wish. Little extras include a ring for fobs and a clip so you don’t even have to carry the key organizer in your pocket. For a wallet-friendly price, this is a reliable design made with the best materials. KeyBar has chosen aircraft-grade aluminum to fly their design to the top of the pile in the eyes of a lot of wise guys.

Pros

  • checkCool stonewashed aesthetic
  • checkPractical design offers more organization
  • checkPractical design offers more organization
  • checkDurable materials used

Cons

  • cross-altToo small key capacity for some

Specs

  • Key capacity 12
  • Color Gray
  • Dimensions 6.5 x 4 x 0.4in
  • Weight 1.76oz
11Huckberry Compact Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The best key organizer with a small capacity is arguably this one from Huckberry. Despite having a significantly smaller capacity, it’s of a different breed. The product replaces some of the room usually designated for additional keys and swaps it for cool and useful tools. Owners of this stainless-steel product also get a reversible flathead screwdriver, a folding pocket knife and a multifunctional pocket tool that offers a lot from opening bottles to scoring. The makers have even added an orange string to the key holder so you can locate it easily in low-light conditions. Impressed? Click below to discover more.

Pros

  • checkHousehold name brand
  • checkRough-and-ready accessories
  • checkUnique multifunctional tool
  • checkMade with durable materials

Cons

  • cross-altSmall key capacity

Specs

  • Key capacity 3 (plus tools)
  • Color Black and silver
  • Dimensions N/A
  • Weight 0.2oz
12Diroca Outdoor Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Over the half-way stage of our list of the best key organizers for men and this Diroca Outdoor maintain the standards. Available in a choice of three excellent colors and with multiple functions, this may well be your next key organizer. It’s made with aircraft-grade zinc which is also resistant to rust and corrosion. This key holder also includes rubber washers to prevent the screws loosening and your keys going missing. This is something that does happen on the key organizers of lesser quality. Yet, the craftsmanship is matched by some innovative features. Buyers of this key organizer will find they also now own an LED light, bottle opener, carabiner, a small wrench and it can be reconfigured to work as a smartphone stand!

Pros

  • checkHeavy-duty product
  • checkMultiple color options
  • checkRubber washers prevent loosening
  • checkMultiple extras included
  • checkEven works as a smartphone stand

Cons

  • cross-altToo colorful for some tastes

Specs

  • Key capacity 24
  • Color Black, blue or gold
  • Dimensions 0.6 x 0.8 x 3in
  • Weight 0.96oz
13Bellroy Leather Key Cover

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

In a whole other direction but still traveling in the right direction is this Bellroy key organizer. Unlike the other industrial-type designs, this leather option is completely different. It is a streamlined case of premium leather that can fit between two and four keys. There is also a loop for those who need to attach gym and office fobs or your car keys. One of the best things about this aesthetic is that the leather casing can be chosen between six cool colors. The other positives are that the case has a magnetic closure so you can always be assured that your keys are secure. This one is for the sophisticated gent, let’s raise a brandy to it!

Pros

  • checkWide selection of color options
  • checkPremium leather casing
  • checkMagnetic closure
  • checkRing for fobs and larger keys
  • checkClassy design

Cons

  • cross-altBulkier than other options

Specs

  • Key capacity 4
  • Color Multiple colors available
  • Dimensions 3.1 x 1.6 x 0.3in
  • Weight 1.1oz
14Keydisk Slim Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

For a minimalist key organizer look no further than this model from Keydisk. If you’re getting one of these special products to reduce bulk, then this will be a front runner for you. The design itself is very slim – as the name suggests – but its innovative design is what reduces bulk even further.

So far, we have seen key organizers that have bottle openers and rings to attach fobs and larger keys. Keydisk has cleverly merged these features together to make a bottle opener that doubles as a ring for fobs and car keys. These excellent design ideas are seen throughout, especially in the use of lightweight but strong aluminum for the body. For additional peace of mind, it comes with a satisfaction guarantee.

Pros

  • checkBottle opener included
  • checkReduces bulk exceptionally well
  • checkLarger ring for fobs
  • checkColor options available
  • checkSlim design

Cons

  • cross-altRequires tools for assembly

Specs

  • Key capacity 8
  • Color Black, blue or grey
  • Dimensions 3 x 0.4 x 0.1in
  • Weight 0.64oz
15Krufe Expandable Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Krufe key organizer has made our hall of fame for many reasons. One of the top reasons is the price. This model is unbelievably cheap and outstanding value for money considering what it includes. If you don’t believe us take a look by hitting the button below.

It will keep a respectable eight keys secure and even more safe in the knowledge that it has anti-loosening washers inside too. On top of this, the product is multifunctional by including a sim card needle to eject your sim card when needed, a bottle opener, a metallic carabiner to attach it to your backpack and even a tube to store your cash. Moreover, you will receive a guide on how to organize other areas of your life.

Pros

  • checkCost-effective option
  • checkMultiple accessories
  • checkCool design
  • checkCool cash tube
  • checkUnique guide included

Cons

  • cross-altSmaller-than-average key capacity

Specs

  • Key capacity 8
  • Color Black and silver
  • Dimensions 3.5 x 0.8 x 0.4in
  • Weight 2.88oz
16Histeria World Multifunctional Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

For the men who work with their hands, this key organizer will be perfect for you. Along with the 16 keys it can store, it offers some handy extra that are ideal for manual workers. The aluminum body is light, sturdy and houses these additional perks. Owners will have easy access to a bottle opener and a phone stand to make hands-free skyping possible. Yet, one of the most innovative additions is something we have yet to encounter. On one edge of the key organizer is a small ruler to help with daily tasks. All this quality is protected with a 12-month warranty.

Pros

  • checkConsiderable key capacity
  • checkMade with aluminum
  • checkMultiple extras
  • checkInnovative ruler
  • checkTwelve-month warranty

Cons

  • cross-altNot for every guy
17Arfkey Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

One of the key organizers with the biggest key capacities is the Arfkey design. All 28 keys are made secure with an anti-loosening system. When it arrives, you will have to assemble it to your key collection However, this is made simple through the company’s tutorial video. This model has plenty of additional features to get your teeth into. It has a ring for a car key, a chain to attach it to a belt to free up your pockets, a sim card pin and a bottle opener so you can celebrate buying a quality product. It even has a full-refund guarantee in case you aren’t completely satisfied.

Pros

  • checkMade with quality materials
  • checkMultiple additional features
  • checkFull-refund guarantee
  • checkLarge key capacity

Cons

  • cross-altOnly bright colors

Specs

  • Key capacity 28
  • Color Blue or gold
  • Dimensions 4.8 x 4.8 x 0.9in
  • Weight 4oz

BEST CARBON FIBER ORGANIZERS

1Keypack Carbon Fiber Key Organizer

Make rattling keys a thing of the past with this lightweight and strong carbon key organizer from Keypack. Carbon key organizers are perfect for active people as these guys get to carry all their keys in the lightest way possible.

The s-shape design of the product makes pulling out the key you need even easier. It’s surprising that not many other manufacturers have considered this design plus. The key organizer isn’t just a place to store an impressive 16 keys. It has a little more up its sleeve. The design can be configured to transform as a stand for your phone.

Pros

  • checkLightweight carbon
  • checkIdeal for sporty men
  • checkTransforms into a smartphone stand
  • checkLarge key capacity
  • checkConvenient s-shape design

Cons

  • cross-altAssembly requires Allen key

Specs

  • Key capacity 16
  • Color Carbon color
  • Dimensions 3.46 x 0.98 x 0.24in
  • Weight 0.53oz
2KeyBlade Key Organizer Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another carbon design to provide even more strength than steel and make the product lighter than aluminum is this KeyBlade product. Unlike the last one, this one is slightly more straightforward to put together. You just need a coin and a look over the supplied instructions.

Again, the extras are what makes this special key organizer that little bit more special. Owners can choose to store up to 24 keys, or they can mix things up and use some of the included perks. Other parts of this product you need to know about include a carabiner, a key ring for bigger keys and fobs, cash tube, bottle opener and a pin to eject sim cards.

Pros

  • checkHigh-quality carbon design
  • checkMultiple extras
  • checkSupplied with instructions
  • checkSatisfaction guarantee included
  • checkMade in the USA

Cons

  • cross-altNo color options here

Specs

  • Key capacity 24
  • Color Black
  • Dimensions 3.2 x 2 x 0.5in
  • Weight 0.64oz
3Widely Quality Key Organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you came here looking for a gift for the men in your life, we’re sorry we made you wait until last to find the perfect option. This gift set doesn’t just include an outstanding key organizer made of trusted carbon, it is a box set with many other perks. The cool box includes all the bits you need to fit your keys to the organizer. However, the best things inside this box is a multi-tool card that has multiple functions for different situations. This is on top of a Bond-like key which folds out to become a knife – and a bottle opener is included, of course.

Pros

  • checkReliable carbon construction
  • checkUnique box-set concept
  • checkCool knife disguised as a key
  • checkMoney-back guarantee

Cons

  • cross-altBox adds bulk

Specs

  • Key capacity 18
  • Color Black
  • Dimensions 6.2 x 3.9 x 1in
  • Weight 4.8oz

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

Should I Invest In A Key Organizer?

Key organizers are hardly a sizeable investment. Most of them come relatively cheap and all can be picked up without a phone call to the bank. Yet, they are still an awesome purchase for all guys. But, why should you get one?

Key organizers offer exceptional practicality. Instead of losing your keys, jingling like a member of Santa’s sleigh or struggling to find the right key, a key organizer makes everything simple. These products store your keys in one secure and compact place while keeping them accessible. This reduces the amount of bulk in your pockets, the amount of noise you make when carrying many keys and helps to stop you from losing your keys.

Unless you enjoy putting your hand down the side of the recliner and climbing through windows trying to get into your own home, you should invest in one of the best key organizers we’ve featured above.

What Material Makes The Best Key Organizer?

Key organizers can be made using different materials. Most often, they are made with sturdy and reliable material such as titanium and stainless steel. There is also a select group of in-demand key organizers made from carbon. These are in high demand because they combine the durability of the former materials with lightweight convenience. If you are carrying many keys at once then making it as lightweight as possible becomes exceptionally desirable.

Another popular material used in the production of key organizers is leather. Naturally, different types of leather may be used, including authentic and synthetic leather. The quality of the leather can greatly influence the overall price. Leather is popular because it adds a timeless gentleman aesthetic to the product and they match many other guy’s pocket items such as leather wallets and smartphone cases.

However, leather key organizers aren’t just a great option to add style. The use of leather offers a practical solution. Many guys will have unloaded their smartphone to find scratches on the screen and case. This is caused by loose apartment keys and car keys grazing against your smartphone when stores in the same jeans or jacket pocket. The soft leather of leather key organizers provides a barrier between the damaging edges of your keys and your expensive smartphone.

How Many Keys Can Pocket Key Holders Accommodate?

Not all key organizers are created equal. Some of them are designed for the everyday guy who just has a couple of keys to get into their apartment, office and the beer fridge in their man cave on a Saturday night. Most key organizers will, therefore, accommodate the majority of the male population. However, you can also get key organizers that have well beyond the 10 to 15 key spaces. For security guards and janitors who need to carry up to 40 or more keys at one time, there are also key organizers for you guys.

There is also something else to weigh in when choosing a key organizer based on how many keys it can hold. Some key organizers will offer a loop so that the owner can attach a larger key, such as a car key. The same loop can often be used to hold a fob made for an apartment block or to gain entry into an office. Other key organizers may afford the owner a small tool incorporated into the design. This may include a bottle opener, spanner, file, smartphone stand, rulers or other innovative ideas.

How Key Organizers Can Help Cut The Bulk?

When your keys lie in your pockets naturally, they spread out ready to prod you in the backside whenever you sit down. When keys spread out in this way they may also prick holes in your clothing. Even some tactical clothing is not going to withstand some keys when thrown in a pocket like this.

This is where a key organizer comes in. They are the go-to product to prevent the bulk of a set of keys rattling around in your pocket. Most designs stack your keys within a metal and/or leather casing. This means they do not spread out ready to attack your favorite skinny jeans. They are stacked in a way that you can flick the key you need out, so it is ready to use. Therefore leaving all the other keys compactly stacked together.

But this isn’t the only way a key organizer cuts the bulk. As we mentioned already, these products can be multifunctional by also including small tools such as screwdrivers and bottle openers. By having these attached to your key organizer, you no longer need to carry them as separate items.

What Types Of Smart Key Organizers Are Available?

Key organizers have been going to university. Well, not quite but they are getting smart. Just like many other products which are becoming more sophisticated through using technology advancements, the key organizer has done the same. Some models of key organizers are now smart key organizers.

These models can vary in capabilities but a popular find – which also features at the top of this buyer guide – is that they can be paired with an app. What this does is it lets you can find your key organizer when lost. The app usually provides a map that can locate your key organizer. Some key organizers can even be paired with your smartphone via Bluetooth technology and make your smartphone ring if it is lost. They can still make your smartphone ring even when placed in silent mode!

Time To Lock Up

Has the locksmith turned up yet? Or maybe you weren’t reading along while locked out of your apartment wishing you had already bought a key organizer? If you were reading before that happened, you’re a smart guy and now you know all the benefits of getting one the best key organizers for men currently on the market.

We’ve been able to provide you with plenty of quality options from the best manufacturers. You’ve been able to browse sought-after key organizers from the likes of Huckberry, Keypac, Keytec, KeySmart and many more. These 20 options provide different key capacities and extras to cater to any guy. Our list also covers a range of budgets too.

That wraps up our look into these convenient products. Before you jump over to take a longer look at your favorites, make sure you’ve taken our advice and guidance on board. Keep these things in mind to make sure you get the best key organizer for your needs.

Best Electric/Automatic Cigarette Rolling Machines

If your bank balance shrieks in protest every time you buy a pack of cigarettes, you may well have switched to rolling your own. Buying tobacco to roll your own cigarettes can seem like a genius idea at the time, but when you’re sat with a pile of papers and tobacco you‘ll probably wish you’d spent the extra dollars and bought cigarettes instead. But fear not! You can have your cake and eat it – or in this case have your tobacco and smoke it – because we’ve got a line-up of electric cigarette rolling machines that might just save you a whole stack of time.

Have you heard of automatic cigarette rollers before? Not everyone knows they exist, but if you want to easily roll a huge stack of cigarettes without staining your fingers yellow, an electric cigarette rolling machine is the answer. Whether you only smoke a few cigarettes a day or you are a chain smoker, an automatic cigarette roller can save a huge amount of work. Aside from saving your fingers, there are other benefits too. A fully automatic cigarette maker is capable of quickly rolling a big stack and you can pick the size of your smoke too. This means you don’t have to stick with smoking the same size cigarettes as many electric rollers offer the ability to choose your own.

Home-rolled cigarettes can save a huge wad of dollars, but the inconvenience of having to sit and make your smoke each time can be a big deterrent. Using an automatic cigarette roller you can quickly and easily create your own pile of smokes, without having to spend hours wading through a mountain of tobacco and papers. You can quickly recoup the money spent on buying an electric roller by the amount you’ll save by switching to home-rolled rather than packs of pre-made cigarettes. Ready to give it a whirl? You’ll need to know more about the best electric cigarette rolling machine so read on to find out what we think…

BEST AUTOMATIC CIGARETTE ROLLING MACHINES

1Powermatic 2 Plus Electric Cigarette Injector Machine

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Powermatic is one of the biggest brands in the electric cigarette roller market, and offer a real quality with every model they make. The Powermatic 2 Plus is no exception and is backed up by a long list of sexy features that every smoker will love. You’ll have the choice of creating both king size and 100mm cigarettes, so this baby is ideal for when you want to enjoy a really long smoke. However, the ability to create different sized cigarettes isn’t the only thing that sets the Powermatic 2 Plus apart from its competitors.

If you’re investing in an electric cigarette machine, you will want to recoup your cash but not all models are sturdy enough to cope with heavy use. This isn’t the case with the Powermatic 2 Plus as it’s made from a strong dark brown casing and a blade that’s plated with titanium. This allows sharp and accurate cutting each and every time and a machine that feels like it’s been built to last. This design has been re-engineered since the last Powermatic version, and the slicker mechanism is clear to see. With fewer jams and 25% more power, it’s a monster of a machine despite its fairly modest dimensions.

Some of the clever extras include protection against jams and overfilling and a spoon injection that provides the perfect placement, without spillage. The gears are smooth, fast and quiet and there’s a wide feeding tray so it’s simple to refill. The hopper holds a decent amount of tobacco so you’ll be able to make a few cigarettes before you need to refill once more. This electric cigarette roller from Powermatic isn’t the cheapest but won’t blow your budget either, offering quality at a decent price.

Pros

  • checkImproved design with more power
  • checkSharp, titanium-plated cutting blade
  • checkSmooth and silent gears
  • checkWide loading tray

Cons

  • cross-altSome users report inconsistent results

Specs

  • Dimensions 10” x 4.5” x 7.2”
  • Cigarette Size 100mm and king size
  • Color Brown
2

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The next one on our list is another budget option, slightly more expensive than the Oldeagle but much cheaper than many other electric cigarette rollers on the market. Made from a combination of plastic, clear resin and stainless steel, there’s no compromise on the quality of the parts. The overall effect is a compact and portable machine which includes a range of smart options to help create the perfect hand-rolled cigarette.

According to the official description, this machine can create 80 and 85mm cigarettes. However, a quick skim through the electric rolling machine reviews reveals that this design is more than capable of handling 100mm too. The black casing is accented by a vivid electric blue which is used on the gears as well as the function buttons. This makes it look attractive as well as making it easy to find the buttons you need without scrabbling around. The tobacco box is made from transparent resin, giving clear visibility as well as durable toughness.

This machine has a tendency to pack the tobacco in pretty tightly but you can change this with a simple flick of a switch. One of the blue buttons is in fact a dial which you can turn either way to make the tobacco density either higher or lower. The tube attachment is made from stainless steel to give accurate results each and every time. This automatic roller isn’t as fast as other machines but it’s a small price to pay for a compact design that is portable enough to carry around and is made from high-quality components.

Pros

  • checkNon-slip, ergonomic base
  • checkCompetitively priced
  • checkControl over tobacco density
  • checkEasy-to-carry size
  • checkChoice of cigarette sizes

Cons

  • cross-altNot as fast as other machines
  • cross-altCan create unstable cigarette cherries

Specs

  • Dimensions 6” x 2.6” x 2.1”
  • Cigarette Size 80 and 85mm (users report compatible with 100mm too)
  • Color Black and blue (also available in black and red)
3

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

This is one of the best electric cigarette rolling machines we’ve found, based on looks alone. Compact and powerful, on first glance this device looks like a ramped-up pencil sharpener, the kind you would have used in high school! There’s no tray at the front However, it’s worth mentioning from the start that this is the most expensive model on our list so you’ll have to pay out if you want this funky little number to do your rolling for you.

The ease of operation more than matches up to its attractive exterior, producing immaculate cigarettes. It’s compatible with other hoppers so you can easily add one on if you want to increase the loading capacity. The LED indicator guards against overfilling the chamber and prevents unwanted jams, just one of the reasons why the results look so darn good each and every time.

The unit comes with a brush for easy cleaning and offers a one-touch operation which is simple enough for even the most inexperienced novice to follow. The steel tube packs the paper firmly and remains cool to the touch, another big advantage. Some users have said that it clogs more quickly than other brands so you might need to keep that little brush handy to keep everything moving along!

Pros

  • checkCompatible with other hoppers
  • checkLED light
  • checkOne-touch functionality
  • checkElegant design
  • checkAnti-jam facility 

Cons

  • cross-altMore expensive than others
  • cross-alt Needs to be cleaned frequently

Specs

  • Dimensions Not given
  • Cigarette Size Regular and king size
  • Color Black

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What is an electric cigarette rolling machine?

 Even if you’ve never bought it yourself, you’ve probably seen the pouches of tobacco for sale. These are used to make hand-rolled cigarettes, in combination with papers or paper tubes. This is a less convenient option than pre-made cigarettes but the cost is substantially lower. In fact, some experts estimate that you could save as much as 90% by switching to tobacco and rolling your own! However, for many the inconvenience of having to make each cigarette is enough to deter them from choosing this option – but could electric cigarette rolling machines provide the answer?

 Electric rolling machines do the hard work for you; all you need to do is load them up and press a button and voila! A rolled-up cigarette appears just like magic. It’s possible to find electric rollers for all budgets and there are compact versions which are portable too. Some designs have extra features but they essentially all carry out the same function: rolling cigarettes to save you doing each one by hand. Each roller creates one cigarette at a time but some models can store more tobacco so you can quickly make more without reloading. This makes it possible to build up a stash of cigarettes in a relatively short space of time.

These rollers work by using a loading dock, the place where you insert the tobacco, and a holder for the paper tube. In between is some kind of mechanism, often an injector, which takes the tobacco from the loading docks and inserts it into the tube.

 Do automatic cigarette rolling machines work?

 An electric cigarette roller may sound like the perfect solution to the hassle of rolling your own, but the question remains: do they really work? There are lots of gadgets and gizmos available that sound great in principle but don’t deliver on what they offer. The good news is that electric rollers don’t fall into this category – they really do what they promise. Of course, the quality of the end product depends on the model you buy and not all are as good as others.

You don’t need to spend a small fortune to find an electric cigarette roller that does what it promises. Brands such as Powermatic have lots of experience in creating top-quality electric rollers and are fairly reasonable on price too. If you’re not sure about which model to purchase, check out the reviews. Other smokers are usually brutally honest about the performance of the product and you’ll get a far better idea about how reliable the roller really is.

An electric roller offers a quality that’s not generally possible when you’re rolling a cigarette by hand. With the ability to compress tobacco, you’ll get a finish which looks almost professional. Wastage is also kept to a minimum too but it can take a little while to master the technique. If you don’t end up with decent cigarettes at first, it’s worth persisting as it can take a few practice attempts before you get the machine to work how you want.

 What types of rolling machines are available? (auto/manual?)

 There are both manual and electric cigarette rolling machines available, with the latter being the more expensive of the two. If you’re looking for a helping hand with rolling your own cigarettes, a manually operated machine won’t offer a huge advantage. This is because there are so many variants which affect the end result, and it still requires effort on your part to get the job done. If you struggle with hand strength or fatigue, a manual roller may therefore not feel like it helps a great deal. Manual rollers also tend to be messier too, and the finished cigarette is rarely as neat and precise.

Electric rollers are generally more expensive although it is possible to find budget buys which still turn out a good performance. There are large and small models available, including those which are deliberately designed to be portable. The machine does all the work; once you’ve loaded it up it’s simply a matter of flicking the switch. Electric rollers tend to be “injector” machines; this mechanism compresses the tobacco and ensures each tube is tightly filled. This mechanism uses more tobacco but the end result is a flawless cigarette which offers a satisfying smoke.

 What to look for when buying an electric cigarette rolling machine?

 There are a vast array of electric cigarette rolling machines available on the market but if you know what to look for, you’ll be able to get the pick of the bunch. Many machines are made from metal or plastic, or sometimes a combination of both. Metal tends to last longer but it’s also heavier and typically more bulky too. Plastic can also be very durable but steer clear of designs that are flimsy, particularly if you’re likely to be subjecting your electric roller to very regular use.

If you’re more accustomed to smoking pre-made packs of cigarette, you won’t appreciate the beauty of being able to customize your own smoke. Some rollers are capable of producing a variety of sizes, including a whopping 100mm cigarette. You can also specify whether you want a loose or a tight pack on the tobacco, another factor which will influence the end result. Look out for cigarette rolling machines that offer variable tensions and can also accommodate different size tubes.

Speed is the other main reason why smokers opt for one machine rather than another. Not all rollers operate at the same speed but rapid rolling isn’t always better! If you’re keen to have a cigarette roller that’s capable of higher speeds, check out the reviews to make sure the quality doesn’t suffer. If you’re a heavy smoker, a higher-speed machine would certainly be a big benefit, but if you end up with unusable cigarettes as a result, it’s a false economy.

What are the benefits of automatic cigarette rolling machines?

 The most obvious benefit of an automatic cigarette making machine is the convenience it offers, saving time as well as hassle. One of the biggest drawbacks of buying tobacco other than packs of cigarettes is the effort and inconvenience of rolling your own. An electric roller removes these barriers by taking on the hard work. Creating your own cigarettes is quick, easy and with the minimum of fuss when you opt for a rolling machine.

A cigarette roller is more than simply convenient however, as some users suggest that the quality of roll-ups produced is far superior than those done by hand. With the ability to control how tightly you pack in the tobacco, the roller can create a cigarette which is precisely to your own requirements. This includes the size of the cigarette as many rollers are able to accommodate a variety of lengths. If you prefer a longer smoke, all you need to do is change the settings to create a full 100mm cigarette.

 If cost is one of the biggest priorities for you, then paying out for a machine may seem like a bad idea. However, not only are there devices available for very little, you’ll also save money on the tobacco too. Sound insane? Not at all; when you use an electric roller there’s very little wastage so you’ll find that tobacco goes further than when you’re rolling by hand. Add in the fact that papers don’t tear as easily and you’ll soon see those savings starting to rack right up!

Tips for using automatic cigarette rolling machines

Every machine is slightly different and even experienced users may need to practice for a while when moving to a new brand of electric roller. Some of the most common problems experienced include the cigarette not being packed tightly enough/packed too tightly, the paper ripping or the tube popping off the holder during the process. Although you might feel ready to chuck the whole machine out of the window, count to 10 and try again; these are all common problems that are easily resolved. Honest…

For cigarettes that are either packed too tightly, or where the end product is loose and has gaps, it’s simply a matter of adjusting the amount of tobacco you’re using. If the pack is too tight, load a little less tobacco and if it’s too loose, then put more in. If there is a space in front of the filter, pay extra attention to the amount of tobacco in the corners of the loading dock. Not having the right amount of tobacco can also be the cause of the paper ripping, or it could be that it’s unevenly distributed. Having the right amount of tobacco evenly spread across the loading chamber will resolve most of the teething problems you might be experiencing.

To stop your tube popping off the holder when you’re about to load up, try making sure there’s no debris in the way. The machine needs to grip onto the tube firmly and if there’s residual tobacco from previous cigarettes getting between the tube and the machine tip, it won’t be able to make a strong connection. Many electric rollers come with a brush and it’s a quick job to give the machine a quick clean. Hopefully you should find this resolves the problem once and for all.

 Roll up, roll up!

It’s entirely possible to continue rolling your own cigarettes without any assistance from a machine. However, it’s fair to say that even with practice you’ll never get the same results, or the same precision finish. Electric rollers can take a little bit of getting used to but once you’ve gotten the hang of things, you’ll never want to go back to rolling your own. Guaranteed.

An automatic cigarette rolling machine gives you the ability to make a big stack of smokes well in advance of when they’re needed, without taking much effort or input from you. Simply load in the tube and the tobacco, press a button and whoosh! All done. It really couldn’t be any easier. Of course, not every cigarette roller will suit everyone and there are different features on each. Choose lightweight designs if you’re keen to take your roller on vacation, or invest in a heavyweight model for a permanent fixture for the home.

We hope this guide has helped walk you through the features available on some of the most popular models on the market, and explained what to look for when you buy an electric cigarette roller. If you’re ready to start rolling, then don’t wait any longer – head out to find the perfect cigarette roller that could make life that little bit easier. Your hands will thank you for it!

Best 41 Adult Card & Board Games

BEST ADULT CARD & BOARD GAMES

1Cards Against Humanity

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

What better way to start our guide to the best adult games for parties and get togethers than the granddaddy of all evil games, Cards Against Humanity. This game must be played to really be appreciated. A fair warning would be that it’s not for the fainthearted or people lacking in a wicked sense of humor. The beauty of it and why it’s so popular is how simple the actual setup is – all players are given a selection of white cards. Each round, a player picks a black card and the other players need to choose their funniest white card. The person who picked the black card originally then choses his or her favorite of the white card options.

It’s that simple. If that doesn’t sound so vile, then you’ve never played the game before. Without giving away too many spoilers, the black cards may contain a question or a statement with blanks and the white cards are used to fill those in. Depending on the cards you get, the white cards can vary from the bizarre and ridiculous to the downright disgusting and frankly, a little evil. You’re probably gonna look at your buddies differently after playing it. It’s really that bad.

Specs

  • Maximum People 20+
  • Age 17 and up
2Drunk, Stoned or Stupid

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another raucous card game is Drunk, Stoned or Stupid. This works in a similar way to CAH, but rather than deciding on the best white card for the black card option, each round you all pick a card and read it aloud. You then decide who in the group you’re playing with should be tagged with that card and the reasons for it. So, it’d be ‘which of your friends is mostly likely to?’. Again, similarly to how it is with CAH, it may seem fairly innocuous, but it’s deceptively very dark. You need to be prepared for home truths about you and your friends to be brought to light.

The cards can range from silly things like #163 Watch Planet Earth for 5 Hours and on the edge things like #207 Trash Talk at the Special Olympics. However, it’s in the more telling and revealing cards that things can get a little heated. So just be warned, if you or your friends are likely to come to blows or fall-out over a bad joke, you’re probably better playing something more civil. If you’re up for it and can stomach it though, you’re in for one hell of a game!

Specs

  • Maximum People 4+
  • Age 17 and up
3Midnight Outburst – From the Creators of Taboo

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

With 4 or more people, you can have a try at Midnight Outburst, brought to you from the team behind the hugely successful Taboo. This involves 562 cards, a card reader to decrypt the writing on each card and a whole host of hot topics including sexuality, slang, drugs, drink and pop culture. The basic premise is that you and your team have 45 seconds to shout out as many words listed on that card. It may be the first time you’ve ever heard your friends say such things and they you, so be prepared to get a little flushed!

If you’ve played Outburst, you already know what its all about. Each card has a funny headline as a hint. The idea is that the team that does the guessing, does not know the headline topic of that card until they’ve chosen. So, there’s no way to worm you’re way out if you’re feeling a bit nervous about it all. Points are awarded for every correct word yelled out that matches a word on the card. There’s the chance of bonus points too, if you ever feel inclined to play it that by the book.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4+ divided into 2 teams
  • Age 17 and up
4Utter Nonsense Naughty Edition

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Utter Nonsense Naughty Edition is a completely mental card game that involves players combining silly phrases and silly accents to create sayings that are just a little bonkers. There’s a total of 450 Phase Cards and 50 Accent Cards. You may find, just on that rarest of occasion that the cards match up well together. However, there’s more of a chance that they’re not going to mi well. Once combined, you need to act them out and that’s when the fun really starts.

This game is an all-inclusive one though, so don’t worry. You really don’t need to be any good at impressions or accents, and the phrases really don’t need to make much sense. What do you expect from a game called Utter Nonsense? Players are encouraged and egged on to really improvise, think outside of the box and really make the phrases that are created their own. As the game progresses, even the shyest and most reserved of your group of friends and relatives will become masters of improv in no time., Obviously, as this is the Naughty Edition, you can expect that some of the phrases and accents will be a little below the belt.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4 – 20
  • Age 17 and up
5SCS Direct Late Night Stories

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Do you like to tell stories? Are you able to make them up? Would you like to have fun trying? Then, you might enjoy Late Night Stories. This is a game that involves random and unrelated story cards picked out to create an extraordinary story. Other players then vote on the stories created and someone is crowned the master storyteller. You get a total of 185 different story cards and 65 voting cards. Each story card consists of a hand-drawn piece of artwork. How does it work then?

Well to begin the game, one player is chosen from the group to be that round’s storyteller. Then cards are taken from the Story Card deck and placed face down until there are a total of 7 cards. Then the Storyteller reveals each card at a time while telling the story he completely made up on the fly. Then everyone else votes. Eventually, once all the stories have been told and you’re ready to call the game to a close, the winner is the player who has the most votes. There’s a few different options for playing – Tongue-Tied Drinking, Power in Numbers, Lightning Round and many more!

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3 – 8
  • Age 18 and up
6These Cards Will Get You Drunk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you’re going to get drunk, you might as well play a fun game at the same time, right? That sentiment works with the hilarious These Cards Will Get You Drunk. The team behind the game claims that no two games are the same, thanks to the 100 dynamic and versatile cards. It’s rather easy to pick up and have a great time. Whether you’re in a group of 2, 3 or even 8. The recommended minimum age for players is 21, so no kids and if you’re going to drink, do it in moderation and be responsible.

Choose your poison, and then get ready for a fun evening. How do you play? You first take a card from the deck, read it aloud and then the instructions on the card reveals who is to do what and will determine who takes a drink. Some examples of what’s possible include ‘Tell a joke, if no one chuckles or laugh, you drink’, ‘Pick a person and start a staring contest. Loser drinks.’ And ‘Everyone votes on who is the most likely to be in bed by 10PM. That person drinks.”  We’re sure you get the point. Anything could happen.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 8
  • Age 21 and up
7Never Have I Ever Card Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

You’ve probably got the point by now, as most of these card games revolve around the same sorta thing. With Never Have I Ever, the point of the game is revealing never said before revelations that are at times comical and others, rather shocking. In all in the name of good fun and hilarity. If you’ve ever wanted to really find out who your friends are – to know their darkest and deepest, most shameful and outrageous secrets, this is the game for you. It really is a game where your most ugly memories and poorest life decisions can become winning points.

It all starts with each player being dealt 10 of the 485 unique Question cards, with the rest being returned to the box. The Rule Cards are then all placed on the table or surface you’re playing the game on. Following the Rule cards, you work through them and then when one player is left with 10 Blue game cards that they’ve exchanged for during the game. Be prepared to reveal some embarrassing stuff about your life, and if your friends don’t know these things, then you may have some explaining to do.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4 – 12+
  • Age 17 and up
8DRINK-A-PALOOZA Board Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

DRINK-A-PALOOZA is a huge party of a board game. It aims to merge new-school drinking games with those of yesteryear. So, if you’re already a fan of games like Quarters, Flip Cup, Kings Cup, Beer Pong and others, then you’ll enjoy it. Many college students have already been turned on to this amazing game. Don’t worry as you don’t really need a beer pong table. You can play just about anywhere and comes with everything you need to get started. That means you get mini beer bottles that are collected during the game, dice, playing cards, spin the bottle and bear pong balls.

So how do you get started? It really depends on the game. Spin the Bottle – Spin the included bottle to figure out which player will go first. Then establish house rules – are you all going to be sipping or seconds? Roll the Dice – Roll a dice to make your way round the included board and compete in the mini games like Quarters, Beer Pong and Flip Cup. It all goes towards collecting those mini bottles and once you have your pack of 6 full, you’re the winner.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 12
  • Age 21 and up
9Freedom of Speech Adult Board Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Freedom of speech is something people are willing to die for in the world, are you willing to suffer the red face and embarrassment from saying things that normally would be uncivil and a little rude? You’ll probably enjoy Freedom of Speech then. As this game involves teams of two to 10 competing against each other. The aim is to guess exactly what’s written on cards. A team wins when they have collected a total of 21 correctly guessed cards. The game includes 400 laugh-out-loud funny cards and you even get a button-style timer that works faster and faster.

Where really could you find a game that you get to scream weird words like Sex Robots, Horny Grandma and others like it. Do you think you’d be able to describe these things so that others would guess them? Then, give Freedom of Speech a go for your next social gathering, game night or just when you’re all killing time and not sure what to do. We promise you won’t regret it. Wallflowers, people lacking senses of humor and the easily offended need not bother with this game at all.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4 – 20
  • Age 17 and up
10USAopoly Risk Game of Thrones Strategy Board Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve all played the classic game of world domination, Risk, before. Haven’t we? What if the setting was changed and wasn’t the known world, well not the one we live in but that of Westeros? In the Game of Thrones Edition of Risk, you have your chance to claim the Iron Throne representing one of the 7 Noble House families of the land. This is one for real Thronees. Each army is made up of 45 painstakingly-crafted game pieces. That’s 315 in total, that are represented for 2 different sculpted designs and there’s 1 sculpted Seat of Power or Castle.

Feast your eyes on the 2 completely customized game boards showing the whole of Westeros and beyond. You can take part in the War of Five Kings throughout the lands in Westeros, as one of the Houses – Tyrell, Lannister, Baratheon, Stark and Martell. Fight against the Ghiscari slavers in Essos and just so much more. If you just want to go full hog, you can combine both game boards and play the full 7 player game featuring everyone. There’s everything you need and more in this great game. Are you ready to fight for what is rightfully, or wrongfully yours?

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 7
  • Age 18 and up
11F@@k The Game -Hilariously Social Adult Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Don’t you just want to shout out what you’re really thinking when you stub your toe, or your friend does something that irritates you? Social norms often hold us back from saying what we really want to. Such as swearing. Now, you have the opportunity to really swear at your friends without them getting offended. With the appropriately-named F**k. The Game. Is it really that surprising that it’s from Australia? The funniest thing is that this is considered a brain training game. How, then, does it work?

You take the cards and divide them up among all player with them facing down. Each of you then take turns flipping cards over and saying the answers. You need to check the 4 rule cards to find out the right answer. If, though, you either take too long to answer or give the wrong answer, the race is on for the others to slap the deck. The person who wins a slap, takes the top 2 cards and gives them to whoever they want. The rest of the remaining cards in the center goes to the loser who then must take another turn. The winner is the player without any cards left.  The cards feature an incredibly and belly-laughing combo of swear words and colors. Give it a go, and watch the air turn blue!

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3 – 8
  • Age 18 and up
12Privacy Adult Party Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

This is yet another game that involves revealing your deepest and darkest secrets to your group of friends. Are you noticing a pattern? A lot of these games revolve around that sorta premise, and that’s why we love them. In this salacious game you get 400 different Shameless Questions to answer, a ballot box with yes/no chips, 10 voting dials and 10 wood movers. Are you starting to see where the word Privacy comes into it all? You’re probably a little scared and intrigued all at once, right? So, how does this awesome game work?

You begin by choosing one of the 400 questions, and then everyone drops their answer in anonymously using the yes/no chips. Next, you need to cast a vote as to how many people voted yes. You’re probably already there with us, but points go to the people who guess the right number of Yes votes. It’s an incredibly cathartic and naughty way to reveal all to your nearest and dearest, without saying a word. Although you may wish to spill the beans and tell everyone ‘I did illegal steroids’, you may not want to own up to be the person whose ‘parents walked in on them having sex’. Go on, have a go, after all you’ve only got to lose your dignity!

Specs

  • Maximum Players 5 – 10
  • Age 18 and up
13Cows Grilling Hamburgers: Adult Party Card Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Cows Grilling Hamburgers must win some kinda prize for that game name. This is another one of those ‘did you really say that?’ type game. It’s offensive, hilarious and has a cow on the box’s cover. If you’re a fan of Cards Against Humanity, you’ll love this and if you’ve run out of all the options offered by CAH, you really need this in your life. With so many crappy things happening in the world, it’s nice to just kick back, relax and cry with laughter at some disturbing things.

It essentially works in the same way as CAH or like a more adult-friendly Apples to Apples. You must fill in the blanks to something innocuous with whatever’s on your white cards. We’re not even gonna share any of the examples of what’s possible, you’ll just have to check out the link or buy the damn game yourself and experience the trauma-inducing hilarity for yourself. As ever with these kinda games, we’d recommend that if you’ve not got a dark sense of humor or find yourself easily offended, then you’re probably best giving this one a hard pass, unless you’re looking to expand your horizons about what you consider to be funny.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3+
  • Age 17 and up
14Exploding Kittens: NSFW Edition (Explicit Content)

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Now, anyone who skimmed down this page, but was drawn to the name Exploding Kittens and delightful image of a cat and stopped to have a look. Put your hands up please! You’re all in big trouble now! Seriously though, we can only really recommend this game for people who are fans of things like exploding kittens, whatever the hell boob wizards are and the occasional butt. Further to that rip-roaring invitation is the fact that it’s one of the most backed projects ever on Kickstarter and includes cards with illustrations handled by The Oatmeal. So, what’s it all about and why is it so NSFW?

Well, imagine Russian Roulette, with cards and you’re halfway there. In a nutshell, you place all the cards from the deck in the center of the table and then each player takes turns drawing one. Basically, until you explode…that is, draw an Exploding Kitten card. That’s not all though, as you can avoid Exploding Kitten cards and being knocked out by playing what are known as Defuse Cards. These distract the Exploding Kittens with things such as catnip sandwiches, kitten yoga and laser pointers. Other cards can be played that mean you skip a turn, attack players or peek at the deck. You see, there’s some method behind all the madness!

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 5
  • Age 30 and up
15Pick Your Poison Card Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you’ve ever played the game known as Would You Rather? you already know what Pick Your Poison is all about. Another one of those great games that reveals far more than you’d think about those whom you choose to spend your time with. There are more than 300 different Poison cards and too many card combinations to count. The creators behind the hit games Hot Seat and The Voting Game were also responsible for this bad boy. Be warned, the minute you start playing this game, it becomes addictive and then there’s no turning back from that rabbit hole or poisoned chalice.

They say that one man’s poison is another man’s cure or cake, depending on who told you it. With this game, players are presented with two equally dire situations. The player appointed as Judge can answer questions posed by the players to find out more about each choice. Players then are asked to pick, anonymously, the poison they’d choose. You can then tally the points up at the end of each round, figuring out who agrees with you and who’s as loopy as a rollercoaster in a tumble dryer! Although it’s not quite as bad as some of the others, there’s a NSFW version too.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3 – 16
  • Age 13 and up
16Tipsy Tower Drinking Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

JENGA! We all know and all love Jenga, don’t we? The fun and rather unnerving brick stacking and toppling game. Have you ever wondered what might happen if you added a lot of drinking to Jenga? How much harder would it be to balance blocks on top of one another with drink? We now know the answer, thanks to ShouldWeDrinktonight and the game Tipsy Tower. This involves 54 high-quality wooden blocks, with 1 of 36 different games and rules printed on those blocks. Some classic games are included such as ‘make a rule’, ‘moose’ and ‘story time’. Alongside new favorites such as ‘nicknames’, ‘most likely to’ and ‘god’.

Basically, you must try and pull one of the blocks out of the stack without toppling the tower. You then need to read the bottom of that block and follow the rule or play the game. It’s as simple as that. Well, it’s easy to say that when we’re not actually playing the game, isn’t it? To find out for yourself just how easy or hard it is, you’d have to just get the game and play it with some friends. Be warned, you may not be able to walk in a straight line, never mind stop a tower from toppling.

Specs

  • Maximum Players N/A
  • Age 18 and up
17PlayFore Games Circle of Jerks

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

What is it with all these games revolving around breaking social norms and making it acceptable to say the unacceptable out loud for all and sundry to hear? Who is sundry? All of this is answered and more with Circle of Jerks, a brand-new game from PlayFore Games. What do you get? A small, pocket-sized tin with the rules sheet and 57 cards. Games last for 15 to 20 seconds each round. Be careful though, you may have to shout some of the worst things imaginable out loud. All in the name of winning a stupid game and isn’t that what it’s all about when you really break it right down to the bare bones of things? No, we’re just talking crap now. Anyway, more about this game.

Gameplay involves distributing all the cards evenly among the players and then you need to match the symbols on the card each player has and the one on the center. After finding a match, you then must yell out exactly what’s on the card and stick it on top of the growing stack. Sounds simple, does it? You should know by now that these games are far from simple. The crutch is that what you must yell out is not really something you want to yell out loud. How’s that sound to you?

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 8
  • Age 18 and up
18Hasbro Trivial Pursuit Master Edition

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Trivial Pursuit is one of those timeless classics, don’t you think? It’s the way you sort the knowledgeable ones from the dummies. The problem we always found with the game was once you’d played it a good few times, you’d memorize the answers, and therefore, that took a lot of the challenge out of it. Fortunately, there was a few updates over the years. One of the latest is this The Master Edition. With this version you get an amazing array of 2,950 challenging, intriguing and often very funny questions. That’s more than enough to really sort the trivia buffs from the, well, buffs.

Although it’s not really that naughty or ‘adult’, it’s still good to break the mold a little and test each other. You can play in two different ways – following the traditional rules or with a more quick-fire way. In case you didn’t know – there’s 6 main categories that questions are derived from. Sports and leisure, science and nature, art and literature, history, entertainment and geography. The great thing is that there’s a lot of room for versatility with this game. When you need a break form all the swearing and inappropriate behavior, you turn to Trivial Pursuit.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 4
  • Age 16 and up
19

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

When you’ve done with all that swearing, trivia and drinking, what you really need is a good ol’ post-apocalyptic survival game. CMON: Hate is based on graphic novels written by the highly-regarded Adrian Smith. This is a continuously and unrelentingly brutal campaign-based board game set in a world where survival is the most important thing. At whatever cost. You see, some games are considered adult because they’re extremely violent and involve desperate times calling for desperate people to perform desperate and atrocious acts.

With this game, the winner is based on the player who expertly manages to use all forms of savagery and untold violence to upgrade their resources and warriors. Yes, it does involve doing all manner of nasty things and it does involve plundering. All with the aim of unlocking greater powers and strengths from the villages to win. However, as Hate is the name of the game, only the player with the most hate will be able to become the all-ruling tyrant. This game, although just a board game, is not really for the faint-hearted and weak willed.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 6
  • Age 18 and up
20Adult Loaded Questions

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Be prepared for another game of inappropriateness and rowdiness with Adult Loaded Questions. This involves a whole load of hysterical questions, deeply hilarious answers and just belly laughs all round. In the long-running tradition of games like Would You Rather? Cards Against Humanity and Cows Eat Hamburgers comes another game that will reveal a lot more about your friends than you probably ever wanted to know. Remember, it’s all in good fun and just because someone answered a question in a certain way, it doesn’t mean you should change their opinion of them…or does it? That’s really for you to decide!

Basically, there’s cards with over 308 very stimulating, odd and frankly more than a little suggestive question. You start by flicking the spinner, picking a card and reading the appropriate question out loud. Then all the other players need to write their own personal answer on the answer sheets provided. These are anonymous and are collected and read by the person sitting to your right. Once you’ve heard all the answers, you then choose the favorite and try to match who gave what answer. If you get it right, you get a VIP card, as does the person who gave the winning answer. The winner is the first person who collects 8 VIP cards. It couldn’t be simpler and couldn’t be more addictive!

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4 – 6
  • Age 17 and up
21Monopoly Rick and Morty Board Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Everyone loves Monopoly, right? If you want a break from playing standard Monopoly and fancy something a little wacky, rude and out of this world, why not give the extremely irreverent Rick and Morty edition of the popular and much-loved property board game a go? Based on the [adult swim] animated series and its beloved characters, Monopoly: Rick and Morty gives you the chance to buy, sell and trade locations from the Multiverse. Monopoly playing pieces are replaced with highly-collectible Rick and Morty-inspired tokens. You can play as a Council of Rick’s Badge, Snuffles’ Helmet, Rick’s Ship, Plumbus, the portal gun or the Meeseeks Box.

Some of the noteworthy Multiverse locations included around the board are Planet Squanch, Gazorpazorp and the Cromulon Dimension, as well as many others and even some Earth-based locales too. You use Flurbo currency and instead of houses and hotels you play with Gooble Boxes and Fooble Cranks and just expect a Monopoly experience like one you’ve never had before.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 6
  • Age 17 and up
22Drinkopoly – The Blurriest Game Ever!

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

When a game proclaims itself to be the ‘blurriest game ever’, you know you’re in for a serious bit of drunken tomfoolery. That’s exactly the experience promised by Drinkopoly – a truly forgettable one anyway. The whole point of the game is to bring people together and well, to be fun and entertaining. Aren’t all games really about that, when you think about it? The difference is that this includes the intake of alcohol. What’s it all about though?

Drinkopoly features a board with 44 different fields that involve tasks that require either a short or long drink. In addition, there’s also extra fields with specialized tasks such as Bar, Bartender, Strip Bar. Furthermore, you’ll also find some card fields where you must perform other daring task to progress further in the game. In addition to all of that, there’s 50 special cards that describe various interesting and often daring tasks, that if you pick them you must perform the task or take a drink in order to move onwards in the game. While many of them, as you’d expect are silly and funny, some are more risqué and sexier, while others are just barmy.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 1 – 69
  • Age 21 and up
23Drunk Stoned or Stupid If You Had To…

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve already discussed Drunk Stoned and Stupid and here we have the follow-up game by the same nasty people. Time for some more irreverent and diabolical situations to choose between. Like the Would You Rather game, If You Had to involves a deck of 250 cards and any number of players from 3 and upwards. Seriously, as with most of these games, the more the merrier, or the more brutal. Just, avoid this game at all costs if you value your friendships and see them through rose-tinted glasses. This game will change your opinion of yourself and those who are closest and dearest to you in life. Is a game worth that?

Of course, it is! Don’t be a baby and get this game to see who really are the creepiest in your circle of friends. Each player gets 5 cards each and then you each play one that you think the judge would least like to do. The player deemed the judge must then be won over through persuasion, cohesion and witty explanations why your card is the worst. If you’re successful in convincing the judge, you are awarded a point and the first to 5 points is the winner. Or is that loser? We’re not sure to be perfectly honest.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3+
  • Age 17 and up
24Disturbed Friends – Mini Game & First Expansion

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Now, it doesn’t really take a genius to work out if a game is called ‘Disturbed Friends’ and claims to be, and we’re quoting here, ‘the worst game ever made’, you’ve been forewarned. Anything that happens after you purchase this game and play it, is your own damn fault. It really and truly is. Deal with it and move on. You know the drill by now…following the same traits as many other games, Disturbed Friends is designed to figure out just how disturbed that ragtag crew you call friends really are and for them to figure out how disturbed you are. Has your friendship been under pressure and strain recently? Then this is not the game for you. This is a game for strong friends.

You see, much like others we’ve mentioned, this involves hypotheticals. You’re faced with a whole host of unethical debates, horrible situations and sexual scenarios. In this game there are no real winners, it’s just an excuse to be the person you probably are deep inside yourself and laugh at the ghastliness of you and your chums. Someone picks a card with a multiple-choice question on it and reads it out loud. The others then must vote on what they think that person will pick. If anyone voting chooses the right answer, they get a point, for what it’s worth and get to gloat with a cartoon #WINNING card and you all can pretend to be disgusted. Until, it’s your turn to pick. Enjoy!

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4 (Mini Game) – 14 (Full Game)
  • Age 21 and up
25PlayMonster 5 Second Rule Uncensored Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Everyone knows about 5 Second Rule, right? Ellen brought it to mainstream television audiences, by playing it with some of her famous guests. While there’s also a plethora of hilarious videos online of people playing it. Well PlayMonster saw that the demand was great for this game and decided to go back to the drawing board, take the closed caption off on their sick and twisted minds and made a full-on NSFW version. What we have here is the same game, in principle, but one with even less principles than before.

For the uninitiated – you get five seconds to name three things. So, you take a card and that will have a description of things you have to name. A random example would be Name 3 ways to hide a fart. If you think that’s tame and easy enough, you must be some kinda maverick Clint Eastwood type. Either that or you’ve not tried to rack your brains for 3 things quickly in 5 seconds. The pressure of the time limit and then the added pressure and embarrassment of many of the cards in this game can make what seems like an easy thing to do – extremely hard. Be prepared for some no-holds barred type nonsense.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3+
  • Age 17 and up
26Joking Hazard Card Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If we said that the next game was connected to the hilarious-if-slightly-irreverent-bordering-on-deeply-offensive online comic Cyanide & Happiness, you’d have at least a clue as to how bad this game is. When we say bad, we obviously mean good…or do we? 26 into our guide and we’re not even sure anymore. Have you very read any of Cyanide & Happiness’s 3-panel comics before? No? Then what the hell are you doing here…turn away. If you have on the other hand, we’ve got some good news for you. You get to be in the driving seat.

That’s right, with this game, you and your friends get to make your own 3-panel comics. Meaning you are completely responsible and culpable for what happens in the comics. You start with 360 cards with comic panels. Once you’ve all been given cards, the player referred to the Judge takes the top card from the deck and turns it over. They then take on from their own cards and place it at either side of the original card. It’s up to everyone else to finish the joke. Then the judge picks the funniest and the person responsible for that gets points or something. Winning at something by being disgusting is not really winning is it?

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3 – 10
  • Age 18 and up
27Monopoly Game Of Thrones Collector’s Edition

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’re back in Westeros for another game that’ll get all you Thronees out there excited. How about the combination of the world’s best fast-dealing property trading game with HBO’s fantasy series? That’s kinda what you get with the Game of Thrones Collector’s Edition of Monopoly. Like the Rick and Morty edition we featured further up the page, everything in this game has been customized to fit the Game of Thrones theme. Locations, the hand-sculpted tokens, houses and hotels and even the Chance and Community Chest cards have all been altered.

This is a truly beautiful thing. The hand sculpted tokens are so elegant. They give you the chance to play as a White Walker, the Three-Eyed Raven, the Iron Throne itself, a Dragon Egg, Direwolf or Crown. As you work your way round the board, you’ll come across many of the most iconic and important locations in the series and all the money features Essos and Westeros symbols. As noted earlier, Chance and Community Chest have been changed. Here they become Valar Morghulis and The Iron Throne. As you’d imagine, there’s some treachery, betrayal, valor and intrigue always on the horizon throughout this game. Don’t trust anyone.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 6
  • Age 18 and up
28The Voting Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Okay, so this version isn’t exactly the NSFW version, but with 27 other games so far of pure and utter dreadfulness, we think we’re all due a break. However, even in its tame form, this game, The Voting Game is quite an experience, to say the least. Another home truth come to roast style of game that may leave you scowling at your buddies. Don’t scowl too hard though, as it’s all a bit of fun.

So, what’s involved? It’s your basic answer ‘who’s most likely to’ type of deal. Be warned, once you’ve let something out of the bag, even anonymously, it’s not likely to say secret for very long. You just kinda need to embrace it and know that you and any of your friends playing with you are going through the same thing. Our favorite thing is the warning that this game is not recommended for people in accountancy and those without any personality. Aren’t they one and the same thing? Sorry all accountants reading this, we love you, we really do.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 5 – 10
  • Age All Ages
29Hot Seat Adult Card Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Hot Seat is another, similar, but equally as funny and challenging game along the same lines as The Voting Seat etc. It’s another chance to discover just how awful the friends you have are, or at least how weird they are. It’s also a whole lot of fun. Just be warned, as always, that it’s not ideal for anyone who has a more delicate sense of humor. You’ll discover things you maybe have always wanted to know and so many that you didn’t want to know.

This game involves 3 cards being drawn and then choosing one that everyone needs to answer. The questions vary from the disturbing to the silly. All the players filling out answers need to put on their thinking caps and pretend they’re the player in the hot seat. The it’s time to try and guess the answer that came from the person in the hot seat. A whole lot of fun, but you’ve be warned, it can get weird and all-too-revealing at times.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 5 – 10
  • Age 17 and up
30Quick and Dirty – Offensively Fun Party Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

You could be forgiven for thinking that with a name like Quick and Dirty, this game was about something even more explicit than it is. However, the name refers to the fact that people with the quickest wits and dirtiest minds are the ones who’ll succeed in the game. This game is perfect for small and large groups and it only takes less than 30-seconds to figure out the rules and gameplay. It’s also incredibly portable, as all you need is in the deck of 70-cards, made up of 24 letter cards and 42 topic cards. There’s more than 1000 different and unique rounds you can play of this game and it can even be easily adapted as a drinking game. So how does it work?

Someone starts by flipping over one of the topic cards and then a letter card. It’s up to all involved to race against each other to be the very first person to shout out an appropriate answer with the correct first letter. Herein lies how it can get graphic and should be reserved for adults. However, that’s not the only way to play, as these cards are versatile. Other games include Finger Play, Party Play and Judge Play. Do you have what it takes to be filthy and quick on the draw?

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 20
  • Age 17 and up
31What Do You Meme? Party Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The original definition of a ‘meme’ is it’s a style, behavior or idea that’s spread from one person to another within a specific culture. On the internet, it’s a piece of text, video or even just an image that’s normally very funny and copied and shared by lots of people very quickly, with alterations made along the way. In What Do You Meme? you and your friends compete to see who can create the best and funniest memes. Think you got what it takes?

This is achieved by using one of the cards you are dealt to create a caption for the photo card played in each round. The winner of a round is decided by a judge that rotates each time. You get a total of 435 cards, comprising of 360 caption cards and 75 photo cards. Hilarity, profanity and a whole lot of bellyaches are bound to ensue!

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3 – 20
  • Age 17 and up
32Bad People

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve been through so many of these that it’s possible we don’t need to warn you anymore about what you’re getting yourself in for when a game is called Bad People. It’s not just a clever title. As the taglines say, ‘the party game you probably shouldn’t be playing’ and ‘find out what your friends really think of you’. This game involves voting on all your so-called friends for various brutal, outrageous and scandalous, but hilarious questions. This is the ultimate way to learn about any skeletons your friends may have in their cupboards.

You get 290 hysterical cards, 10 identity cards (one for each player), 100 voting cards, 10 double down cards and 170 question cards. Someone is appointed as the Dictator and they pick a question card and read it to the group. Then, everyone else must vote on the person they think matches that question best. The group then takes turns revealing their votes, followed by the Dictator. If anyone’s voted the same as the Dictator, you get a point. That is, of course, unless you played your double down card. The game lasts if it takes for someone to get to 7 points. Be prepared though, as it’s bound to get messy!

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3 – 10
  • Age 17 and up
33Bad People + Red Expansion Pack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Red Expansion Pack of Bad People means that there’s even more hours of hurt feelings and wild revelations revealed when you play this game. If you know you’re going to love this game, we’d recommend investing in this pack. However, if you’re not entirely sure, it might be best to stick to the original game on its own to start with.

Sometimes good people do bad things. But sometimes bad people are just bad people. What are your friends? Find out with this hilarious game.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3 – 10
  • Age 17 and up
34PlayMonster The Game of Nasty Things

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve already featured PlayMonster in this guide with their 5 Second Rule game. However, the makers of that game also made a hilarious game called The Game of Things. Well. In the tradition of popular family games being given an adult upgrade, they’ve done the same thing with The Game of Things in the shape of The Game of Nasty Things. There’s 256 different topic cards, a response pad and pencils. That’s all you need to start the chaos. You need to step back for a second and really think about whether your friendships are strong enough to handle the crazy.

If you do decide to go ahead with it, someone takes one of the topics (and trust us, they’re Red Band), then you all must write a response to it. Obviously, in this kind of game there’s no right or wrong answers. There might be disgusting, depraved and shocking answers but no right or wrong. Judgement but no right or wrong. Next, all the answers are read out loud. The person who drew the topic card must try and work out which friends said which things. It’s bound to be very revealing.

Specs

  • Maximum Players Groups
  • Age 17 and up
35That’s What She Said

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Are you a fan of innuendos? Don’t be shy, we know you are, or you wouldn’t be here. Remember the punchline Michael Scott always used in the American version of The Office. Well, now there’s an entire party game devised around the principle. You get a total of 458 cards, including 58 Red Setup cards and 400 White Phrase cards. The rest is up to you and your crazy, dirty friends.

You start by assigning who you all agree is the kinkiest one of your group is as the judge. They start off the game by picking a Red Setup card and reading it out loud. Each person has a selection of white cards to choose from in their hand and must play what they think it the most inappropriate to form a hilarious innuendo. The judge for that round is the person who choose the winner and they get the red setup card as a marker. The winner of the game is the first to have 5 red setup cards. The losers are just losers.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4+
  • Age 17 and up
36Neddy Games Conspiracy Theory Trivia Board Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

After all the terribleness and disgusting games, we’ve discussed, how about a bit of a break? Conspiracy Theory is a trivia board game based on, you’ve guessed it, Conspiracy theories from the internet. Although it’s not exactly adult-focused, do you really want to just always play games that show how vile you and your friends are? Why not have a bit of fun trying to figure out the answers to questions about different types of conspiracies from 5 categories – Schemes, Technologies, Aliens, Mythos and Random.

The aim of the game is to collect a set of matching cards. However, you need to be careful of Cover-ups, as these can take some or maybe even all the cards in your collection. With 250 different conspiracy cards and 25 Cover-up cards, there is plenty of scope for many hours of play with this game. A nice bonus feature is the inclusion of a QR code on each card to give more information about the conspiracies.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2 – 6
  • Age 14 and up
37Scythe Board Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

How about a change of pace? Welcome to Scythe. This is a board game set in an alternate reality 1920s Europa. The first great war has still left its shadow over the land and the capitalist city-state with the name The Factory is responsible for fueling the war with its creation of heavily-armed Mechs. It closed its doors, and this drew the attention of many neighboring countries. This is an interesting game that involves miniature character pieces, objective cards, encounter cards and combat cards.

The main aim of the game is to take on the role of a fallen leader who is attempting to restore their hone by leading a faction into power across Eastern Europa. You can conquer territory, take on new recruits, benefit from resources, add villagers, build new structures and eventually operate a devastating Mech. A great alternative to Monopoly on game night.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 1 – 5
  • Age 14 and up
38Wonder Forge Sick & Twisted Charades Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Ah yes, charades. The timeless classic of games night. The game where you must act out a phrase, movie title or something else. The game that the only terrible thing that happens is that someone on your team can’t act out ‘Indiana Jones’ properly. Harmless, hilarious and a completely innocuous. That was until Wonder Forge got their grubby mitts on it. You get a total of 1,000 hilarious, if salacious and outrageous words to act out in two teams. You get soft foam balls and Twist Tiles to add extra dimensions of difficulty to the whole affair.

As with normal charades, you get a set amount of time to act a word or phrase out. If the opposing team throws the soft foam ball once the time runs out, and you manage to catch it you can continue acting out for longer. If you don’t, you don’t get extra time. Twist Tiles will mean you have to not only perform the dirty charade, but while performing a challenge at same time, such as sitting on the floor or only using one hand. This is rip-roaring fun and we’re sure you’ll have a good time. Even if you leave the game a little red-faced.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4+
  • Age 18 and up
39Asmodee Cash n Guns (2nd Edition)

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Ever wonder what happens after mobsters rob a bank and then can’t decide who deserves the biggest cuts of the money? That’s essentially what Cash n Guns aims to figure out. Well, kind of. You basically play as a bunch of gangsters who have pulled off the heist of the century and then face the problem of internal bickering.

Obviously, bullets speak a little louder than words. So, you all must try and point foam pistols at each other to try and intimidate your opponents to let you have the biggest share of the money. Only the bravest crooks will win in the end and reap the benefits. That is, for as long as they are alive.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 4 – 8
  • Age 10 and up
40Confessions: The Game of Secrets and Lies

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If Cards Against Humanity, Never Have I Ever and Truth & Dare are all your kinda thing and you’ve completely ruined your friendships yet – meet Confessions. The board game that’s all about secrets and lies is sure to make for the most awkward game night ever. There are 308 cards, made up of 10 voting cards and 298 confession cards. This is a game of bluffing, essentially. That’s it. Sounds easy? You’ve not really paid attention to our guide thus far have you? There’s a lot more to it than just that.

Each player reads a card prompt and expounds on a story based on that card. You can give as many or as few details as you wish. The aim is to make it as believable or unbelievable as possible. The other people playing then must guess if you are telling a lie or telling the truth. As this is an adult-orientated game, you can imagine that the card prompts are the real crutch. Some are just silly and fun, while others are darker and incredibly awkward.  If you’re looking to make the game even more outrageous, it can be turned into a drinking game and the makers have included rules for that type of game.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 3 – 10
  • Age 17 and up
41Lark & Clam Codenames Deep Undercover 2.0

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Finally, we come to the last in our guide. In a similar vein to the clean, family edition, Codenames, Codenames: Deep Undercover involves new, and more NSFW words, packaging, art and ‘by-standers’. If you’ve ever wanted to play spy, you may enjoy this game. 2 people play as spymasters on opposing sides, who each know the secret identities of 25 agents. The other members of their team know the agents only by Codenames. Spymasters give one-word clues that could relate to numerous cards on the board.

The idea is for your team to pick the right cards and reveal the agents on their team and avoid revealing the opposing team. Although it may sound innocuous, and we’ve said this before, this is an adult game so you can expect outrageous clues towards the codenames of different spies.

Specs

  • Maximum Players 2+
  • Age 18 and up

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

How many people do you need, at a minimum, for most adult card or board games?

There’s no smoke without fire and you can’t have a game without players. When choosing the best adult or board card game for you and your friends, its important to consider the question highlighted above.

You’ll find that most games allow for a different number of maximum players. Some don’t even have an upper limit. However, if there’s one thing that’s almost completely a standard across all board and card games, whether they’re adult-orientated or not, it’s that you need at least 2 or even 3 people to play a game properly.

Can these Games be fun even when you’re not slightly drunk?

This is an interesting question really, because it depends on whether most of your social situations and gatherings involve the use of alcohol as social lubrication. We would argue at Men’s Gear that while you obviously don’t need to be drunk to play the Game of Thrones version of Monopoly, neither do you need to be slightly drunk to play Cards Against Humanity. It helps, it really helps. How so? Alcohol helps by breaking down your inhibitions, and one thing you don’t want when playing the kind of games, we’ve looked at in our guide is inhibitions. These games require you to be as bad and as vulgar, in many cases, as you can be.

Therefore, if you’re prone to be the shy and retiring type who wouldn’t say boo to a goose, you may need a little help in getting the best out of these games.

Obviously, there are games that are designed to be played with a healthy, but safe dose of alcohol. You can’t really play Tipsy Towers without it or else you’re just playing Jenga and in that case, what would be the point in wasting money on the drinking game version?

However, some of the things that come to light in games like Confessions, Never Have I Ever, Cards Against Humanity and similar titles, are hilarious and a whole lot of fun whether you’re tipsy, drunk as a skunk or stone cold sober.

Which adult card or board game is the most daring/rude?

Again, this is a hard question to answer, as everyone will have a different opinion. As these games usually revolve around shock and inappropriateness, the phrase one man’s poison is another man’s cure, comes to mind. If you’re not inclined to drink very often, for example, then one of the drink-centered games like Tipsy Tower or Drinkopoly will be more daring for you than people who regular drink at social occasions.

Similarly, if you’ve always tended to have a darker sense of humor or love sexual innuendos, then games like CAH and That’s What She Said are hardly going to offend or shock you, and are therefore, less likely to be considered daring or rude. If you’ve got a more conservative sense of humor though, you’ll probably be red-faced for most of the evening playing one of those games. You’ll love it, but you’ll be red-faced all the same.

If we had to pick out the one that is perhaps the most daring or rude, we’d have to pick the one that we felt, from our research, gets incredibly personal. It’s easy to make up funny statements a la Cards Against Humanity when you all know that’s the real aim of the game. However, it’s another thing to poke fun and laugh at your own mistakes and bad decisions in life. So, in terms of being the most daring, we think Privacy is probably the closest to the knuckle in our guide.

The game involves questions where the only accepted answers are either yes or no. So, there’s nowhere to hide.

Make Your Next Game Night a Night To Remember (or Forget)!

Phew! We don’t know about you guys, but we need some air after going through all those adult games with you. When we said comprehensive, we meant comprehensive. Each game was chosen because it has merit. While some titles may be similar, their differences were enough to warrant them a place in our guide. We took into consideration what people generally like and that you can all be a very fickle bunch often.

So, while some of you may be up for a good couple of rounds of drinking games, we knew that others will be after something a bit more cerebral. Hence the sizer of the guide. One thing we couldn’t avoid though, was showcasing those games that really hit home how little (or maybe too much) we know our friends and those that we choose to have in our lives. Remember that saying – you can choose your friends, but you can’t choose your family? Well, if you play any of these games and learn anything unsavory, remember that you chose them. So really that makes it all your fault, doesn’t it?

At the end of the day, like any board games and card games designed for family audiences, adult versions are there primarily for their entertainment value. It’s important to take everything that’s said during these games with a pinch of salt and remember that we’re all flawed and deeply messed up people. That’s right, even you, yes you, that’s sitting there thinking that you’ve got nothing to hide. Try a few rounds of Cards Against Humanity or Bad People and we’re sure you’ll be a little quieter with the holier-than-thou attitude.

If you’re completely new to adult board games and card games, it might be a good idea to try one of the tamer offerings first, before diving into something as nasty as Pick Your Poison. However, we do recommend that you try something. Even if you’re a little nervous, because part of that nervous feeling you have comes from a place that knows you might enjoy yourself and you just don’t know how to deal with that. We do, give it a go!

Best 34 Car Gadgets

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The accessory of car accessories when it comes to charging your car is the Beatit D11 800A Peak 12V Portable Car Jump Starter. This car charging accessory has the capacity to jump-start unleaded, diesel (up to 5.5L) and gas (up to 7.5L) cars. With two USB outlets of 5V, you can lend a hand to those in need by giving a jump start or charging personal devices.

It can be used for camping, traveling, hiking, emergencies and for everyday use, making it the ideal car accessory to have at hand. On a single charge, this compact and portable lithium battery has a jump start rate of 30 jump starts. The simple design features an LED screen to observe the remaining battery power, it also features an in-built 100-lumen flashlight with three flashing settings (including S0S flashes), making it easy to see day and night.

Containing spark-proof technology, reverse polarity protection and a mistake-proof design, this car gadget can be attached safely to almost any battery. Come rain, hail or shine, you will be able to charge your car or devices with this awesome car accessory for men.

Best 16 Portable Grill Tables

BEST PORTABLE GRILL TABLES

1Keter Unity Indoor/Outdoor BBQ Storage Table

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Okay, so the most portable thing about this is the wheels. It’s true that the Keter Indoor/Outdoor entertainment BBQ storage table is not exactly built for taking away on camping trips or to the local park. However, it is extremely beautiful, jam-packed with features and ideal for that decking or patio area where you tend to congregate when you tend to throw a BBQ. You can’t cook on it, but you can do just about everything else, as you’ll see as we lift the lid on it.

First things first, the top is constructed from durable 430-grade stainless-steel and provides excellent space for preparing and serving tasty grub. It works perfectly as a prep and serving station because it can be wiped clean between uses. Looking down and around it though, you’ll see there’s four handy S-hooks along with a bottle opener. The perfect place to hang those BBQ utensils, so that you never lose them again. Whereas on the opposite side, just down from the top, there’s a spice rack for all those flavorings and a paper towel holder, because we all get a bit messy when its BBQ time. Don’t we?

As well as the available space on top, directly below you’ll find space to store glasses, places and anything else you need close to hand. While even further down there’s a lockable storage area that can hold around 40-gallons of, well, whatever you want. While the top is made from sturdy stainless-steel, the paneling and body are made from a natural-looking weather-resistant resin with UV-resistance and the promise from the manufacturers that it wont dent, fade or peel. Wanna put it to the test? You’re not alone.

Pros

  • check430-grade stainless-steel top
  • checkLockable 40-gallon storage space
  • checkS-Rings, spice rack and kitchen roll holder

Cons

  • cross-altPackaging is not consistent

Specs

  • Dimensions 29.6 x 35.4 x 22.7-inches
  • Weight 32.2lbs
  • Storage Yes
2Suncast Serving Station Patio Cabinet

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next in our guide is a more simplistic, but nevertheless appealing design from Suncast. The outdoor grill station is a compact and portable prep cart that has been made from high quality, durable plastic. This is perfect solution if you already have a large BBQ and perhaps even a dining area and are looking for just a small area to prep ingredients.

Part of the magic of BBQs is the theater of it all and therefore, with this great table your guests can enjoy either being a part of it all by helping you out or watching you put on a show. With an exceptionally large worktop measuring 40-square-inches, there is more than enough room to keep all those herbs, spices and rubs that you need to make tasty grub. You’ll notice from the images that there are two side panels or leaves, that can collapse. So, when it’s not in use, you can flap them down and store it away neatly.

In addition to the robust countertop there is also two large cabinets full of space. These can be used to store all the crockery and cookware, crockery, cutlery, paper towels and condiments you need. That list isn’t even exhaustive. Put it this way, you can keep all you need and more in the cupboards. Suncast have really thought of everything. Its robust design means that it can be used all year long and is very easy to maintain. It comes unassembled, but as all the pieces simple snap together, there’s no need for tools.

Pros

  • checkEasy to assemble
  • checkRobust and durable materials
  • checkLots of work and storage space

Cons

  • cross-altQuality control could be better
3GCI Outdoor Slim-Fold Cooking Station

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Although the next item in our guide might resemble some kind of fold-out deckchair for quadruplets, this is a rather fine cook station from the geniuses at GCI Outdoor. The to-the-point design shouldn’t be a surprise when you consider it’s from the company whose founder invented a chair that could be used anywhere. The deckchair-design aside, the ‘everywhere, anywhere’ approach they took for their other products was obviously used in devising this outdoor piece of portable furniture.

With a power-coated and durable steel construction, and a countertop made from aluminum with heat resistance, this is built for rugged use outdoors. The company have used their own SLIM-FOLD Technology, which has a patent pending, which means it can be setup and folded back down in next to no time at all. Along with the worktop, it also has four robust plastic side tables that fold out. These tables have various features such as hooks, stem glass holders and other beverage holders. The hooks can even be used for hanging utensils and garbage bags.

Given its lightweight design, it only weighs 18.9-pounds after all, it can hold 48-pounds on the top and around 35-pounds on the lower storage rack. There’s also a handy wire storage rack, perfect for those just-out-of-the-oven ingredients. Although we obviously want to be unbiased, this is one of our favorites.

Pros

  • checkAffordable price
  • checkEasy to fold and unfold
  • checkHeat-resistant aluminum countertop

Cons

  • cross-altHandle could be tougher

Specs

  • Dimensions 52 x 21 x 32-inches
  • Weight 18.9lbs
  • Storage Yes
4Camco Deluxe Folding Grill Table

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Camco are the manufacturers of this Deluxe Folding Grill Table. This is a perfect addition to your BBQ supplies, especially if you enjoy attending tailgate parties, going camping or partying on the beach. It has a high-strength and lightweight steel frame and is topped off with an aluminum counter.  When it’s folded up, it slides into the accompanying bag for safe storage. Whenever you need to use it, you simple unfold it from the middle and allow the legs to extend fully. Then you just need to place it down and set the middle metal rack in place and the aluminum top and its ready for you to start prepping food for that tasty BBQ.

In terms of storage, there this a lot of space for just about everything you need. In addition to the generously-sized tabletop, there is also a lower shelf and 2 side shelves. You’ll also find the extra hooks and paper towel holder come in handy for ensuring that everything has a place, and everything is kept in place.

So, if you’re looking for a portable prep station for cooking alfresco that’s hassle-free and easy to store away when you’re done, the Camco Deluxe Folding Grill Table could be the right choice for you.

Pros

  • checkFolds down to just 6-inches
  • checkComes with a storage bag
  • checkPower-coated steel frame

Cons

  • cross-altNot very waterproof

Specs

  • Dimensions 37.5 x 20.3 x 6-inches
  • Weight 6lbs
  • Storage Yes
5KingCamp Foldable Prep Station

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you were to look at this KingCamp Foldable Prep Station in its folded state, you’d be forgiven for thinking that it was somewhat lacking. After all, it folds right down and fits inside a laptop-size bag. However, once it has been unfolded, that small and compact rectangle turns into a versatile cooking and prep table with 2 generous door-less cabinets.

The fairly simple design consists of a sturdy, but lightweight aluminum body with a bamboo cutting board/counter on top. It’s two layers of storage space can be used for everything you need to make outdoor dining a tasty experience and there’s even a windshield that can be erected on top to protect your food and ingredients and although there is no doors to the storage units, there is a fabric flap that provides some protection.

For keeping smaller items close to hand without having to bend and reach into the cupboard space, there’s a handy pocket built into the side of the prep station. All in all, this is a very functional and practical piece that would make it easier to enjoy some delicious food in the great outdoors, whether you’re at a city park, tailgating or out in the middle of nowhere on a camping or RVing holiday.

Pros

  • checkQuick and easy setup
  • checkFolds down into surprisingly small package
  • checkSturdy construction

Cons

  • cross-altTop is made from bamboo strips glued together

Specs

  • Dimensions 30 x 19 x 32-inches
  • Weight 19lbs
  • Storage Yes
6BS Portable Stainless-Steel Cooking Station

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

To look at, when it’s not in use, this BS outdoor cooking and prep station doesn’t look like much. However, looks can be deceiving and if you invest in this, you’ll get a lot more than you bargained for. Take the countertop for instance – it’s made from high-quality stainless-steel. With this you have a very easy to maintain and incredibly sturdy working area.

One major downside about this lovely thing is that it doesn’t fold down like most of the others in our guide. However, all is forgotten in that regard with the fact that it provides ample storage space. How much is ample storage space, we here you say? Does 78-gallons sound ample to you? It certainly does to us here at Men’s Gear. While one section of the storage space, the shelf directly below the countertop, is uncovered, the larger, roomier one below not only comes complete with a door but a lock too.

So, while you may want to use the upper shelf for plates and other items you need sooner rather than later, the lockable cabinet could be used for items you just want to have close to hand, just in case. If you think all this great prep station has to offer is a couple of cabinets and a fancy worktop, you’d be mistaken. There’s a total of four S-style hooks at one end of the table, suitable for oven gloves, spatulas, tongs and other BBQ must-haves. While on the opposite side, there’s a spice rack and handy paper towel holder. So, yes, it doesn’t fold down, but it does just about everything else!

Pros

  • checkTotal of 78-gallons of storage space
  • checkLockable cabinet
  • checkHandy S-hooks and spice rack

Cons

  • cross-altNot as portable as others

Specs

  • Dimensions 53.11 x 20.39 x 35.41-inches
  • Weight 51lbs
  • Storage Yes
7Weber Portable Cart for Q 1000/2000 Series Gas Grills

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Do you have any of the Weber Q 1000 and 2000 series grills and looking for a great place to keep it while you make those mouth-watering dogs and patties? Look no further than this great portable grill cart from Weber itself. That’s exactly what it was purposely made for. It’s what it lives and breathes to do. It’s goal in life is to become the transport for your hallowed Weber grill on great days when the sun is out, the beer is cold, and you just want to cook some meat.

The Weber branding is a good enough reason to get excited about this, but that’s not all we want to rave about. Although it has a very simplistic design it still has a lot going for it. With a front-loading design, you easily just slide your grill into place and then lock it, so it doesn’t jolt or move while it’s hot and cooking that bacon, sweet bacon.

As well as being tailormade for that trusty Weber grill, it also comes equipped with two handy hooks to hand a spatula and tongs from and the two tough and weather-ready wheels make it easy to wheel here, there and everywhere.

When the deed is done and the meat is gone and you’re feeling a little bloated, you don’t want to deal with a complicated disassembly process. That’s why Weber have made it incredibly easy to fold down. They’ve even taken into consideration your meat sweats and weary body with the wire transport handle built into it that means you can just pull it along using the wheels when you’re returning to your car, tent, maybe RV or just back into your house.

Pros

  • checkEasy to assemble
  • checkFolds away nice and easily when you’re finished
  • checkIncredibly portable

Cons

  • cross-altOnly designed for specific Weber grills

Specs

  • Dimensions 30.5 x 24.5 x 19.5-inches
  • Weight N/A
  • Storage No
8GigaTent Pack n Go Prep Station

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Why settle for one single and solitary table when you can have, oh, three units in total. That’s exactly what you get with the GigATent Pack n Go Prep Station. This features marble-style countertops and has a whole lot of storage space for everything you need to prepare and cook in an organized and clear manner. Because that’s one of the keys to great BBQing – organization. Well that, meat and some beer, but organization is way at the top of that list.

So, to keep things organized, in addition to the sturdy countertops, you get plenty of storage. We don’t use the word ‘plenty’ lightly here. As there’s fully enclosed fabric-lined storage shelves to hold ingredients, cookware and just about anything else you can think of. There’s also a wire rack below the main countertop in the central unit that, while uncovered, is still another bit of space you can use.

If you’re always begrudging your cooking utensils when you can’t find them and need them or at the same time when you don’t need them and they get in the way, then the GigaTent has the answer. There’s three handy hooks to hang them from. That way you always know where they are but don’t have to deal with moving them from side to side. What else can we say about this great prep station? Haven’t we mentioned already that it’s completely foldable? How absentminded of us! Well, it is!

Pros

  • checkThree separate worktops
  • checkLinen-lined storage space with flap for keeping bugs out
  • checkFoldable design

Cons

  • cross-altStorage space needs to be disassembled when folding it away

Specs

  • Dimensions 18 x 69 x 44-inches
  • Weight 22lbs
  • Storage Yes
9Cuisinart CFG-222 Take Along Grill Stand

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Cuisinart are known for their kitchen gadgets and appliances, so it shouldn’t be a surprise that as they’ve designed a portable grill table that we’re going to discuss it in this guide. Although none of the storage space on this nifty table is covered, it’s hard to argue with the actual amount of storage space you get for such an affordable price. As well as the main countertop, that can be used for your portable grill, there’s another two tables that flip up at either side.

That’s not all though, because rather than just featuring the obligatory three hooks and a paper towel holder, as some of them do in our guide, this top trumps them. There’s a total of six tool hooks, more than enough for oven mitts, spatulas, forks and the crucial tongs. There’s also six cup holders, giving you that hands-free cooking and eating experience that’s often missing when you’re BBQing alfresco.

It may not have covered storage, as we noted already, but it does have the capacity to hold a maximum of 35lbs. That’s more than enough for a reasonable sized cooler. Lightweight, foldable and utterly irresistible if you’re after a cheap alternative to some of the pricier options listed here, this is a winner.

Pros

  • checkEight tool hooks and six cup holders
  • check35lbs storage capacity
  • checkEasy to fold up and down

Cons

  • cross-altDiscolors in the rain

Specs

  • Dimensions 54 x 20 x 30.5-inches
  • Weight 17.26lbs
  • Storage Yes
10CampLand Aluminum Adjustable-Height Folding Table

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you feel as if many of the grill tables and prep stations in our guide so far do not provide enough covered storage space, then this great solution from CampLand may provide you with exactly what you need. It has a very sturdy construction, that comprises of an aluminum frame, MDF tabletop and 400D Oxford storage cartons. Between them, those storage units can hold a total of 30kg, meaning you can keep food and anything else away from the wildlife and bugs out there while your prepping and serving food.

It may not be an all-singing and all-dancing model like others, but for its price, we think it’s neat. As well as all that storage space and a generous work area, we also love the fact its height can be adjusted easily. So, if you’re a bit of a short ass, this will work just as well for you as it would someone who needs it extended to a proper height.

Okay, so you probably won’t fit your 35-pounder grill on top of it. If you’re looking to complement your grill station, though, this foldable table and storage unit is a worthy investment.

Pros

  • checkDurable and lightweight
  • check600-Denier Oxford Nylon storage cartons
  • checkHeight-adjustable

Cons

  • cross-altCarry bag could be better, has a funny chemical smell

Specs

  • Dimensions 47.24 x 18.5 x 27.36-inches
  • Weight N/A
  • Storage Yes
11Best Choice Products Portable Grilling Table with Carrying Case

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another stunning item in our guide is this Best Choice Products grilling table, consisting of three aluminum tabletops with weather-resistance and a sturdy steel frame. In just under a minute, you can have this unit erected and be ready to prep and cook that beautiful meat and other tasty grub for your awesome BBQ. Although it looks quite minimalist, in addition to the working areas, there’s plenty of storage space.

In fact, Best Choice Products have ensured that there’s a wire rack, four handy hooks for utensils and a paper towel holder so that everything you need is within reach, when you need it. When you have that hunger for some gently grilled meat and a nice salad slider, or whatever your favorite is, you don’t want to waste time. You don’t want to deal with a complex folded tabletop or anything requiring more than a quick assembly. That’s why you should invest in this prepping table.

At just under 16-pounds its incredibly lightweight. It also benefits from having an extremely streamlined build once it’s been folded down and slipped into the accompanying storage bag. There, it’s ready for action the next time you need it.

Pros

  • checkThree generously-sized tabletops
  • checkLess than 16-pounds
  • checkSturdy construction

Cons

  • cross-altQuality control for top could be better

Specs

  • Dimensions 56 x 19 x 32-inches
  • Weight 16.9lbs
  • Storage Yes
12

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

It’s fair to say that most of the prep stations and grill tables we’ve included up until this point have been quite big. Even if they’ve not been massive, they’ve still be family-sized. What if you’re looking for something a little smaller and more intimate? Preparing to go on a romantic BBQ-fueled trip to the beach with your significant other? Maybe you’re just looking to sit in the backyard, enjoying freedom from the stress of other people with a couple of bottles and a nice rib-eye steak. Either way, you’ll want to check out this special little accessory.

From CampLand, this is a smaller and even more compact brother to the table we featured further up the page. Despite its size though, it still provides just enough space to work on that tasty grub or to keep your plates and bottles, while you soak up the sun and listen to some tunes. It consists of a sturdy aluminum frame with an MDF tabletop and is waterproof, resistant to stains and very easy to clean when you’ve finished with it.

The already small table folds up even more compact, resembling a small and slimline briefcase. As you’d imagine, this is an exceptionally low-priced table. So, even if you think you’ll only use it occasionally, it’s still a better investment than some big hunk of an all-star quarterback-style grill table and prep station.

Pros

  • checkExtremely compact, lightweight and portable
  • checkGood solid construction
  • checkAdequate work space

Cons

  • cross-altSmall

Specs

  • Dimensions 15.7 x 12 x 2.6-inches
  • Weight 4.4lbs
  • Storage No
13Coleman Pack-Away Portable Kitchen

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Coleman are one of the most well-known and popular brands discussed in our guide. They are known for making practical and user-friendly accessories for the great outdoors that help us all to get the most out of camping, BBQing and other similar pursuits. And they’re good name is reaffirmed with this unit. We say unit, when it’s more, as the name suggests, a portable kitchen.

Firstly, there’s a special stand for either your Coleman stove or cooler, depending on your BBQ setup. That’s not all because secondly, there’s a 32 x 24-inches countertop providing you with ample space to carry out any prep work you need and to serve those patties into some buns. We’d recommend brioche buns, always, every single time. That’s if you asked us. Even if you didn’t, there’s our five-cents for free.

On the work area, there’s also a frame with four hooks for hanging your crucial utensils, so their both out of the way and where you need them, when you need them. Ready to buy it now? Wait, there’s more, because high above the work station, there’s a special hook designed to hang a light from. Perfect for BBQing in the dark or the early morning if you’re bulking up on protein and energy before ascending a mountain or hunting a bear.

By the way, don’t hunt bears. That was just a joke. This Coleman portable kitchen is anything but a joke. Given just how cheap and lightweight it is, you’ll be the envy of all your friends when they roll up to that picnic or tailgate party and see you in your element. Working the grill, sizzling the bacon and dancing to Carly-Rae Jepsen in Gay abandon! Don’t even deny it, dude!

Pros

  • checkLots of working space
  • checkHook for hanging a light
  • checkRidiculously inexpensive

Cons

  • cross-altWould benefit from more storage space, maybe

Specs

  • Dimensions 56.7 x 21.3 x 66.1-inches
  • Weight 13.8lbs
  • Storage: Yes
14Timber Ridge Foldable Cook Station with Storage organizer

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

While many people may find the other, more expansive models appealing, if you’re looking for something more compact, even when it’s setup, this is the thing. This Timber Ridge foldable cook Station has a stunning amount of space for storing things away in. Like much of our list, its frame is constructed from durable aluminum and the tabletop is made from sturdy MDF. Despite its lightweight design though, at just 17.6lbs and compact layout, there’s still adequate space for everything you need to have a good BBQ and/or camping experience.

There’s a total of three shelves in the sealable cabinet space below the worktop and there’s also handy pockets to the side for smaller items, such as utensils and bottle openers. The kind of things you’d want close to hand but want to keep out of your way when you’re dealing with other things. A worthy contender for your next BBQ accessory purchase.

Pros

  • checkThree shelves of covered storage space
  • checkFoldaway design
  • checkTough aluminum frame

Cons

  • cross-altMay be smaller than you expect

Specs

  • Dimensions 31.3 x 19.7 x 23.6-inches
  • Weight 17.6lbs
  • Storage Yes
15Giantex 80-Quart Patio Rolling Cooler

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

So, we’ve spoken quite extensively about the various options there are out there for prepping stations and places to setup your portable grills and BBQs. What does every BBQ need? We’ve mentioned it already a few times in the guide so far, but if you still don’t know – it’s beer! And, well other beverages too, we’re not going to be down on you if you just like a Sprite or Zero Coke (okay we might be with that, switch it up guys, seriously!)

Anyway, back to the cooler, this is an awesome, if very, catering kitchen-styled piece of equipment. Essentially a large ice chest with a handy shelf at the bottom set on wheels, it’s the perfect companion to your prep station or portable grill and ideal for camping, tailgating or just having a BBQ in your back garden.

It can hold a maximum of 80-quarts of ice and drinks and features two non-locking and two locking wheels for easy transportation from one place to the other. As if that’s not enough, there’s also a handy bottle opener and cap catcher, sop you don’t have to spend an hour and a half after the party dies down to tidy up.

Pros

  • checkAwesome ice chest on wheels
  • checkBottle opener and cap catcher
  • checkEasy to use and move

Cons

  • cross-altNot always packaged sufficiently for shipment

Specs

  • Dimensions 36 x 19 x 35-inches
  • Weight 41lbs
  • Storage Yes
16Best Choice Products 80-Quart Rolling Cooler

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you felt the above cooler on wheels lacked color and a bit of pizazz! Then, hold on to your hats, boys, because this beauty has a very bright and vibrant red finish. It reminds us of a classic Ferrari or Mustang. It’s more or less very similar to the above model, with four wheels, two that lock and two that don’t to increase stability when maneuvering it, as well as when it’s stationary.

There’s not a lot else to say really, it can hold around 50 bottles or 70 cans and has a maximum capacity of 80-quarts. No BBQ or camping experience, with adults, is the same without beer or another fine chilled beverage.

Pros

  • checkBright and vibrant red coloring
  • checkBottle opener and cap catcher
  • checkLarge capacity

Cons

  • cross-altDrain could be better placed

Specs

  • Dimensions 33.2 x 17.5 x 17.2-inches
  • Weight 30lbs
  • Storage Yes

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What type of Portable Grill Table and Prep Stations are Available?

As you you’ve undoubtedly seen, there’s quite a few different types of grill tables and prep stations to choose from. While some are a simple as a folding table that looks like a wallpapering table, others incorporate several different compartments, shelves and countertops.

It’s easy to find the choice and variety bewildering and overwhelming, but look at it another way, because there’s so many different options to choose from, you’re bound to find the one that’s right for you.

What to Look for When Buying an Outdoor Portable Grill Cart?

The above answer leads us nicely onto this question of what you should look for when buying an outdoor portable grill. As there’s so many options out there, the easiest way to whittle them down to find that perfect one for you, is by working out what you want.

Try asking yourself the following questions –

Do you need a space to place your portable grill?

Are you looking for lockable storage space?

Do you want a table that folds or one that stands permanently assembled?

What available space do you have?

By looking for the answers to these questions, you’ll be able to identify the portable grill table that’s just right for you.

Let’s Have a Cook-Off!

There’s never enough space for all you need when BBQing your favorite types and cuts of meat. Well, that is, we hope, until you read our guide to the best prep stations and portable grill tables. We hope we’ve given you plenty of options to up your BBQ game. As we’re still technically in the tail-end of winter, you’ve still got time to WOW your buddies with a brand-new grill setup, that’ll ensure you’re the talk of the town.

Even if you’re not worried about what people think, if you’ve struggled with perfecting your BBQing and grilling, it could be that you’re not giving yourself enough space to work. That’s why you need a portable grill table. As we’ve been able to whittle down what’s available into 16 great options, you don’t have quite as much of a headscratcher to choose the right one for you.

Just as we all have things we like and things we don’t like at a BBQ, there’s a grill table and prep station for everyone. Some are fully-functioning mini-kitchens, while others are a simple folded table. There really is no wrong choice, unless that choice is ‘no more bacon please’.

Best 22 Floor Jacks

BEST FLOOR JACKS

1Arcan XL20 2-Ton Low Profile Steel Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Kicking of our reviews is Arcan XL20 Low Profile Floor Jack and if you’re one of those lucky ‘BLEEP’ that owns a sports car, this should be one of the first that you check out. We’d actually say that this is one of the best low-profile floor jacks that money can buy right now as it has a lift range of between 3.5in and 18.5in and offers a great blend of portability and durability.

Steel construction means that this hydraulic floor jack is as durable as they come but also fairly heavy compared to those made from aluminum. Steel jacks do have a higher weight capacity though, so it all comes down to whether you prefer capacity or mobility. The XL20 has a 2-ton capacity so it’ll have no problem lifting smaller cars and even some medium-sized cars. Arcan does have a 3-ton variant if you’re concerned that your car may be too happy for this model.

ASME standard approved, the Arcan XL20 also impressed us due to its efficient hydraulic system. You’re not going to have to bust your guts when pumping this baby as much as you’d have to with many of its competitors.

Pros

  • checkCompetitively priced
  • checkImpressive build quality
  • checkEfficient hydraulic system

Cons

  • cross-altThe saddle is a little large

Specs

  • Capacity 2t
  • Weight 915.2oz
  • Dimensions 26in x 6.3in x 13.2in
  • Type Hydraulic
2Pro-Lift F-767 2-Ton Low Profile Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve actually featured several floor jacks from Pro-Lift in this list and for very good reason, they have a very good reputation for manufacturing some of the most popular jacks in the business. Like the previous jack we reviewed, this is ideal for use on low profile cars and will be able to adequately lift all small cars at a height range of between 3.5in and 14in.

Popular in most of the floor jack reviews that we’ve seen online, this low-cost but highly portable steel framed hydraulic floor jack has a good mix of durability and portability. There are not many hydraulic jacks that are light enough to be carried in the trunk but strong enough to support up to two tons – this is one of them.

If you’re looking for a hydraulic jack for your home, this is going to be more than adequate. However, we would recommend something a little more heavy-duty if you’re planning to use it regularly in a repair shop setting. That said, for the money, you’re getting a very nice floor jack that will give you good performance and reliability levels.

Pros

  • checkGood portability
  • checkFits cars as low as 3.5in
  • checkGreat value jack

Cons

  • cross-altNot ideal for repair shops

Specs

  • Capacity 2t
  • Weight 480oz
  • Dimensions 17.9in 5.3in x 8.5in
  • Type Hydraulic
3Blackhawk B6350 Fast Lift Service Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you’re in the market for something a little more robust and has the ability to lift heavier vehicles, this 3.5-ton Blackhawk B6350 Service Jack is going to be right up your street. Recommended for use in a service garage or for those of you that regularly perform work on larger vehicles, you won’t find it easy to find a better high lift floor jack than this.

We have to warn you though, this well-built jack sacrifices portability in order to provide better robustness and weight capacity. It is heavy, so you’re not going to want to have to lug it around too much. That said, for that sacrifice, you get a jack that can lift as much as 3-tons to heights of between 5 and 21 inches.

We particularly like that this floor jack has a 1-year warranty but other standout selling points include an efficient fast lift feature, a bypass device that prevents any damage from overpumping, and a patented saddle design. Not ideal for low-profile vehicles, however, so check out the two above if you require lifting low profile vehicles.

Pros

  • checkImpressive max lift height of 22in
  • checkFast lift technology
  • checkCan lift most vehicles

Cons

  • cross-altVery heavy

Specs

  • Capacity 3.5t
  • Weight 1,360oz
  • Dimensions 30.1in x 15.8in x 6.9in
  • Type Hydraulic
4NOS NSJ0302 3-Ton Aluminum Service Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

There are not too many jacks that are constructed of aluminum and this is basically because steel is the stronger material. That said, aluminum is far lighter and the NOS NSJ0302 makes use of aluminum that is aircraft grade for added strength. On top of that, they have still made use of some steel reinforcement in key areas of this floor jack.

You’ll be able to jack up cars that sit as low as 3.7 inches and will be able to lift anything up to three tons in weight up to a maximum height of 18.125 inches. We also have to say that the aluminum construction and design also make this one of the sexiest jacks on the market – that is of course if this matters to you!

Complying with ASME PALD standards alongside some excellent safety features such as safety valves and a joint release mechanism also means that you’re going to be getting a jack that is as safe as anything out there right now. This is one of our favorite hydraulic floor jacks and therefore have no issues with including it on this list.

Pros

  • checkTop quality construction
  • checkComplies with ASME standard
  • checkLight for a 3-ton jack

Cons

  • cross-altNot as durable as steel jacks

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 928oz
  • Dimensions 28.4in x 13.8in x 6.3in
  • Type Hydraulic
5Pittsburgh Automotive Ultra Low Profile 3-Ton Steel Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Pittsburgh Automotive is a floor jack that excels in just about every department. Firstly, it can accommodate just about any vehicle due to its capacity of 3-tons and an exceptionally low minimum lift range of 2.875 inches. Secondly, and thirdly actually, its steel construction and very affordable price mean that it is both strong and excellent value for money respectively.

In terms of mobility, this is probably its weakest area but even here it is lighter than many other of the best floor jacks that are constructed of steel. The heavy-duty rollers on the bottom also aid it in this area by giving you the ability to move it around the floor quite easily. Using a double pump system, jacking your car up does not take nearly as much effort as is needed with many of its competitors, another big benefit with picking up one of these bad boys.

We’re very impressed with Pittsburgh and that’s why you’ll notice a few of their other floor jacks in our list. This one in particular though has to be the best floor jack for the money in our opinion.

Pros

  • checkSuperb value for money
  • checkVery low profile
  • checkAble to handle most vehicles

Cons

  • cross-altNot the prettiest

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 1,264oz
  • Dimensions 28in x 12in x 10in
  • Type Hydraulic
6Liftmaster 3-Ton Ultra Low Profile Steel Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

For the price, the Liftmaster 3-Ultra Low-Profile Steel Floor Jack is right up there when it comes to our favorite floor jacks. Once you get past its rather basic and uninspiring looks – you’ll quickly see that this jack has so much going for it. At the end of the day, who actually chooses a floor jack on how they look anyway?

First of all, it has an excellent lift range of between 3in and 19.7in which gives it an excellent price to height ratio. That low starting point means that it can lift even the lowest of cars while the maximum height means that you can really get underneath a vehicle to get your work done. We also have to mention the high levels of durability that this steel-constructed 3-ton floor jack provides.

Some other positives include a saddle that comes with anti-slip padding that adds an extra element of safety, the fact that you can pump a vehicle up to full height within ten pumps, and a foam coated handle that aids grip and helps to prevent scratch damage. All in all, the Liftmaster is a great jack at a great price and should be among your considerations.

Pros

  • checkLift range of 3in to 19.7in
  • checkSaddle has anti-slip rubber
  • checkEfficient pump action

Cons

  • cross-altPlain looking

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 1,164oz
  • Dimensions 31in x 15in x 6.5in
  • Type Hydraulic
7Torin Big Red 3-Ton Heavy Duty Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

First and foremost, the big appeal with this floor jack is without a doubt the price. You’re not going to be able to find many other 3-ton jacks at this price, let alone any that gets as many good floor jack reviews. Sure, there are better jacks out there but they are going to cost you substantially more than the budget price that this one is available for.

As for the specs, well, with a lift range of between 6 inches and 21 inches you can instantly see that this was designed for larger and heavier vehicles. If you have a low-profile sports car, we suggest you go and look at something that has a much lower base height. The Big Red does have a high maximum height which is great for larger vehicles and a big reason for this height is the long neck that the jack has.

Another surprising thing about the Big Red here is that it’s not as heavy as you might expect. Yes, it’s heavy but not nearly as heavy as other heavy-duty 3-Ton jacks on the market. That and the fact that it has swiveling rear wheels means that getting the jack into the right position under the car isn’t going to be too difficult.

Pros

  • checkGreat for trucks and SUV’s
  • checkValue for money
  • checkSwiveling rear wheels

Cons

  • cross-altNot suitable for low-profile vehicles

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 702.4oz
  • Dimensions 26in x 11in x 8in
  • Type Hydraulic
8Jegs 80077 3 Ton Professional Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

At the opposite scale to our last 3-ton jack above in terms of price comes the Jegs 80077 3-Ton Professional Floor Jack. This comes in at almost three times the price and certainly falls into the premium category. That said, this is definitely one of the best portable car jacks that money can buy for a number of reasons.

It has been constructed of lightweight aluminum which means that it’s far more portable than those made of steel. Additionally, because it’s a low-profile jack with a lift range of between 3.5 and 19.25 inches, you’re going to be able to lift almost any car.

Where the extra price really comes into play however, is the additional features that budget jacks do not offer. One of these is a sealed hydraulic system which prevents dust and other debris from giving you issues, a safety valve that stops the jack from overloading, and a reinforced left arm. The icing on the cake is that this floor jack complies with ASME PALD 2014 standards.

We also have to comment on the bright yellow coloring which not looks great but also makes it very easy to spot in even the dreariest of dreary garages.

Pros

  • checkLightweight aluminum construction
  • checkASME standards
  • checkQuality-build

Cons

  • cross-altTakes a few pumps to fully extend

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 928oz
  • Dimensions 32in x 15in x 8in
  • Type Hydraulic
9MarchInn 5 Ton Hydraulic Floor Jack Tire Inflator and Flashlight

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

For all you lazy types out there that hate the thought of having to manually jack your car when a flat tire occurs, you’re going to absolutely love this electric floor jack, tire inflator, and flashlight from MarchInn. You’ll now have no trouble changing out that flat tire as you’ll have all of the tools that you need. You could even opt to take their more expensive bundle that even includes an electric impact wrench that even makes removing the wheel nuts a breeze!

It should be noted that this jack is designed to be used sparingly and not in a workshop environment as we do not think it has the durability to hold up. However, as a kit to have in your car for when you need to change a tire on the roadside, this thing is a must have. All you have to do is hook it up to the cigarette lighter or even direct to the battery if you’re worried about blowing any fuses and you’re away.

With a 5-ton capacity it can lift all small, medium, and large cars easily while most trucks and vans will also not pose too much problem. We just love the concept of having everything that you need in one handy kit and at the price, it really has to be considered great value for money as well.

Pros

  • checkAll the tools you need
  • checkLifts up to 5-tons
  • checkTakes a minute to lift a car

Cons

  • cross-altAir pump a little slow

Specs

  • Capacity 5t
  • Weight 243.36oz
  • Dimensions 14.6in x 9.8in x 7.5in
  • Type Electric Hydraulic
10Sunex 6603ASJ 3-Ton Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Designed to be used in a workshop environment, the Sunex 6603ASJ is another that has been getting some rave floor jack reviews. Made primarily from aluminum but with steel used in areas that need reinforcement, this 3-Ton jack offers up an excellent combination of durability and portability. In fact, its weight combined with its wide track wheels means that moving this jack around is something done with ease.

As for the lift range, you’re looking at 6.5 to 19.3 inches and the great part is that it takes less than ten pumps to get it to the maximum. The not so great part is that you’re not going to be able to lift any car that has a lower profile than 6.5 inches. Of course, it’ll be fine for most road cars you’ll have to roll out a low-profile jack for anything too low.

Other features include a handle side handle which also aids portability, a large anti-slip saddle pad that improves safety, and some good looks. On the latter however, we do which the colors were a little brighter but other than that it does look good.

Pros

  • checkGood maneuverability
  • checkQuality construction
  • checkEfficient pump mechanism

Cons

  • cross-altOn the expensive side

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 928oz
  • Dimensions 15in x 7.9in x 31.7in
  • Type Hydraulic
11Pro-Lift F-2315PE Hydraulic Car Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

This is the second-floor jack from Pro-Lift on our list and the F-2315PE Hydraulic Car Jack certainly follows in the footsteps of their other affordably priced jacks. While we would not recommend this for extensive or workshop use, we do think that it is a jack that is perfect to have at home or even to be kept in the car.

It weights just 288oz and has strong casters that allow you to move it around easily, a lift range of between 4.92 and 11.81 inches which is suitable for many cars, and a steel frame construction that means that it is more than durable enough. We should warn that with a max capacity of 1.5-ton, we do not recommend lifting anything more than a small car with this jack.

As a budget jack for small cars, the F-2315PE is a very good option in our opinion. Sure, it has its limitations but for the money you’re getting great value. Another nice touch that also shows how portable this jack is, is the fact that it comes in its very own carry case.

Pros

  • checkLightweight & portable
  • checkFantastic price
  • checkCarry case

Cons

  • cross-altOnly for small cars

Specs

  • Capacity 1.5t
  • Weight 288oz
  • Dimensions 18in x 9in x 6in
  • Type Hydraulic
12Torin Big Red 2-Ton Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another from the lower end of the spectrum in terms of price is another offering from the Torin Big Red range. This 2-ton hydraulic car jack certainly beats most for price but how does it hold up performance wise? Not too bad actually and we’d have no problem recommending this to have at home for when you need to get some work done under your car or as a cheap backup in a workshop.

Designed to be lightweight, this jack comes packed in its very own carry case and can therefore be thrown in your trunk for those times in need at the side of a road. In terms of capacity and lift range, the Big Red can lift as much as 2 tons and has a range of between 5.6 and 13 inches. This makes it suitable for most smaller cars and some medium-sized cars but we would not advise trying to lift anything larger.

As stated, this isn’t going to be your preferred option if you own a garage or workshop but it’s more than durable enough for occasional use. There’s even a safety overload system that will instantly prevent you from trying to lift anything too heavy – a feature that is always handy on a floor jack but definitely on one that’s as cheap as this one.

Pros

  • checkGreat budget buy
  • checkLightweight but durable
  • checkCarry case

Cons

  • cross-altNot ideal for workshops

Specs

  • Capacity 2t
  • Weight 358.4oz
  • Dimensions 9.5in x 19.8in x 7in
  • Type Hydraulic
13Pittsburgh Compact 1.5-Ton Racing Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Constructed of aircraft aluminum for some serious durability and weighing just 640 ounces, it is clear to see why the Pittsburgh Compact 1.5-Ton Racing Jack it is the hydraulic floor jack of choice for many people. This is a premium jack both in terms of its price and of its quality and you really should be checking it out if you’re after something that can lift low-profile cars effortlessly.

Why do we say effortlessly? Well, it takes just three or four pumps on this thing to lift small cars which when you consider that some jacks take ten or even fifteen pumps, you can see the effort that you can save with this thing. This is primarily down to the dual pump mechanism that this floor jack uses which allows for rapid lifting.

This jack was actually designed with professional racing teams in mind as it gets the job done quickly without compromising on safety or durability. This is also clear due to the max capacity of 1.5-ton as racing cars are designed to be as light as possible so to allow them to travel quicker. It also looks great too – one of our favorites in this area in fact.

Pros

  • checkJust a few pumps needed
  • checkConstructed of aircraft aluminum
  • checkDual parallel pump system

Cons

  • cross-altNot suitable for large vehicles

Specs

  • Capacity 1.5t
  • Weight 640oz
  • Dimensions 23in x 10in x 7in
  • Type Hydraulic
14

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

NOS has made a series of top-quality portable car jacks over the years and the NSJ0301 is definitely one of their best. Primarily constructed of aluminum but with steel reinforcements where needed such as in the lift arm, this jack is fantastically lightweight but without losing out too much in terms of the durability that it provides.

It literally weighs close to half the weight of other floor jacks made from 100% steel that is capable of lifting the same 3-ton weight. If you’re somebody that values being able to move your jack around a lot easier, this is certainly a jack that you should be taking a closer look at.

Something else that will impress many of you is the fact that this can lift cars that sit as low as 3.75 inches from the ground. This means sportscars, in particular, can be lifted due to the ultra-low profile of the NSJ0301. Even most medium-sized cars and some SUVs can be lifted with this jack due to the weight capacity of 3t.

Pros

  • checkAttractive design
  • checkAnti-slip saddle
  • checkLightweight

Cons

  • cross-altPricey compared to similar jacks

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 432oz
  • Dimensions 28.7in x 13in x 6.6in
  • Type Hydraulic
15ProForge 22-Ton Hydraulic/Air Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Forget lifting your car, the ProForge 22-Ton Hydraulic Floor Jack will be able to lift a 10-story building. No, seriously, this thing can handle some weight and is ideal for any of you that need to lift any kind of heavy load or extremely large vehicles. What you have to remember is that jacks with this kind of capacity usually cost five times what this unit is selling for right now.

Does that obvious value for money affect the quality that the ProForge provides? Well, it is probably not up there with some of the very best hydraulic/air floor jacks in terms of build-quality but at this price, you’re still getting yourself a very impressive piece of kit. Made from steel, you can be sure that it is robust and can take a beating and although it is heavy – would you really want to try and lift a bus, plane, or another heavy vehicle with something that wasn’t?

This jack has a minimum saddle height of 8.5 inches and it can lift to a maximum height that is just over 10 inches. Well worth a look if you’re on a budget but want something that is both able and reputable to get the job done.

Pros

  • checkAmazing price
  • checkLifts up to 22-tons
  • checkMobile despite weight

Cons

  • cross-altNo warranty

Specs

  • Capacity 22t
  • Weight 1,376
  • Dimensions 26in x 14in x 12in
  • Type Hydraulic/Air
16Performance Tool W1640 2-1/2-Ton Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Performance Tool W1640 is another floor jack that will not break the bank and with a lifting capacity of 2.5 ton, you’re actually getting plenty of moneys worth. Compared to other jacks with the same or similar capacity, you’re definitely making some good savings with the W1640 and this is not at too much of a sacrifice to the quality of the product.

This jack has a a decent lift range of 5 to 15.5 inches which might not be low enough for some sports cars but it’s certainly low enough to lift just about any other small-to-medium car. You’ll even be able to lift some light trucks with the W1640 but you really should check the weight of the vehicle before attempting to lift it.

While the jack that we’re reviewing is 2.5-ton, they do have other weight capacities over at Performance Tools, so essentially you can get the same jack but with capacities ranging between 1.5-ton to 3-ton. If you’re going to be working on heavier vehicles, we certainly suggest you go for something with increased weight capacity.

Pros

  • checkValue for money
  • checkOver load protection
  • checkFairly light

Cons

  • cross-altBetter durability available

Specs

  • Capacity 2.5t
  • Weight 443.2oz
  • Dimensions 22in x 9in x 6in
  • Type Hydraulic
17Pro-Lift G-737 3-1/2-Ton Garage Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

This is the third appearance for Pro-Lift with this one being the G-737 Speedy Lift Garage Jack. It offers a standard capacity of 3.5-ton which is more than enough for most cars, trucks, and vans. Furthermore, you can get your vehicle to the desired lift height with a number of pumps that you can count on just one hand. Small cars will take no more than four pumps while trucks might take one extra pump.

Other areas of quality with the G-737 includes the saddle being rubber which protects the vehicle being lifted without sacrificing stability. Additionally, a universal joint release mechanism allows you to lower the jack more precisely which also protects both you and the vehicle. The build-quality of this jack is also at a high level as the car jack reviews that follow it will attest to.

This might not be a gamechanger but one other neat little feature that we find handy is that of the magnetic tool tray. You can place nuts, bolts other metal items in here with the peace of mind that you’re not going to lose them around a hectic workshop. Summing up, this is a great all-rounder and one that we feel most of you will more than appreciate.

Pros

  • checkOnly a few pumps needed
  • checkMagnetic tool tray
  • checkSteel construction

Cons

  • cross-altVery heavy

Specs

  • Capacity 3.5t
  • Weight 1,440oz
  • Dimensions 30.12in x 6.89in x 15.75in
  • Type Hydraulic
18Sunex 6602LP 2-Ton Low Rider Service Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve chosen the Sunex 6602LP 2-Ton Low Rider Service Jack as our ‘Editors Pick’ and you’re just about to find out why. This might be one of the more expensive jacks on our list but we have nothing but great things to say about it. It has a super low profile, makes use of rapid rise technology, is very maneuverable despite its heavy weight, and is as durable as they come.

This jack has a minimum height of 2.75 inches which is low enough to lift even the lowest of cars and a maximum lift height of 24 inches. That is easily one of the best lift ranges that you’ll see on this list but it doesn’t just excel there. Through rapid rise technology, that lift can be experienced in just a matter of six or seven pumps.

Furthermore, this jack is ASME PALD compliant, comes with a one-year warranty, and is constructed of industrial-grade steel that will ensure that it lasts for a good many years. Ideal for use at home or in a workshop environment, you’re not going to find many low-profile jacks as good as this one and that is why it is our favorite of the lot.

Pros

  • checkASME PALD compliant
  • checkLift range of 2.75in to 24in
  • check1-year manufacturer’s warranty

Cons

  • cross-altHeavy jack

Specs

  • Capacity 2t
  • Weight 1,657.6oz
  • Dimensions 36in x 15.8in x 7.5in
  • Type Hydraulic
19Arcan ALJ3T 3-Ton Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

You’re certainly spoilt for choice when it comes to the best hydraulic floor jacks as the Arcan ALJ3T 3-Ton Floor Jack is another great option to consider. This premium-grade floor jack has a lift capacity of three ton which is more than you’ll need to lift most small and medium sized cars and while you might think that this will have to have been constructed of steel to handle the load, it’s actually made from aircraft aluminum.

That material allows it to retain its durability but with the addition of far more portability. It still weights quite a bit but not as much as you’ll find with steel-constructed floor jacks. As for the lift range with this particular jack, you’re looking at a minimum of 3.75 inches and a maximum of 18.25 inches which is going to be more than enough for most of you.

This really is a high-quality jack that looks and feels durable, has a number of safety features such as bypass and overload valves, and which adheres to ASME PASE standards. Its dual pump pistons might not lift a vehicle as quickly as a few others in this price range but they still the job pretty quickly to make any lift and easy one.

Pros

  • checkASME PASE-2014 safety compliant
  • checkConstructed of aircraft aluminum
  • checkHas a low profile of 3.75 inches

Cons

  • cross-altMore expensive than others in this range

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 896oz
  • Dimensions 30in x 13.5in x 8in
  • Type Hydraulic
20Jegs 80006 2-Ton Aluminum Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Jegs is another reputable brand when it comes to floor jacks and this low-profile 2-Ton Aluminum Floor Jack is definitely among their best floor jacks right now. Its capacity and minimum lift limit of 3.5 inches means that there are not many vehicles that it will not be able to get underneath. The 2-ton weight capacity also means that you’re going to be able to lift the majority of cars that’re on the road today.

This has been designed to be as lightweight as possible without sacrificing on its durability and this is why it has been constructed of aluminum instead of steel. This means you’ll be able to store it in the trunk of your car if needs must while it’ll also work as a professional level jack in a workshop environment too.

Rubber lift pads, knurled grips, and adhering to ASME PALD standards is where the safety aspects come into play and each of these really do mean that you can have a peace of mind that you have a quality floor jack from a very reputable manufacturer. The price might be the only issue but once again, you’re paying for some of the best quality available.

Pros

  • checkMeets ASME PALD standards
  • checkLightweight
  • checkGood lifting range

Cons

  • cross-altQuite expensive

Specs

  • Capacity 2t
  • Weight 803.2oz
  • Dimensions 7.4in x 14.8in x 31.6in
  • Type Hydraulic
21Pittsburgh 3-Ton Heavy Duty Floor Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The penultimate floor jack on our list is another from Pittsburgh that has to be among the very best car floor jacks available today. As one of the most expensive we’ve reviewed, it would be understandable if you’ll be a little put off but like many others int his price range, you’re really getting the ultimate in quality for your money.

This 3-Ton Heavy Duty Floor Jack is constructed of heavy-duty steel, has a lift range of between 5in and 18.25in, and will be able to lift pretty much any car and even some smaller trucks. The best part is that it’ll only take five pumps to get the jack to its maximum height, something that many other jacks on this list can compete with. In fact, you’ll only need three and a half pumps to get to the ideal height for most cars that you use it on!

As you might expect from a steel-constructed floor jack, it is on the heavy side but it still does offer decent mobility. This is primarily because of the steel casters and wheels which allow you to push and pull it to where it needs to go. Those combined with a minimum height of 5 inches means that you’ll be able to get under and lift pretty much all cars that are not overly low-profile.

Pros

  • checkExtremely durable
  • checkFive pumps for full height
  • checkReputable brand

Cons

  • cross-altOn the heavy side

Specs

  • Capacity 3t
  • Weight 1,248oz
  • Dimensions 27.5in x 13.5in
  • Type Hydraulic
22Strongway 22-Ton Air/Hydraulic Service Jack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Bringing our list of our 22 best floor jacks to a close is that of the Strongway 22-Ton Air/Hydraulic Service Jack. This uses an air motor to lift just about any heavy loads that you can imagine but, in your case, this is obviously going to be cars, trucks, and other vehicles. That said, with a capacity of 22-ton, there is very little that it’s not going to be able to help you lift.

Built from rugged steel, durability is never going to be a concern and with large 8-inch wheels, moving the jack into position can be done easily and efficiently. Safety is also a big focus of this Strongway service jack which is showcased via safety overload protection and it meeting ASME PALD 2009 standards.

Admittedly, this jack might offer a little too much for many of you that are just after something that can lift your car. However, if you work as a mechanic or need to lift other machinery, industrial equipment, or the largest of farm vehicles, this is certainly a jack you should be considering. The price is also very appealing when you consider the weights that it’ll have no trouble lifting.

Pros

  • check1-Year limited warranty
  • checkLifts up to 22 tons
  • checkSafety overload protection

Cons

  • cross-altA little bit overkill

Specs

  • Capacity: 22t
  • Weight 1,656oz
  • Dimensions 21.73in x 12.4in x 9.88in
  • Type Air/Hydraulic

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What types of floor jacks are available?

There are several different types of floor jacks on the market and each will be better suited to different uses and environments. Some will be ideal for carrying around in your car in case the inevitable flat tire occurs when you’re late for that all-important date, meeting, wedding, or fortunately when you’re meant to meet the girlfriend for a shopping trip. On the other hand, some jacks are better used at home or in a repair shop as they’re simply too heavy to pick up and move around.

You’ll also have to consider what you’re going to be using your jack for before purchasing one. Yes, we know, you’re going to want to lift your car! Well, some of you might own an SUV or even a truck, so different types of jacks or at least their max capacity will have to be considered.

Essentially, there are three different types of jacks:

  • Scissor Jacks – These are the type of jacks that will be ideal for carrying around in your car. When your tire goes pop these will give you the ability to lift your car just enough for you to be able to change your tire. One thing they will not be able to do, unfortunately, is to stop your girlfriend/wife from whining about being late for that aforementioned shopping trip.
  • Hydraulic Jacks – Now unless you’re Dwayne Johnson, a hydraulic jack is not something that you’ll want to be lifting up too often or storing in the trunk of your car. These things can weigh a lot and are designed to be used at home or in a repair shop environment. Rather than being mechanical jacks like their scissor cousin, these are operated by pumping fluid into a cylinder with the generated pressure forcing the car upwards.
  • Piston/Bottle Jacks – Piston jacks which are otherwise known as bottle jacks simply because, well, they look like bottles, are a good option when it comes to elevating large weights. Due to their standing height however, they’re not going to be suited to lifting vehicles that are lower to the ground such as sports cars.

How to Select the Best Floor Jack for the Money?

No floor jacks are the same and will be able to handle different weights, lift these weights to different heights, and will be able to fit under differing heights of cars. They’ll also be made of different materials, use different pumping mechanisms, and will be available at a variety of prices. All of the above will have to be considered before you make your choice on which floor jack to purchase.

These are just some of the more common things that you’ll have to consider:

  • Weight/Mobility – Even the lightest of floor jacks can weigh a fair amount but some do weigh a lot less than others, so if portability or mobility is something that you’ll need, you’re going to have to look at the lighter models among our list. A heavy-duty floor jack is not going to be ideal for the trunk of your car while a lighter jack should not really be used regularly in a workshop environment.
  • Lifting Range – The lifting range of a jack is also a very important consideration before buying. You’ll have to make sure that the jack is low enough to be able to get under the vehicle that you want to lift and that it’ll be able to lift that vehicle high enough for you to be able to get underneath it.
  • Capacity – This is how much weight that the jack can safely lift and support. Generally, 1.5 to 2-ton floor jacks will be able to support most small cars but if you wanted to be able to lift larger cars, vans, and even trucks, you’re going to need a 3-ton jack at the very least. Make sure you know the weight of the vehicles you want to lift before choosing the weight capacity that you need for your floor jack. 
  • Construction – Most floor jacks will be constructed of steel, aluminum or a combination of the two. These are the only two materials that are considered strong enough to hold the sort of weights that you’ll need to lift with steel being the strongest and aluminum being the lightest. Therefore, if you wanted a jack that is easer to move, you’ll probably want the latter but if you’d prefer a bit more durability, the former should be your first choice.
  • Price – While the cost of the jack that you’re buying should not be the biggest priority, it will of course be important for many of you. Some jacks can cost a small fortune but it’s hard to argue against them being worth it but there’s also some great budget floor jacks that will more than do the job that you need.

How to Operate a Floor Jack Safely

Operating a floor jack is pretty simple once you know how to do it – in fact, even the birdiest of bird brains among you will have no trouble pumping away at your favorite model. That triggered your dirty minds, right?

However, it’s important that you also know how to operate your floor jack in as safe a manner as possible. The last thing you’ll want to do is injure or kill yourself, or worse yet, damage your car.

These are the processes that you should be following if you want to safely operate a floor jack:

  • Find the Most Even Surface Possible – It’s hugely important that you move your car to a surface that is even as possible. You do not want to risk the car pushing over the jack or jack stands and falling off of them – especially if you’re working on the car at the time.
  • Chock the Wheels – You should always chock the wheels of the car, especially on the opposite end from where you’re lifting it. This is to prevent any rollback from occurring as the vehicle is lifted. This should be done even if you’re certain that the surface you’re lifting on is perfectly even.
  • Always Use Jack Stands – Never rely on the car jack alone to support the vehicle that you’re working on – if that jack was to fail, you’re in trouble. Jack stands should be placed under the car in the places that your cars manual states. These will help the jack to support the weight of the car while you perform the necessary work.
  • Raise and Lower Car Carefully – Never rush whenever you’re lifting or lowering the car in order to prevent damage to the car, the jack, and of course, yourself. When pumping you should also keep an eye on the car to make sure that it’s lifting safely and looks stable. When lowering, doing it gently will enable the car to make contact with the ground in a stable manner.

Cover Your Back With A Quality Car Jack

That is some list we’re sure you’ll agree and we’re confident that what we’ve listed above will be among the very best hydraulic jacks that money can buy. Don’t be thinking back to this buying guide when you’re stuck on the side of the road, wishing you’d bought one. We’ve made a point of catering for all kinds of budgets with our selection so that there is something for everyone while we’ve also tested all of the above and checked out the many online floor jack reviews to get other people’s opinions.

We’ve also made sure that we have included a good selection of weight capacities, lifting ranges, and the overall weight of the jacks so that you’ll be able to find something that suits your particular needs. Just make sure that you already know what you’re looking for in these departments as there’s nothing worse than buying a jack that is unable to support the weight of your car or indeed fit underneath it.

To put things as politely as possible, if you’re unable to find your best floor jack out of that lot above – we give up!

Best 15 Portable Camping Showers

BEST PORTABLE CAMPING SHOWERS

1Ivation Portable Outdoor Battery-Operated Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Remember when we mentioned using a bucket of water as a camping shower? Well with this Ivation battery-operated handheld shower you can transform a bucket or even a sink into an effective shower. This portable and handy device comes with a simple showerhead, a pump and a lithium-ion 2200mAh rechargeable battery with a plug that can connect to a USB port or wall socket.

So, is it really that simple? Yes, you just place the pump into any body of water, like a sink or bucket or some other kind of container. Then you’re ready to have that refreshing wash. The amount of shower time you have depends on how much water you use. For example, 2.5-gallons will give you 7 to 8-minutes, while 5-gallons will give you a rather luxurious 10-minutes.

It really is that simple. What’s more impressive about this seemingly insignificant and minimalist accessory is what it comes with. You get, in addition to the showerhead, a flexible hose of 5.9-feet in length along with a S-shaped hanging hook and suction cup holder. This means that with the pump in water you can hang the showerhead on just about anything, whether it’s a car window or even a tree, for hands-free showering.

Pros

  • checkPractical design
  • checkEffective
  • checkLightweight

Cons

  • cross-altLack of an off switch

Specs

  • Capacity N/A
  • Material N/A
  • Dimensions 3.2 x 2.4 x 10-inches
  • Weight 1.9lbs
2Advanced Elements 5-Gallons Solar Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next, we have a great option for anyone looking for a green solution to showering outside. The Advanced Elements portable shower is powered by solar power. This is possible because of its 4-ply vinyl construction that consists of the water reservoir, an insulator panel, reflector panel and solar panel. It’s the perfect way to enjoy a nice hot spray of water when you need to get clean at camp or wherever you may be.

In addition to the main bag, you also get a showerhead that has an on and off switch. Filling the bag is easy thanks to the XL valve and twist-off cap. You then just need to leave for a short time with the clear side up for the solar panel to heat the bag of water up.

In addition to the bag and showerhead, there’s also Velcro strapping for attaching wash cloths, a temperature gauge for the water, as well as a shampoo and soap side pocket. For such a small and compact device, and a weight of just 1.4-ounces, this Ivation portable shower sure packs a decent punch in the water spray department. It helps that it has an incredibly affordable price too!

Pros

  • checkSolar paneling
  • checkRobust construction
  • checkPractical design

Cons

  • cross-altCould do with a longer hose

Specs

  • Capacity 5-gallons
  • Material 4-ply Vinyl
  • Dimensions 20 x 6 x 2-inches
  • Weight 1.32lbs
3Coleman 5-Gallon Solar Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Coleman have utilized a similar design and layout to their 5-gallon solar shower as Advanced Elements. The bonus with this is that it’s a fraction of the above device’s price. You still get the benefit of a full 5-gallon container and a similar solar paneling system that warms the water up in no time at all. There’s also a reliably tough handle for easy carrying, but it can also be used to hang the bag just about anywhere.

So, really if you’re choice was between this and the above one, you’d want to consider the price and whether you’re more of a Coleman or Advanced Elements fan. We love Coleman products here at Men’s Gear and have featured them many times before in various buying guides.

5-gallons is also more than enough for not just you to have a shower, but whoever you’re travelling or camping out with. If we had to change anything, it would be to include a larger showerhead, but that’s us just being picky.

Pros

  • checkVery competitively priced
  • checkEasy to setup and use
  • checkSolar powered

Cons

  • cross-altThe handle could be tougher

Specs

  • Capacity 5-gallons
  • Material Vinyl
  • Dimensions 8.7 x 6.5 x 2.2-inches
  • Weight 8.8-ounces
4Risepro 5-Gallon Solar Shower Bag with Switchable Showerhead

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Don’t be surprised that the next portable shower in our guide, this great option from Risepro, has a similar design to the two directly above it. Most portable showers follow this kind of design and construction, because it has proved to be effective in the past. The bag itself is constructed from highly durable and environmentally-friendly PVC and the solar technology used means that it takes just a few hours to heat the water up to 45-degrees Celsius.

In addition to the shower bag itself, you also get a hose and switchable showerhead for a more authentic experience that’ll remind you of being back home. With the hanging strap, you can hook the bag just about anywhere to free up your hands and to really get the benefit from using the shower.

Like many other models, its incredibly easy to use and can be turned on or off, as well as from low to high pressure, at the touch of a couple of switches. Many other models don’t have quite as large a capacity and are excellent for when you want to keep your luggage light. However, if you favor a powerful shower experience that more than one of you can benefit from every full bag, this is a great option.

Pros

  • checkEnvironmentally-friendly PVC construction
  • checkChoice of low or high pressure
  • checkShowerhead and flexible hose included

Cons

  • cross-altCap for filling point could leak

Specs

  • Capacity 5-gallons
  • Material PVC
  • Dimensions N/A
  • Weight 8-ounces
5RinseKit PLUS Portable Outdoor Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The RinseKit PLUS is a little different from the portable outdoor showers we’ve featured so far. How so? Well, it offers the same kind of pressure you’d expect from a garden hose. Without the need for batteries or pumping. It was originally designed to give surfers an easy and convenient way to rinse off their wetsuits and surfboards before putting everything into the car and heading home. As the brainchild of the company’s founder Chris Crawford, this became incredibly popular and now is used for a whole host of scenarios.

It’s also rather simple and easy to use thanks to its design and the quick connect feature. You can even use it with a sink or hose, if suitable. It takes less than a minute to fill up its 2-gallon tank and then you’re able to have a continuous high-powered shower experience for as much as 6-minutes. Tank pressure is retained for a maximum of one month.

We really like the RinseKit PLUS and we have a feeling you will too. With it, you get everything you need to turn this bucket into a shower, with a 6-inch hose, a hose nozzle with a nice spray of water, hose bib adaptor, quick connect, hot water sink adaptor, on/off valve. There’s even some storage space within the top section of the RinseKit PLUS, for you to keep personal belongings in, like watches etc., while you wash.

Pros

  • checkDoesn’t need pump or batteries
  • checkProvides 6-minutes of showering
  • checkTakes less than one-minute to fill

Cons

  • cross-altPressure doesn’t always perform as well as it should

Specs

  • Capacity 2-gallons
  • Material N/A
  • Dimensions 17 x 13 x 15-inches
  • Weight N/A
6OnTrackGear Outdoor Portable Electric Shower Kit

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The next ingenious device we have is this portable electric shower from OnTrackGear. With a simple and elegantly compact design, we think it’s rather cool. Although it only holds around 1.2-gallons of water, it is still enough for a quick clean and thanks to the spray gun-trigger head, you have full control over the pressure of the water. You just need to switch it on and then use the handy pump to build the pressure up, then you’re ready to go.

Powered by a rechargeable battery, it offers enough for 30 showers on a single charge. The thing we really love about this model is just how lightweight and small it is. This means it’ll fit in your campervan, RV or even car, without taking up too much space at all.

OnTrackGear have ensured that this has wide appeal thanks to their simple approach to the problem of washing on the go.

Pros

  • checkUp to 30 showers on single charge
  • checkEasy to use
  • checkSpray gun nozzle with trigger

Cons

  • cross-altCould be bigger

Specs

  • Capacity 1.2-gallon
  • Material N/A
  • Dimensions N/A
  • Weight N/A
7Green Elephant 2-in-1 Solar Shower and Dry Bag

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We all like to see our money go as far as we can, don’t we? With this 2-in-1 dry bag and solar shower from Green Elephant, that’s exactly what you get. A portable shower that provides you with 5-gallons of water, warmed by the sun thanks to the solar paneling and a drybag when you need to keep clothing and other items dry in wet conditions.

It’s been constructed from durable TPU, so will last a long time even with lots of use. 5-gallon is, as you’ve probably noticed, standard for portable showers. It gives you enough for two adult showers and as many as three for younger ones.

Although simple, Green Elephant have done a sterling job of kitting it out with enough great features. Starting from the base up, it has a wide foundation that means you can stand it anywhere and it’ll stay upright. The PTU used throughout its design means its leakproof while being eco-friendly and free from toxics. The hose is very flexible and free of BPA, as it’s made from silicone. It’s also incredibly flexible and won’t kink easily. Everything in the design and construction of this portable shower has been done to provide a user-friendly experience that won’t disappoint.

Pros

  • checkDoubles as shower and dry bag
  • checkSolar powered heating
  • checkEco-friendly and toxic-free materials

Cons

  • cross-altSlight issues with leaking

Specs

  • Capacity 5-gallon
  • Material TPU
  • Dimensions N/A
  • Weight N/A
8Zodi Outback Gear Extreme SC Hot Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another alternative to many of the other options we’ve featured is this great outdoor shower from Zodi. The Extreme differs because it’s durable stainless-steel water tank that also comes with a burner to heat up the water. Capable of producing 10,000-BTUs, the stove burner can warm the 3-gallons of water to 100-degrees Fahrenheit in just five to ten minutes.

There’s a manual hand pump to the top of the tank that makes it relatively easy to pressurize the shower. Then when you come to use it you have a generous six-foot shower hose with shower head. We find this model particularly appealing. Not just because of its sturdy design, but because of its versatility.

You see, because it comes with a separate burner, you don’t necessarily have to bring another burner for food. The burner can be used as a stove, so rather than just being a heated portable shower, it’s also a cooking appliance too. Bazinga!

Pros

  • checkBurner can be used as a stove
  • checkStainless-steel construction
  • check6-foot hose and showerhead

Cons

  • cross-altOften comes damaged in transit

Specs

  • Capacity 3-gallons
  • Material Stainless Steel
  • Dimensions 27 x 11 x 10-inches
  • Weight 11.8lbs
9ELECTRIFIRE Solar Shower Bag

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The ELECTRIFIRE portable solar shower bag follows a similar design to others we’ve featured already, so you know what to expect. It has a 5-gallon capacity water tank which provides enough for at least two adult showers and a possible three child showers. With non-toxic PVC you have the confidence that it will endure regular use in a variety of different environments, without causing damage to the planet.

As with others, there’s a reinforced sturdy handle that makes it comfortable and easy to carry, even when full. The solar panel helps to warm the water up to at least 94-degree Fahrenheit over a short period of three-hours, meaning that you can enjoy a comforting and refreshing hot shower, no matter where you are. And isn’t that what you’re looking for from a portable shower?

In addition to the standards, it benefits from a shower head that includes a switch to turn it on and off, convenient Velcro straps to keep the hose and all components compact and wrapped securely to the bag. The extra-large filling valve makes it easy to fill and there’s even a small pack bag that you can use to keep your soap and any other toiletries you need while showering, close to hand.

Pros

  • checkExtra-large filling valve
  • checkSturdy handle
  • checkNon-toxic PVC construction

Cons

  • cross-altHose could be longer

Specs

  • Capacity 5-gallons
  • Material PVC
  • Dimensions 18.9 x 19.5-inches
  • Weight 1.1lbs
10DEDC Portable Outdoor Handheld Camping Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Have you ever wished you could just take your own shower on the road with you when you’re camping or RVing? Although it’s not actually the same shower as the one in your home, the DEDC outdoor portable shower resembles a standard shower. With this product though, you are not lumbered with a bag, there’s no battery pack or any tank – you simply get the hose, the pump and everything else you need, apart from the source of water, in one streamlined design.

How does it work, you might be wondering? To heat the water, it connects conveniently into the 12-volt adaptor in your car (you know, the one you use for your satnav or smartphone). The shower has a 2-metre hose and a proper shower head, that is easy to adjust, so you can get the kind of spray and water pressure you prefer easily. With an electric pump that you just slip into the water source of your choice and you are good to go.

We like the real portability of this great shower and although there’s more powerful and sophisticated products on the market, with its low-ticket price, it’s rather awesome. It also comes with an s-hook that means you can use it like an actual shower for hands-free washing.

Pros

  • checkConvenient and lightweight
  • checkAdjustable shower head
  • checkS-hook for versatile use

Cons

  • cross-altPressure could be higher
11Nemo Helio LX Portable Pressure Shower with Foot Pump

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

It may resemble a punchbag, but the Nemo Helio LX Portable Pressure shower is a great addition to your camping supplies. The punchbag resemblance may be very apt because with a tank that holds approximately 17-gallonsand the solar power design it provides you with around seven to ten minutes of pressurized sprayed water.

The addition of a foot pump rather than the manual hand pump you often get makes this an incredibly effortless and easy shower to use. Did we mention that the actual hose measures at 10-feet in length? More than enough to hold up or clip somewhere high so that the whole experience is as easy as using that shower in your bathroom at home.

This is an updated model of the previous Helio and in comparison, you get a larger capacity bag and around two to three minutes more shower time. If you’re worried about storage, don’t be. This packs right down to 6 x 10.24-inches when not in use, meaning it won’t take up too much space at all

Pros

  • checkPacks down incredibly small
  • checkExtra-large capacity
  • check10-feet hose

Cons

  • cross-altThe screw-on cap can be hard to get off after use

Specs

  • Capacity 17-gallons
  • Material Synthetics
  • Dimensions 9.5 x 9.5 x 21.5-inches
  • Weight 2.05lbs

12OnTrackGear Outdoor Portable Shower Kit

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another great portable shower from OnTrackGear is the next item in our guide. This is not quite as fancy looking as the other, but still benefits from the basic, but adequate capacity of 1.2-gallons and has a five-foot hose. The difference is that it has a more compact design than the other model we highlighted.

Similarly, to many it has an easy to use pumping mechanism that helps to build up the pressure to give you a nice spray of water when you need it most. What’s more is the fact that the shower head has been designed to get the maximum pressure while using water economically, so the 1.2-gallons lasts a lot longer than it might with a different portable shower. Now, if you’re the sort to get over-excited when you’re pumping things up, that’s not an issue as the OnTrackGear has built a spring-loaded relief valve into this shower to stop the tank from being over pressurized.

Water sprays from the showerhead and there’s a short, but reasonably-sized hose for close use. While it may be one of the least sophisticated in our guide, we think for an affordable outdoor shower, you couldn’t go wrong with this device.

Pros

  • checkAffordably priced
  • checkSpring-loaded relief valve
  • checkEasy to fill

Cons

  • cross-altCould be a little bigger

Specs

  • Capacity 1.2-gallons
  • Material N/A
  • Dimensions N/A
  • Weight 2.4lbs
13Iron Hammer Portable Electric Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Want to combine the best of both worlds? The best of Tony Stark and the future king of Asgard? Now you can with the Iron Hammer. Okay, so it doesn’t look at all like Mjolnir, it will keep you fresh and clean when you’re on the road or in the middle of nowhere. It’s powered by a 4800mAh lithium-ion rechargeable battery. This gives you enough power for up to an hour.  It doesn’t heat the water but can use water between 5 and 50-degrees Celsius. There’s two power speed options – low and high. With the low speed option, it provides 3-litres of water a minute, while at high speed it produces 4-litres per minute.

It may not seem like a lot, but that’s generally the idea. If space is something of a premium in your camper, RV or car it’s perfect. Particularly if want something to just keep yourself a little cleaner when you’re out there exploring, this is ideal.

At Men’s Gear, we really love the portability and size of this shower. As well as the fact that it has been awarded an IPX7 waterproofing certificate. With a 70.86-inches hose and a shower head with the option to switch it on and off and a mesh storage bag.

Pros

  • checkRechargeable battery with 60-minutes run time
  • checkIPX7 waterproof rating
  • checkCompact and lightweight

Cons

  • cross-altPressure, unsurprisingly, is not very high

Specs

  • Capacity N/A
  • Material N/A
  • Dimensions 82.7 x 2.6 x 2.6-inches
  • Weight 1.27lbs
14KingCamp Solar 5-Gallon Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

KingCamp is a manufacturer that has been officially operated on a global scale since 2004. Therefore, they have a good standing and fine reputation for designing and creating high-quality items to help make outdoor activities more enjoyable and comfortable. Products like this solar shower. For a ridiculously low price you get a very durable polyester construction that includes a tough and reliable handle that makes transport, carrying and hanging this shower bag easy.

Filling it up is simple thanks to the large-sized valve with a twist-off cap. There’s a flexible hose and you can turn it on and off to really enjoy great showers like those you have back home. In addition to the handle, there’s also a hook and hanging rope measuring around 2-meters in length. To warm up the water you need to lay the bag out in direct sunlight for a few hours and then you will have warm water.

To help you understand what the temperature is, there’s a thermometer. So, you never have to worry about scolding yourself, unless you those kinda showers that have a temperature like Mount Doom’s volcanic core in Mordor. The shower can be turned on easily by twisting the shower head one way or the other.

Pros

  • checkHandy hanging hook and cord
  • checkNon-toxic polyester construction
  • checkInexpensive

Cons

  • cross-altHose can kink easily

Specs

  • Capacity 5-gallon
  • Material Polyester
  • Dimensions 12.5 x 6.1 x 12.2-inches
  • Weight 12.2-ounces
15Big Kahuna Portable Shower

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

To round off or guide to the best portable showers, we’re leaving you with a real doozy! The Big Kahuna portable shower may just be one of the most appropriately named products we’ve ever had the pleasure of reviewing. Big Kahuna by name and by nature too. Especially when you consider there’s three different models to choose from – 4.7-gallon, 8-gallon and 13-gallon.

There’s so much to love about this awesome portable shower, apart from that price, but we’ll get to that later. Let’s just consider the fact that you get a 12-volt submersible pump, by far the most portable in our guide that has a completely self-contained construction. It’s also incredibly easy to use. It’s got an 8-inch coiled hose that connects to the shower head.

The shower head is something special because you have full control over the pressure, meaning you can make your shower as powerful or soft as you like. The water is warmed by solar energy and therefore, the lid has a panel that absorbs UV heat. So, we mentioned that this does come at quite a hefty investment. But really, you need to consider what you’re getting for the price. If you’re looking for the cheapest on the market, this certainly isn’t for you. However, if you’re prepared to spend a little out for something a bit better, then say hello to your brand-new friend. His name is The Big Kahuna and he doesn’t bite but will help you get clean!

Pros

  • checkDifferent capacity options
  • checkDifferent capacity options
  • check8-inch shower hose

Cons

  • cross-altWould be nice if it had a heater

Specs

  • Capacity 4.7, 8 and 13-gallon
  • Material N/A
  • Dimensions Between 12 x 9 x 12-inches and 15 x 15 x 20-inches
  • Weight 6lbs (4.7 and 8-gallon models)

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What to look for when buying a portable camping shower?

As there’s so many different types of portable showers and shower kits out there, it’s worth knowing what you need to look out for to know if you’re getting one that will suit your needs or not.

Therefore, you need to think of the following:

Shower Weight – While most portable showers are lightweight, some will be heavier than others. If you’re trying to keep the weight of your camping supplies down as much as possible, you’ll want a model that doesn’t take up too much space or that is going to give you a severe arm workout to transport around. Be warned though, not all lightweight showers are as effective or produce the same amount of water pressure as the heavier models.

Capacity – If applicable, you also need to consider the water capacity of portable showers you are looking at, as this will determine how much shower time you have. So, if you enjoy a nice luxurious, hot and long shower, you’ll need to invest in a portable shower with a large enough capacity to accommodate this.

However, if you’re not worried about refilling it every little while and only like short, sharp burst-style showers in the morning, you’ll find that smaller capacities, such as 3 to 5-gallon showers are ideal. It’s important to note also that the larger capacity showers obviously are obviously heavier.

Heated or unheated? – You’ll notice from our list that some of the portable showers we’ve featured heat up the water you store in them, whereas others don’t. One is not better than the other, not anyway. As it’s more down to a personal preference thing. If you don’t mind filling a shower tank with cold water and then leaving it for a few hours in the sun, then a solar-powered portable shower will suit your needs.

If you’d prefer to use pre-heated water, either from your RV or a stopping point somewhere on your travels, then choose one that doesn’t warm the water. You’ll have to be careful not to fill it with water that has a temperature that exceeds the allowed level, but you’ll be able to enjoy showers quicker.

What are the types of portable shower kits available?

You’ll probably have noticed that there’s a few different options when it comes to the types of showers available.

These include:

Solar Portable Showers – the kind that warms the water stored in the shower tank using the sun’s rays. Very economical and environmentally-friendly.

Non-solar Portable Showers – Often these will include just a simple tank and hose with a showerhead or spray gun. You would need to put warm water into these as they do not heat the water up for you.

Pressurized Camping Showers – Another option you’ll come across is portable showers that are already pressurized and ready to use. These do not require a pump, whether its manual or electric.

Hand or electric pump – Unlike the above, there’s also portable showers that require a bit of work to pressurize them. This is normally achieved either by an electrically-powered pump or with the use of a foot or hand pump. Again, we don’t really see either one as being better than the other, it’s more just down to personal taste and preference. However, as the price could vary depending on the type of model you choose, it’s worth giving some thought to it.

Benefits of having a portable shower

Now we really come down to the nitty-gritty of it. If you’re still on the fence about owning a portable shower, it may help you to decide if you understand why so many people bother to invest in them,

Convenience – it’s obviously very convenient when you’re out in the middle of nowhere on a camping trip, to just go over to your car or take from your bag a portable shower. Without one, you may have to consider the nearest lake, and that might mean a very cold shower. Failing that you’d have to find a service station or use the showers available at the campsite (normally at a premium).

Cost – That leads us nicely onto the next major benefit – cost. Using a portable shower when you go camping can reduce the cost of your trip considerably. Campsites often provide showers at a premium and although this mighty not amount to much, it will if your trip is for an extended period. The other option you have is to find another establishment and again, you’d be expected to pay for the use of their showers. Having a portable shower costs, you nothing, well nothing apart from any running costs (that are normally low).

Cleaner and fresher camping experience – Our guide started by highlighting the fact that many people have a problem with the lack of cleanliness involved in camping. With a portable camping shower, even if you can’t achieve the same level of cleanliness you’d have at home, you can still feel fresher and cleaner than you would out in the wilderness without one.

Wash the Dirt Away, Wherever You Are!

Well that’s our pick of the finest portable showers available t the moment. If you’re looking to get out in mother nature and don’t want to look like Grizzly Adams, then you need one of the great gizmos featured above. We know we’ve given you quite a lot to think of, but trust us, you should have seen the list before we whittled it right down to the 15 bad-boys you’ve just looked through.

Given that not everyone has the same budget or likes to spend as much on their camping gear as others, we’ve tried to include a variety of products at different prices. As we consider most above to be the best of the best, we’d argue that you could invest in any of them and get a reasonably good experience using them. However, we know what a fickle bunch you can be, which is why you’ll find those with battery-powered pumps, solar-paneling to heat the water and other technically ingenious features, but we’ve also included a few very stripped back and basic, but nonetheless, effective solutions.

Although many of our team like to just get down and dirty camping, we know others don’t share that same passion. So, that’s why you have the list above to look through. In addition to this list, we know that you might further help deciding on the best for you, which is why you’ll find our handy and informative buyer’s guide and FAQ.

With our reviews above and the guide below, we’re sure you’ll be able to find the right portable shower to improve your camping experience dramatically and never have to worry about looking and smelling like a hobo again.

Top 9 Best 32 Inch Smart TV’s

BEST 32 INCH SMART TV’S

1

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

LG is known for producing some of the best 32-inch smart televisions around but they also make sure that those of you with a smaller budget can get a good quality set for your money too. The 32LK540BPUA is one such set that will provide you with a crisp 720p 1366 x 768p resolution, impressive brightness, and solid sound experience.

Inputs included on this LG 32-inch TV include three HDMI ports, and one each of Ethernet, USB, and RF. Of course, being a smart television, you’re going to want to connect it to the internet and while you have an Ethernet port that allows you to do so with cabling, you’ll also be able to connect it wirelessly via WiFi.

Once the television is connected to the internet, you’ll then be able to take advantage of its WebOS operating system and the many pre-installed apps. Most of these will be movie streaming sites as you might expect like Netflix, Hulu, and the like but you’ll also find other interesting apps in the store. You’ll also be able to browse the web.

Probably the best part about all this, especially for a 32-inch smart TV at this price, is that it’s compatible with Alexa. This means that you can control it by voice rather than remote which makes operating it far more efficient. Lost the remote down the back of the sofa…again? Not to worry, you don’t really need it anyway.

All in all, the LG Electronics 32LK540BPUA 32-Inch 720p Smart LED TV is a great choice to kick off our list and for anyone that’s looking for an affordable television with plenty of features.

Pros

  • checkGood value for money
  • checkCompatible with Alexa
  • checkImpressive brightness

Cons

  • cross-altSound quality could be better

Specs

  • Model year 2018
  • Resolution 720p
  • Connectivity Technology Wi-Fi, Ethernet
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 60Hz
  • Item Dimensions 28.8” x 18.8” x 6.9”
2

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another good option that’s in a similar price bracket to the above LG albeit at a slightly higher price is the Toshiba 32LF221U19 32-inch 720p Smart LED TV. Full of rich colors deep blacks, this television has a very good picture quality that’s delivered in 720p.

Three HDMI ports seem to be the norm for a 32-inch flat screen TV in this price range and that it’s what you’re getting again here. That will be more than enough for most of you as you’ll be able to connect games consoles, laptops, and mobile devices or whatever else you need. On top of that, you get a USB port that you can use to plug in a USB drive to watch any movies that you’ve downloaded other ports such as those for audio, antennae, etc.

As for the Smart features of this TV, you’ll be surprised that these are so good for a television of this price. You can control it via Alexa voice and because it’s a Fire TV, you’ll also be able to connect it online and use the many apps that it comes available with. Netflix, HBO, Hulu, Prime Video, PlayStation Vue, and Sling TV are just some of the apps and streaming sites that you can take advantage of via Fire TV on this Toshiba.

Another good thing going for this Toshiba is the fact that it has tons of positive reviews from all of the market place that it’s sold. Toshiba has always been known for providing durable and reliable televisions at an affordable price and this one seems to be the latest in a long line of them that have shown to be just that.

If this is a 32-inch television that seems to tick all of your boxes, you should definitely check it out. That said, you’d be wise to read through the rest of our reviews beforehand.

Pros

  • checkGreat sound quality
  • checkCompatible with Alexa
  • checkCompetitively priced

Cons

  • cross-altUninspiring remote

Specs

  • Model year 2018
  • Resolution 720p
  • Connectivity Technology WiFi, Ethernet
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 60Hz
  • Item Dimensions 7.13” x 29.01” x 18.6”
3

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

It’s commonly known that TCL generally tends to stick to manufacturing televisions that could be classed as budget. We, on the other hand, prefer to label them as televisions that offer superb value to the customer. The TCL 32S327 32-Inch 1080p Smart LED TV is just another excellent example of this. Cheaper than both the televisions that we’ve reviewed so far but offering full HD 1080p resolution and a 120Hz refresh rate – you’re getting far more for your money.

Sure, you could argue that both LG and Toshiba are bigger and generally better brands but when you’re looking for a cheap 32-inch TV, how could you ignore one like this that even has smart capabilities too?

As with the other two models we’ve previously reviewed, the 32S327 comes with 3 x HDMI ports, a USB port, a composite port, RF port, and the output ports you’d expect as well. One downside is that you can only connect it to the internet via WiFi and not via Ethernet. While WiFi will be good enough for most of you, wired connections are always more stable and will not be affected as much when you have the whole family connected to the internet.

As with most TCL televisions, the smart aspects of the set are powered by Roku. Here you’ll be able to connect your TV to numerous apps and platforms that will give you access to thousands of movies, televisions shows, and other online content.

Seriously, if money is tight or you just want a second TV for the home or for some dedicated gaming, you’re not going to get much better at this value.

Pros

  • checkExcellent value
  • check120Hz refresh rate
  • checkFull HD

Cons

  • cross-altNo ethernet port

Specs

  • Model year 2018
  • Resolution 1080p
  • Connectivity Technology WiFi
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 120Hz
  • Item Dimensions 28.8” x 7.1” x 19.1”
4

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you’re not bothered about smart features and simply want a good but cheap television for a smaller room or to use as a monitor for your gaming, the Sansui S32Z118 is one we suggest that you take a look at. Sansui is a Japanese brand that is known for selling budget televisions and while you’re not going to be able to directly hook it up to the internet, as a standalone television, it’s actually very good.

For your money, you’ll be getting a 720p resolution, 60Hz refresh rate, and a number of ports that you can take advantage of. Two of those are HDMI ports while you’ll also get 2 x USB ports, a coaxial port and a PC audio in port. Between those connections, you should be able to use it for just about any purpose that you wish but the latter in particular suggests that this television will easily double up as a monitor for your PC or games console.

The S32Z118 has a slim design and really does look good considering its price but it’s the picture quality that really surprises. Crisp, bright, and good viewing angles can be enjoyed with this television set which makes it an excellent choice for anyone looking for a simple television that offers good quality.

Having no smart features might be an issue for some of you but this can always be countered through buying a Chromecast or Roku and hooking those up directly. You’ll be able to get access to all of the popular apps such as Netflix, HBO, and YouTube.

Pros

  • checkCheap price
  • checkGood selection of ports
  • checkGood picture and sound

Cons

  • cross-altNot a smart TV

Specs

  • Model year 2018
  • Resolution 720p
  • Connectivity Technology HDMI
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 60Hz
  • Item Dimensions 28.7” x 16.9” x 3”
5

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

A list of the best 32-inch TV’s would not be complete without at least one Samsung and the one to make our list is the UN32J4001 720p TV. This might be an older model than most on here with it being released back in 2017 but it still easily holds up and more against any newer models.

Offering a clear and vibrant 720p resolution of 1366 x 768 and the durability and build quality that is a given from any Samsung product, you’re getting a very solid 32-inch television at a very handsome price. Admittedly, it does not have the smart features that some on this list do but at the end of the day, it’s a Samsung and there are comp sticks, Chromecasts, and all other kinds of devices out there that can bring the benefits of the internet to your television.

In terms of connectivity, you’ll enjoy two HDMI ports, a USB port, and a composite port. This is certainly not tons of options but it will be more than enough to provide you with what you need as a secondary television or in the role as a monitor.

Where it really does stand out though as you might expect, is in the quality that it provides you in terms of the picture on the screen. The backlit LED is one of the best on our list and in terms of clarity, colors, and viewing angles, you’re not going to be disappointed with what you see. That said, if you’re more interested in smart features and require more in terms of connectivity, there might be others on this list that will interest you more.

Samsung has always been a name that is renowned with quality, so you’d be mad to at least not consider this 32-inch television.

Pros

  • checkImpressive color quality
  • checkUltra-thin profile
  • checkGood price for a Samsung

Cons

  • cross-altNot Smart

Specs

  • Model year 2017
  • Resolution 720p
  • Connectivity Technology HDMI, USB
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 60Hz
  • Item Dimensions 28.9” x 6.4” x 18.2”
6

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

It would certainly be wrong to not include the world’s most well-known brand and the Sony KDL32W600D 32-Inch Smart TV w/Soundbar is certainly deserving of a spot. There are many reasons as to why as well, especially the fact that you’re getting the excellent Sony HT-S100F 2.0 Channel Soundbar with Integrated Tweeter as part of the bundle.

What you can expect from this Sony model is a 1080p display that has a refresh rate of 60Hz which will provide you with the superior picture clarity and crispness that is expected from Sony. This makes it ideal for both watching movies or gaming and with three HDMI ports and two USB ports, you’re not going to have any trouble connecting your chosen devices.

Features such as Sony Motionflow XR 240 technology which reduces blurring by digitally enhancing images that move quickly and the noise reduction benefits of X-Reality Pro technology is when you really start to know that you own a Sony. Those combined will ensure that you’re unlikely to get a better picture in this price range.

Throw in the ability to connect to WiFi or Ethernet to enjoy some of the many apps on this TV and you’re pretty much set. Of course, this is not going to be up there with their very best models but for a reasonably priced Sony television that comes complete with a Soundbar, you’re getting some very good value for money.

Pros

  • checkAmazing picture & sound quality
  • checkEasy to set up and use
  • checkEspecially good for gaming

Cons

  • cross-altViewing angles could be better

Specs

  • Model year 2016
  • Resolution 1080p
  • Connectivity Technology WiFi, Ethernet
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 60Hz
  • Item Dimensions 32.5” x 6.13” x 20.56”
7

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Vizio is another brand of televisions that have been making their mark in recent years and their D32X-D1 32-Inch 1080p Smart TV is one that we highly recommend. Aimed at the budget conscious among you, this smartly designed television will give you a full HD resolution that will impress you with its clarity, brightness, and color range.

There are two HDMI ports that you can take advantage of and while this might not seem enough for some of you, we’re pretty sure that this will be fine for those of you that are planning to use this as a second TV in a bedroom, guest room, or another room in the house. It would even work well as a computer or console monitor if you so wish.

Another plus is the fact that there are smart features to enjoy on the Vizio too. With Vizio Internet Apps Plus, you’ll be able to make use of apps such as Netflix, Amazon Instant, Hulu Plus, YouTube and many more. Having used and tested this TV ourselves, we would say that they could do with adding more apps as it does lack the numbers of some others – that said, most of the big names are there.

Summing up, this is another good option to consider if you wanted a cheap 32-inch smart television. When you consider its price, the HD resolution, the fact that it’s smart and has plenty of connectivity options, you’re not going to be disappointed.

Pros

  • check1080p Resolution
  • checkCompetitively priced
  • checkIdeal for use as a monitor

Cons

  • cross-altCould do with more apps

Specs

  • Model year 2016
  • Resolution 1080p
  • Connectivity Technology WiFi, Ethernet
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 60Hz
  • Item Dimensions 28.6” x 7.87” x 19.03”
8

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another cheap 32-inch smart TV for those of you that like to keep your money in your wallets is the Sceptre X328BV-SR. Now, this is easily the least well-known brand on our entire list but it’s also the cheapest by quite some way. For both those reasons, you should not expect too much in terms of the bells and whistles that can be found on others.

However, in terms of the basics, they’ve been done very well and we think you’ll be as surprised as we were with the quality that you’re getting for your money. For a start, it’s 720p which means that it’ll be able to handle all of your high definition content and secondly, it has a good number of ports that’ll give you plenty of options when considering what to use with it.

There are three HDMI ports in total so you can connect a games console, Chromecast, and a laptop all at the same time if you so wish. There’s also a USB port that will allow you to play music, movies or look at photographs that you might have stored elsewhere. Throw in a VGA port, a component port, and some composite inputs and you’d have to be very happy with the connectivity that this television supports.

What you should not expect is any smart features as this is a standalone television set. That said there are dongles and Roku computer sticks that you can use to essentially turn the X328BV-SR into a smart TV.

Pros

  • checkVery cheap
  • check3 x HDMI
  • checkSurprisingly good picture

Cons

  • cross-altNo smart features

Specs

  • Model year 2017
  • Resolution 720p
  • Connectivity Technology HDMI, USB
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 60Hz
  • Item Dimensions 28.78” x 7.95” x 18.39”
9

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We started our list with an LG smart television so it’s quite fitting that we’re going to be ending it with one as well. This one is a tiny bit more expensive than the first but it’s still very reasonably priced considering what you’re getting for your money. The LG Electronics 32LK610BPUA is actually pretty much identical to the 32LK540BPUA in terms of specs apart from an additional few ports implemented in this one.

You’re getting 3 x HDMI and 2 USB compared to the 2x and 1x respectively which makes it a better option if there are more devices that you wish to connect to it. Almost everything else is the same from the 720p resolution, to the vibrant, colorful, and clear picture, and the fact that it uses the popular webOS interface to provide its smart features.

With the latter, you’ll be able to enjoy numerous apps from media sharing sites such as Netflix, YouTube, Hulu, and Sling while you’ll also be able to browse the internet when the need arises. Being compatible with Alexa is another great thing going for a smart TV at this price. Who needs a remote control when you can speak to your television and control it?

In terms of style, we find the white color to be refreshing for a television set and while there are certainly slimmer sets around, you’ll be more than happy with how thin the 32LK610BPUA is. At the end of the day, this will be a solid choice whether you’re looking for a cheap main smart TV or something for your bedroom.

Pros

  • checkAttractive design
  • checkWiFi & Ethernet
  • checkMany ports

Cons

  • cross-altSound quality could be better

Specs

  • Model year 2018
  • Resolution 720p
  • Connectivity Technology WiFi, HDMI, Ethernet
  • Display Type LED
  • Refresh rate 60Hz
  • Item Dimensions 7.1” x 29.2” x 18.6”

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What to Look for When Buying a 32” Smart TV?

Unless you’re a real tech-head, knowing what to look for when buying any kind of technology can be a confusing matter. Specs matter more than looks – something we’re sure you’ve tried to convince the other half whenever it comes to buying this sort of stuff. There’s little point of a television looking great if it’s outperformed by everything else in its price range.

Many of you will know what you need to look for when buying a new television but for those of you that don’t, just remember the following considerations and you’ll be fine.

Well as men we’re always told that size isn’t everything…yeah right! However, that saying might actually have some truth in it when it comes to televisions. Unless you’re trying to set up a giant cinema in your home, screen size is not really going to come into it. 32-inches is more than enough for most uses, even as the main television in your home and this is the size that our guide is concentrating on.

Did you know that televisions are not even measured from one side to the other to get their measurements? In fact, the 32-inches that these televisions are classed as will be taken from one corner of the screen to the opposite corner. This is why when you check out our recommendations below, you’ll notice that many of TV’s do not even measure 32” in length. So how big is a 32-inch TV? Well, the actual length of a 32” TV is actually around 29-inches from one side to the other.

  • Panel Type

While the size of the TV is important, for some of you, the panel type will be just as important. One of the biggest reasons for a big price difference between any two televisions will be that one will be using a more superior image panel.

You’ll find that most 32-inch televisions use an LCD panel that has an LED backlight behind it. The technology in the latter is what can greatly affect the picture quality on a television set. The better the backlight technology, the better the picture and thus the larger the price.

  • Resolution

The resolution of your television is going to be the most important consideration when it comes to picture quality. At the minimum, most TV’s these days will be able to provide you with 720p High Definition resolution of 1280 x 720. However, with resolutions now readily available that are Ultra 4K and some that are now even 8k, you’re going to want a bit more than just basic HD compatible.

Ideally, you should be looking for a full HD television that has a 1080p resolution of 1920 x 1080 as a minimum. This is more than enough for good quality pictures for both movies and gaming and it will not be nearly as expensive as some of the more modern TV’s are that have these insane new resolutions.

  • Refresh Rate

The refresh of your television can also have a big impact on picture quality. 60Hz is the standard these days and this is going to be more than good enough for most uses – even gaming consoles top out at 60Hz, so you’re not going to need any more for your PS4 or Xbox One.

That said, if you like gaming on your PC and will be connecting this television, or will be primarily using it for HD movies, 120hz is going to be what you’ll want.

  • Picture Quality

Picture quality is extremely important and even if two televisions have the same specs in terms of resolution, panel types, and everything else, they will still look different on the screen to the naked eye. We suggest that you ignore everybody else when it comes to picture quality and judge with your own eyes. Go for the television that you perceive to have a better picture and you cannot go wrong.

If picture quality really is a bigger priority than anything else for you, we recommend sticking with televisions from the biggest names such as Sony, Samsung, and LG as this is where you’ll find the best. They will have their own technologies implemented that ensure crisper, brighter, and better darks than most cheaper televisions.

  • Sound Quality

Sound quality is usually a little neglected on televisions these days but it’s easy to understand why. Speakers that come built-in to TV’s have never been of good quality since year dot but in modern times especially, speakers are nothing more than an afterthought. Why? Because most people hook their televisions up to speakers, soundbars, and home theater systems anyway – so the speakers inside the television are actually going to be redundant for most people.

If you’re planning on using the televisions own speakers, of course, you’ll want to find one that has spent a little time focusing on quality in this area.

  • Connectivity

You’d be surprised at just how many TVs actually lack in this area. Times have moved on from where we only needed to connect our video source, plug in some speakers and perhaps add a DVD player. These days in the world of home theater setups, smart televisions, movie streaming, internet, and online gaming, our televisions really need plenty of connectivity options to keep us satisfied.

HDMI ports, in particular, are going to be important as these can be used up very quickly. It only takes a sound bar, Roku, PS4, and a Chromecast before you’ve already used four and there are plenty of other devices that use this connection as well.

Other connections available include VGA, DVI, DisplayPort, and USB among many others. If your TV is a smart television you’re also going to want an Ethernet, WiFi, or both connections so that you can connect to the interweb.

Get an understanding of what ports you’ll need for your particular setup before choosing a TV that will allow you to easily accommodate them.

You’ll obviously want something that in your own opinion, looks smart and will go with all of your other devices. Most televisions these days are very slim in design – especially if you grew up like us in the days of the old-style CRT televisions. They’ll also usually be very minimalistic in terms of design so you will rarely see one with many buttons showing on the front.

It’ll all come down to personal preference really when picking a design. Once you see the one you love, you’ll know that it’ll be the right fit for your living room.

  • Ease of Setup

While TV’s, in general, are usually quite easy to set up and get going, some will still be a little confusing. Smart TV’s, in particular, may require a little bit extra effort as you ’ll have to connect it to your internet, set up any required accounts and subscriptions for any apps that you prefer.

Even standard televisions, if their user interface is not straight forward to use can throw up confusion when it comes to setting them up. Scanning channels and getting the picture how you like it is not always easy depending on the television hat you buy. Try to find one that has a reputation for being easy to set up.

  • Ease of Use

At least one you’ve set up a television, you’ll not have to do it again so it’s just a one-time pain. If your TV is difficult to use however, this is going to be something that is going to get quite annoying over time.

Most will be very straightforward as how difficult can it actually ever be to change a channel or turn up the volume. Some, especially when it comes to their smart platforms though, may not be quite as straightforward. You’ll want a TV that is easy to use in all aspects.

  • Reliability

When you’re spending your money on anything, but especially something that is going to cost a fair amount of money, you’ll want to be sure that you get your money worth out of it before it breaks down. Not all televisions are as reliable as you might think so it’s important to buy both a brand and model that has a good reputation with regards to reliability.

The bigger names are generally the brands that you’ll want to look at but you’ll probably have to pay a little more. It’s a balancing act between initial cost and how many years you’re hoping to get out of your TV.

The type of warranty coverage that you get is also an important consideration. Taking reliability, a step further is how much a brand actually believes in their products and you’ll generally find that the most reliable TV’s are those that have the longest warranty period. This shows confidence in their own product as well as thinking about their customers.

Always find out what sort of cover you’ll be getting with your purchase before weighing up whether you want to buy a television.

  • Smart Software

Even many of the cheaper televisions these days will have some kind of smart software and features. However, this does not mean that all smart televisions will be able to offer you the same platform and features. Some will severely lack in the number of pre-installed apps and what you can actually do with their smart platforms.

On the flip side, some will give you tons of apps, allow you to download further apps, surf the web, and even allow you to connect to Alexa so that you can voice control your television set. Our advice would be to go for TV’s with Roku, Android, or Amazon’s Fire TV systems installed. You’ll be able to enjoy apps from all the big names such as Netflix, YouTube, Hulu, Amazon, and Spotify.

  • Aesthetics

What a TV looks like really should be the least of your worries in all honesty. We do know that some of you will want one that looks more stylish than another but each of the above considerations hold far more priority over whether a television is thin, has its curves in the right place, or has a better stand. Most televisions look the same anyway these days – basically looking like nothing more than big oblong shaped screens.

What are the Best Brands That Manufacture 32” Smart TV’s?

There is no doubt that many of you’ll already have a few names in mind when it comes to the best brands of televisions on the market. Sony, Samsung, Toshiba, and LG, will probably be on your lips but there are some others that are starting to make a big name for themselves in recent years.

The likes of Vizio, TCL, and Hisense are just a few of these new names and while these are generally known for producing televisions that some may consider as budget, they’re actually starting to move on up to challenge their more upmarket competitors.

When you think of pure build and picture quality, Sony is almost always going to be at the top of the list. They’ve been producing high-quality television sets for close to sixty years now and you can always count on their models to be among the best in their price range.

While they pride themselves on releasing state of the art cutting edge televisions at the top of their range, in recent years they’ve also made sure that they have televisions available for all kinds of budgets.

Samsung is another big name and not just in televisions. Obviously, they’re very well known for their mobile phones too but they also manufacture everything from washing machines, kitchen appliances, and watches. Televisions are one of their specialties though and they’re easily recognizable as one of the world’s leading manufacturers.

Like Sony, Samsung likes to be a leader in the industry and you’ll always be guaranteed an excellent picture. They also put a lot of focus into the smart aspects of their modern televisions – a lot more than many other brands do.

Another reliable brand that has been manufacturing televisions for decades is that of Toshiba. Known for building durable television sets that offer up a good picture quality, features, and affordability, Toshiba is certainly a brand that should be considered by everyone. They are probably on the next rung down on the ladder in the television industry compared to Sony and Samsung but they always offer great value for money.

LG is probably not right up there with Sony and Samsung but they, like Toshiba, are certainly in the next bracket down. Known for reliability, good features, and for offering value for money, LG smart televisions are definitely worth a look. They also pride themselves on their very best OLED models which are renowned for having excellent picture quality.

Vizio is somewhat of a newcomer but they’ve already demonstrated their ability at churning out quality but cheap 32-inch TV’s. Actually, they’ve even started producing higher-end televisions that are capable of competing against some of the bigger brands on this list in recent years. In general, though, most of their range is aimed at being competitively priced as well as being a particularly good companion for gamers out there.

For the ultimate in budget-priced televisions though, TCL is right up there as one of the best. They cannot compete in terms of picture quality but this is not to say that theirs is at all bad, just not as crisp, bright, or has as good viewing angles as some of the top names.

One positive though is their partnership with Roku which means all of their televisions offer this smart platform. Roku has a great selection of streaming channels and apps that really does add to the positives of owning a TCL television.

Other Brands of Note

There are plenty of other brands of televisions worldwide as well as those we’ve listed above and while some will be cheap little-known brands, there are some other big names too such as the following:

  • Sharp
  • Panasonic
  • Insignia
  • Hisense
  • Westinghouse

Panasonic and Sharp in particular from those above are well worth checking out as these have been manufacturing televisions for many decades now.

Conclusion

32-inch TV’s are generally used for secondary purposes these days rather than being the main television in the house. There are much bigger screens that usually take up the main living area of home while the good old 32-inch is normally resigned to smaller bedrooms, guestrooms, and as computer and console monitors.

This is why there really isn’t too much need to have the most hi-tech and most expensive televisions in this size. Well, that is unless you have tons of money and simply like the best of everything no matter its purpose or what it’s going to be used for.

As you can see, there’s plenty of options out there if you wanted to buy a good quality 32-inch television but without breaking the bank. Sure, if you wanted a 4k resolution television or something that has the latest and greatest technology this might not be the list for you but for something that offers good value, quality, and features, we’re sure you’ll find what you’re looking for.

Best 15 Pocket Knife Sharpeners

BEST POCKET KNIFE SHARPENERS

1Sharpal Pocket Knife

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The first slice of our buyer guide looking for the best pocket knife sharpener will take us to the work of Sharpal. These guys have not only made an awesome product, but they are also selling it for a super affordable price.

This is much more than a pocket knife sharpener. It has a total of six different functions, making it perfect for men who like to hunt, fish and explore nature. These functions include two edges for sharpening your knives, a fire starter tool, lanyard hole, a tapered diamond rod and even an emergency whistle that has a significantly high pitch to attract attention when in danger. The knife sharpening components are made with tungsten carbide blades to make easy work of keeping your knives razor sharp. The tapered diamond rod is also a talking point. It is made with grooves to cater to fish hooks, gut hooks and serrated blades.

Pros

  • checkTwo effective sharpening slots
  • checkDiamond rod
  • checkEmergency whistle
  • checkLanyard hole
  • checkFire starting tool
  • checkAffordable model

Cons

  • cross-altDifficult to replace carbide blades

Specs

  • Weight 1.44oz
  • Slot Material tungsten carbide
  • Extra Features Yes
2Smith’s Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Hunters and knife throwers may want to consider the Smith’s pocket knife sharpener instead. Also at a cheap price, this sharpener offers many features. It has two slots to sharpen your knife. Both slots have had their angles preset so you can be guaranteed of the perfect sharpen for your knives every time. The two slots are not equal either. One slot has been equipped with carbide blades while the other is made with ceramic stone perfect for polishing.

The two options are a great addition, but it gets better. Both are reversible to double the life of the pocket knife sharpener – giving you even more value for money. The other features on this model are a tapered diamond rod to tackle serrated edges. These quality inclusions are matched by the product’s overall convenience. Not only does it have a lanyard hole, but it’s also one of the lightest and most compact pocket knife sharpeners on the current market. It’s the perfect addition to your adventuring backpack.

Pros

  • checkTwo sharpening slots
  • checkCarbide and ceramic material
  • checkReversible blades for longevity
  • checkLanyard hole
  • checkSharpens serrated and straight edges
  • checkExceptionally lightweight and compact

Cons

  • cross-altMore additional features elsewhere

Specs

  • Weight 0.32oz
  • Slot Material carbide and ceramic
  • Extra Features Yes
3Work Sharp Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The first two pocket knife sharpeners were similar in their design. The third model we’re featuring from Work Sharp is much different. So, what did this 4th generation family business from Oregon, USA, come up with? Well, the answer is options.

Along one edge is a ceramic rod that rotates to reveal a coarse finish perfect for sharpening tools, and in particular, fish hooks. On the opposite edge is a leather strop. This is ideal for keeping similar tools a cut above the rest. There is also a diamond plate and ceramic rods to help sharpen straight and serrated edges. It even has an angle guide to make sure you sharpen your knives in the right way. Altogether, this tool offers multiple types of materials to get a brand-new fell for your knives.

Pros

  • checkCeramic rotating rod
  • checkLeather strop
  • checkReplaceable blades
  • checkLanyard hole
  • checkAngle guide

Cons

  • cross-altPriced above average

Specs

  • Weight 2.56oz
  • Slot Material Multiple
  • Extra Features No
4Housolution Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next up is a pocket knife sharpener by the popular Housolution. This is also the first model that comes with color options. You can get it in a red or black color, and you can also choose to add a keychain to either color. Interestingly, the models with the keychain included are slightly cheaper. We’re not sure why either…

It also has two sharpening slots. The ceramic slot is fine while the carbide slot is slightly more coarse. Both are perfect for sharpening your straight edges exactly as required. There is also a concealed tapered diamond rod that folds out ready to be used on your knives and serrated tools. To make use even easier, the manufacturers have added a finger groove to help you hold the tool securely when in use.

The inclusion of a lanyard hole makes this pocket knife sharpener perfect for any man who likes to go on outdoor adventures as well as backpackers. Click the button below to sharpen your knowledge on the Housolution Pocket Knife Sharpener.

Pros

  • checkColor options
  • checkOptional keychain
  • checkTwo sharpening slots
  • checkLanyard hole
  • checkPull-out diamond-tapered rod
  • checkFinger groove adds control

Cons

  • cross-altNon-reversible blades

Specs

  • Weight 0.96oz
  • Slot Material carbide and ceramic
  • Extra Features No
5Accusharp Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

You might not get color options with the Accusharp Pocket Knife Sharpener, but you do get the option to buy in bulk for a friendlier price. This is something a lot of guys do because they can then keep a sharpener in a different location from their bug-out backpack to their kitchen drawer. However, not to overlook that the color of this model is a bright orange which comes in useful if you’re looking for the sharpener in low-light conditions.

This model doesn’t have all the bells and whistles as the previous ones do. By that we mean that it doesn’t have lots of extra features that can come in useful in different situations. Instead, it does what it’s meant to and sharpens knives – even serrated ones. Accusharp even claims that it can be used on machetes and hand axes effectively. Whatever you use it on, you can enjoy enhanced safety from their grip-like design.

Pros

  • checkMultipack option
  • checkOrange color for overnight convenience
  • checkTo-the-point design
  • checkUseful on hand axes too
  • checkIncludes safety handle design

Cons

  • cross-altNo extra features

Specs

  • Weight 2.08oz
  • Slot Material carbide blades
  • Extra Features No
6Lansky Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If the last one was straight to the point, then the Lansky Pocket Knife Sharpener is straight to lots of points. What are we going on about? Well, this design actually has four different sharpening slots to cater to different angles. And that isn’t even mentioning the built-in ceramic stone either. This stone is your go-to tool to complete fine polishing.

The four sharpening slots are made with effective carbide blades. Each slot works at a different angle to cater to your different knives and tools. There is a slot with a 17-, 20-, 25- and 30-degree angle. All of which are clearly labeled so you know the exact angled blade you’re using. This cool design is rounded off with a generous lanyard hole. It wouldn’t be impossible to clip other things on this hole such as your keychain or an ID badge.

Pros

  • checkMultiple sharpening slots
  • checkPolishing stone
  • checkCaters to different angles
  • checkLanyard/keychain hole
  • checkAvailable to buy in packs

Cons

  • cross-altNot as compact/lightweight as others

Specs

  • Weight 4.2oz
  • Slot Material carbide blades
  • Extra Features Yes
7Sungwoo Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another fantastic and highly in-demand pocket knife sharpener is this model by Sungwoo. This sharpener has been made to be your outdoor companion. Its smaller dimensions and foldability have made it so. Yet, it has also been made to work well for kitchen knives and indoor tools.

There are two stones on this sharpener. These are made with different grit ratings and can be used to sharpen different knives and tools. The folding design keeps these two stones protected when not in use. The folding design also maintains the transportability of the item but allows it to be much bigger than most other pocket knife sharpeners. In fact, when unfolded, this model reaches a length of just under 9 inches. It’s also another model that has been made to keep your fingers protected. This is achieved through a friction handle that keeps you in control while honing.

Pros

  • checkInnovative folding design
  • checkMaintain compactness
  • checkTwo stones for sharpening
  • checkSafety grip
  • checkMultipurpose knife sharpener
  • checkWorks on serrated blades too

Cons

  • cross-altNo bells or whistles

Specs

  • Weight 2.8oz
  • Slot Material Titanium
  • Extra Features No
8Work Sharp Pocket Knife Sharpener For Workshops

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We already saw some of the work from American-born Work Sharp. Well, this product from them brings a new dimension to the table – quite literally. Instead of getting a pocket knife sharpener that can slip into your pocket, some of our following will be looking for sharpeners to go on their workbench. Here is your answer in their bench-top model.

This model isn’t designed to accompany you up the side of a mountain. It’s a worktop knife sharpener ready to maintain your knives from home or work. For that reason, they’re slightly chunkier and heavier than the other models we’ve seen so far. They also come at a slightly bigger cost. Although you can buy in packs of five to save a few bucks.

The product has two sharpening stations to cater to different knives, tools and needs. One of the stations is a unique abrasive belt while the other is a ceramic surface. Together, they cater to flat edges and serrated knives effectively. It’s also an efficient model that makes easy work of keeping your knives a cut above the competition.

Pros

  • checkEffective and efficient sharpening
  • checkSturdy design
  • checkCan buy in bulk
  • checkTwo types of cutting stations
  • checkAngle-guided design

Cons

  • cross-altNot transportable
  • cross-alt Pricier option

Specs

  • Weight 19.2oz
  • Slot Material abrasive belt/ceramic
  • Extra Features Yes
9Work Sharp Compact Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Sticking with the Work Shop gang but showcasing their different talents is this compact pocket knife sharpener. It’s compact, light and ready to go on your next adventure with the guys. It’s the perfect gift for any outdoor-loving guy at a wallet-friendly cost.

It includes two sharpening stations. One of them is a 320-grit diamond plate with a 20-degree angle. The other is a fine ceramic station with a 25-degree angle. When using either station, your hand is placed in a central space with grooves, so you always remain in control when sharpening your pocket knives.

Some other worthy points about this design are that it comes pre-assembled, so you can get straight to sharpening your knives without waiting. Moreover, it comes with a lifetime warranty for the whole family. If this model has an issue in your ownership or when owned by a family member, you can count on Work Shop to replace it for you.

Pros

  • checkCompact for transporting
  • checkTwo sharpening stations
  • checkGrooves help you stay in control
  • checkPre-assembled
  • checkDifferent angle guides
  • checkLifetime manufacturer guarantee

Cons

  • cross-altNo additional features

Specs

  • Weight 1.6oz
  • Slot Material diamond plate
  • Extra Features No
10Smith’s 50264 Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

One of the most innovative and well-designed pocket knife sharpeners on the market is the Smith’s 50264 model. It has a slightly different shape to many of the other designs by separating the soft rubber handle from the main area of the tool. This may add a little more bulk, but it certainly enhances safety and adds control. It also has rubber feet to prevent the tool slipping when placed onto a surface.

There are three sharpening stations on this design. There are a coarse slot, a fine slot and a slot for serrated knives. Where it excels the standards set by many other pocket knife sharpeners is in one awesome feature. The sharpener includes a dial which adjusts the angle of both the coarse and fine sharpening slots. Simply turn this dial to fine-tune your sharpening between 14 and 24 degrees. It may not have any additional features, but it has a phenomenal main act.

Pros

  • checkThree different sharpening stations
  • checkDial to tailor sharpening angle
  • checkNon-slip rubber feet
  • checkSoft rubber handle
  • checkInnovative manufacturing

Cons

  • cross-altLess portable than some others

Specs

  • Weight N/A
  • Slot Material N/A
  • Extra Features No
11AccuSharp 001C Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The next pocket knife sharpener is a no-thrills design but will sharpen your knives, kitchen knives and small tools effectively. This USA-born model is perfect for sharpening newbies who have never used one of these products before. It prioritizes safety ahead of anything else. It has a generous ergonomic handle. Below the handle is a full-length rubber strap to work as a barrier between your fingers and your knife’s blades.

The product features one sharpening station with carbide blades to cater to many types of knives. Their blades are expected to last between five and 10 years too – so you know this is a quality investment. When in need of maintenance, you simply get out some soap and water or stick it in the dishwasher. Hit the below link and learn even more about this quality item.

Pros

  • checkErgonomic handle
  • checkAdditional finger safety
  • checkDishwasher friendly
  • checkLong-lasting carbide blade
  • checkReliable and trusted brand

Cons

  • cross-altOnly one sharpening station

Specs

  • Weight 1.6oz
  • Slot Material Aluminum carbide blades
  • Extra Features No
12Lansky UTR7 Pocket Knife Sharpener Pack

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve also thrown a combo pack into our featured list. Instead of just getting a pocket knife sharpener, you can get an EDC pocket knife here as well. This cool and sturdy 440C stainless-steel blade is the cherry on the top of an awesome product.

The sharpener has a ceramic rod made for serrated blades and two other sharpening stations. One of them is another ceramic slot while the other is made with carbide blades. These multiple sharpening stations mean the product doesn’t just cater to one type of pocket knife but can be a versatile addition to your adventuring kit.

Pros

  • checkComes with top-quality knife
  • checkMultiple sharpening blades
  • checkVersatile use
  • checkRespected and experienced brand
  • checkLanyard hole

Cons

  • cross-altNot everyone needs the knife

Specs

  • Weight 9.6oz (combined)
  • Slot Material N/A
  • Extra Features No
13Smith’s 50364 Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We might be calling this Smith’s creation a pocket knife sharpener, but really, it’s every man’s must-have survival tool. This piece of quality gear does more than sharpen your knives and tools. It has multiple additional features to keep you safe and prepared for the great outdoors.

So, what little extras does it include? You will find a firestarter with twice the ehm, firepower, than regular firestarters. It also has a compass to keep you in the right direction, a signal whistle in case of emergencies and an LED light to help you find your way or your other outdoor gear in low light conditions. Despite all these useful accessories, this is one of the lightest pocket knife sharpeners on our list.

These are fantastic supporting acts to the tool’s main function. There are multiple sharpening slots on this product. It has a tapered diamond rod to take care of gut hooks and to sharpen serrated blades. There is also a ceramic and carbide slot to take care of your other pocket knives and tools. You get all these sharpening options and extras for an unbelievable price. Don’t believe us? Take a look for yourself.

Pros

  • checkMultiple sharpening tools
  • checkCompass
  • checkEmergency whistle
  • checkLED light
  • checkFirestarter included

Cons

  • cross-altCompass adds bulk

Specs

  • Weight 0.32oz
  • Slot Material carbide blades
  • Extra Features Yes
14Smith’s 50185 Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve seen similar designs to the Smith’s 50185 model. This ergonomic-handle design will certainly appeal to many guys. However, while most of these designs have offered limited sharpening stations, this model manages to merge their ergonomic handle with multiple sharpening slots. Not an easy feat and certainly not something to be overlooked!

In fact, there are three different sharpening stations on this one pocket knife sharpener. Two of them are featured towards the front of the design and the handle will make using these slots convenient and exceptionally safe. Smith’s have then cleverly added a cutting station within their handle. This is perfect to be used on various knives but is especially useful for sharpening scissors. Certainly not something that every manufacturer has considered but an exceptional and convenient inclusion.

Pros

  • checkErgonomic handle
  • checkMultiple sharpening options
  • checkSharpens scissors easily
  • checkOpen handle works as a clip
  • checkSafer design

Cons

  • cross-altHeavier model

Specs

  • Weight: 5.6oz
  • Slot Material carbide blades
  • Extra Features No
15JEOutdoors Pocket Knife Sharpener

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We will finish our look at the best pocket knife sharpeners with an aluminum design that has not yet been featured. JEOutdoors are the team responsible for this creation and we’re sure they will accept responsibility of such innovation.

This is by far the sleekest and most compact design from all the products listed here. Unlike the rest, this one is exceptionally thin and offers sharpening options in a different way. On one side is a carbide slot to set the edge of your knife perfectly. On the other side is a ceramic slot with carbide blades to maintain your edge.

To ensure your safety without offering a proper handle, it has been created with a hole in the center. This hole is for your finger so you can maintain control and safety when sharpening your pocket knife. There is also a lanyard loop attached to help you keep it on your backpack. To round off an excellent pocket knife sharpener, JEOutdoors provide this item with a lifetime warranty.

Pros

  • checkInnovative sleek design
  • checkMaintains safety with finger hole
  • checkMultiple sharpening slots
  • checkLanyard attached
  • checkManufacturers lifetime warranty included

Cons

  • cross-altMinimalist design won’t be for everyone

Specs

  • Weight 2.4oz
  • Slot Material carbide and ceramic
  • Extra Features Yes

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What Can A Pocket Knife Be Used For?

Not everyone in the market for a pocket knife sharpener will already own a pocket knife. Some men may be here browsing these cool accessories straight from considering if they need a pocket knife. Well, if you like outdoor adventures then you do. But there are also many uses for a pocket knife at home or in your man cave. Here are just some of the best uses for a pocket knife:

Meal times – when in the wild and needing to refuel, you will find that a pocket knife comes in handy for many tasks. From gutting your catch of the day to just cutting up some fruit, they come in handy when preparing meals and keeping everyone fed.

Camp building – When on your campsite, a pocket knife can be used to help you build many different useful things. They can help you make a washing line for your clothes, or if you’re really in touch with nature, they can help you make your shelter for the evening. Not to forget that they can be used to cut kindling for your firepit.

Opening packages – say goodbye to frustrating attempts at getting into your deliveries. A pocket knife is a perfect tool to get into boxes. The best benefit of using a pocket knife to cut through tape is that you maintain the condition of the packaging. This lets you re-use the box in the future and keeps it intact in case you need to return your delivery.

Emergencies – we’ve all seen movie stars using a pocket knife to save the day. Whether it’s cutting someone free who has gotten stuck, cutting clothes to assess an injury or even performing minor surgery, a pocket knife can be a great help. The various emergency situations that may arise mean there are countless uses for a pocket knife in emergency scenarios.

These are just a few picks of the uses of a pocket knife. Here are some other uses:

  • Opening wine
  • Hanging up your jacket
  • Peeling potatoes
  • Opening a can
  • Skinning
  • Tightening screws

What Are The Benefits Of Owning A Pocket Knife?

Those are the uses of a pocket knife, but what are the benefits? Here are a few of the perks that you get when owning one of these must-have accessories:

Save money – buying a new piece of gear doesn’t sound like the best way to save money. However, if you are already the proud owner of a decent pocket knife, you really don’t want to be spending a lot of money on buying a replacement when the blade gets a little dull. Instead, a pocket knife sharpener is the cost-effective option. These tools come at relatively little cost and can extend the life of your knives considerably.

Convenience – many designs allow users to sharpen their knives and tools anywhere they like. The compact dimensions and lightweight design make them come in extremely useful in some of the most demanding situations. Many of these situations are when a pocket knife would be the only solution – making a pocket knife sharpener a very important tool.

Easy to use – once you understand the different ways to sharpen a knife and the angle of your knife, these tools can be used with confidence. This is why we’ve also addressed these issues here. Now you can use a pocket knife sharpener in nature – like second nature.

Multifunctional – one of the other benefits of a pocket knife sharpener are in the additional features that many of the designs come with. Many of the best models – like the ones above – have other uses that come in useful on outdoor adventures. Expect to see pocket knife sharpeners with firestarters, compasses, emergency whistles, lanyard holes and more.

What Different Types Of Sharpeners Are Available?

Just as our list of pocket knife sharpeners includes many different designs, there are also lots of different types of pocket knife sharpeners. However, not all of them are portable and suitable to be taken on your hunting trips with the guys.

One popular method is to use a sharpening stone. These stones are more commonly referred to as whetstones. They can be of different quality and made from varied materials, including ceramic and diamond. These can be single products, or the stone can be attached to a multifunctional sharpener like we saw in some of the above products. A big advantage of whetstones is that they are highly versatile. They can be used on your knives but can also sharpen tools and fishing gear.

Another popular type of pocket knife sharpener is a honing device. Nearly all of the models above included some sort of honing slot. However, there are different types of slots – as you’ve also seen in our top 15. Some slots will hone and polish your blades while others will sharpen them.

Benchtop knife sharpeners and electric sharpeners provide another option for us guys. They are usually made in the same way as honing devices but may include abrasive belts as well. These models can be some of the most efficient and effective because of their size and power. However, this same benefit prevents them from being taken on your adventures.

These are the three most popular types of knife sharpeners which give you food for thought. You will also discover that many of the more portable models combine honing slots with whetstone-like stations.

Straight Vs Serrated Blade Sharpeners

First, let’s understand the difference between straight and serrated blades. A straight blade is any knife with a straight edge. Most knives have a straight edge. However, some blades have a jagged edge. If you’re struggling to imagine this then think of a bread knife. These serrated knives have a serrated edge which have increased in popularity due to their aggressive and rugged aesthetic. Interestingly, some more modern pocket knives use both edges in a type of straight-serrated combo.

Because these blades are significantly different, they require different types of sharpeners to keep them well maintained. While most types of sharpeners can cater to straight edges, rods are the most effective way to sharpen serrated knives. You will notice that many of the models on our buyer guide include a pull-out rod. These rods give you more accuracy to sharpen the contours of the serrated blade.

A Guide To Pocket Knife Sharpening Angles

When you sharpen your knife, you may have to choose a pocket knife sharpener that adheres to your knife’s angle or find one that can be tailored to your needs (check out product 10 above for a sharpener that has a dial so you can tailor its sharpening angle to your knife!). To help you understand knife angles a little better, here is a handy guide that covers the basics:

Sub 10 degrees – knives with an angle below 10 degrees are often used for cutting materials that are relatively soft. Pocket knives with an angle of around seven or eight degrees will almost certainly be straight-edge designs.

10-20 degrees – these sorts of angles will come in useful for gutting fish and chopping meat around your campfire. They are generally not ideal for chopping stronger materials or to be used in a chopping technique.

20-30 degrees – these knives will be more durable than those with a lesser angle. They can be considered as hunting knives and are great for skinning and similar activities. They will also be more robust for tackling some building tasks in the wild.

30+ degrees – even more durable are knives with an angle above 30 degrees. These knives can be utilized with much more brute force to achieve cutting.

Whichever type of knife you have or plan to own, it’s important that you get a pocket knife sharpener that matches it. Many models have multiple slots to be tailored to knives within a specific angle range. More sophisticated models can be bought that provide a wider range of angles.

Did One Of Them Make The Cut?

We’ve had the pleasure of walking you through some of the best pocket knife sharpeners on the market. We’ve taken a detailed look at models from the likes of Smith’s, Work Sharp, Accusharp and more. There are different types of sharpeners with vastly different designs which is why we made our showcase full of difference to cater to all men and their needs. So, did one of these pocket knife sharpeners make the cut for you?

If you’ve managed to narrow down your search and need some help to make your decision, then click on the links to discover more about each product. Remember, there is no perfect pocket knife sharpener. You just have to find the one that matches your needs and uses perfectly.

Thanks for joining our buyer guide and sharpening your knowledge with us. We hope we have been able to get to the bottom of some of your questions regarding these products. But more importantly, we hope we have managed to help you find another quality possession that will last you for years more of adventuring. Why not check out some tactical tomahawks next to go with your pocket knife sharpener?

Best 15 Recumbent Exercise Bikes

BEST RECUMBENT EXERCISE BIKES

1Golds Gym Recumbent Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

At our start line of the best recumbent exercise bikes for men, we are featuring this awesome model from Golds Gym. 16 is the magic number on this recumbent bike. It has 16 different workout programs to choose from and also can be adjusted between 16 different resistances for a tailored workout.

When you are working out you can benefit from its cool air fan system to stop you from overheating and you can also watch your favorite movies or listen to your motivating playlist. How? This model has an iPad stand and a sound system that can be connected to iPods.

These cool features are enjoyed in exceptional comfort. The seat on this model is oversized and adjustable to match your height and leg length. Not to forget that the seat and pedals have also been inserted with a thick cushion to enhance comfort even more.

Underneath the iPad and tablet holder, there is a large LCD screen here you can watch your real-time exercise results come in. You can even see your heart rate thanks to sensors located on the grips. And underneath the LCD console, you will notice a water bottle holder, so you stay hydrated effortlessly. What is also effortless is moving this recumbent exercise bike to any location. This is thanks to its transporting wheels. Like what you hear? Tap the button below to uncover more.

Pros

  • check16 workout programs
  • checkMultiple resistance levels
  • checkTablet holder
  • checkSound system
  • checkTransporting wheels
  • checkLarge LCD console

Cons

  • cross-altElectrical cord sold separately

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 275lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors Yes
  • Guarantee Yes (multiple)
2Velocity Exercise Recumbent Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

On the second bend of our look at the best recumbent bikes is the sleek work of Velocity Exercise. The mechanics of this design uses a dual-direction flywheel to make the cycling experience much smoother. This exceptional manufacturing is housed inside a white frame with a powder-coated finish to improve its durability and strength.

This recumbent bike has fewer workouts than what we just saw but it still manages to let users get a workout that’s right for them. This is due to its adjustable resistance levels. Specifically, it offers eight different levels to match your fitness capabilities. You can monitor how you’re doing by the easy-t-use console that records and presents exercise data. You’ll be able to see information regarding your distance, speed, calories burned, time and even your pulse due to sensors on the model’s grips.

These cool performance features are only matched by the product’s convenience factor. The designers have added wheels to make transporting it and storing it seamless. This phenomenal recumbent exercise bike is made in Texas and has become a must-have for American men who like to stay sharp and healthy. Sold?

Pros

  • checkDurable design
  • checkReclined seat
  • checkPerformance-recording console
  • checkConvenient wheels
  • checkEight resistance levels

Cons

  • cross-altSmaller console

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 250lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors Yes
  • Guarantee N/A
3Merax Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

One of the most reliable recumbent exercise bikes that wouldn’t look out of place in a commercial gym is the Merax Magnetic Recumbent Exercise Bike. It is one of the best models when it comes to weight capacity. It will suit any guy up to 380 pounds.

This bike can be used by any guy with any current fitness level. The resistance of this model can be fine-tuned between beginner intensities to much more advanced settings. No matter how much you ramp up the intensity, the recumbent bike will remain a silent operator thanks to a smooth magnetic design. Once you’ve finished pushing your limits in style and comfort, you can monitor all your results from the LCD console which is simple to operate.

This model is all about you and what you need. From tailored workouts to an adjustable and padded seat, it offers everything you could ever need from a recumbent exercise bike. It even has well-concealed wheels to make transporting this robust and sturdy piece of gym equipment easy. To top it off, it’s all wrapped up with multiple warranties for its different parts.

Pros

  • checkBigger weight capacity
  • checkTailored intensities
  • checkSuper silent operation
  • checkLCD console to track performance
  • checkWheels for easier maneuvering
  • checkPadded and adjustable seat

Cons

  • cross-altLarger seats elsewhere

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 380lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors Yes
  • Guarantee Yes (multiple)
4Marcy Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

One of the most competitively-priced models and still worthy of a place on our feature list of the best recumbent bikes is this Marcy creation. It is another highly-durable design made from steel tubing which has been given a layer of powder coating to enhance that durability further.

You can customize the bike to your own fitness level easily. Just twist the resistance knob to increase or decrease the difficulty level. This will simulate riding on different gradients, so you can match your fitness level or a specific route to your indoor training.

It has the other bells and whistles too. You will find a sophisticated console that provides you with real-time information about your workout. The display is made sharp so you can read the data while seated on your foam-padded and adjustable seat. This isn’t the only thing that’s adjustable on the recumbent bike. The foot straps can be tailored to your foot width and the pedals have even been made with balanced weights to make them easy to ride with.

Pros

  • checkSteel frame with a protective coating
  • checkCustomizable workout
  • checkSharp LCD console
  • checkAdjustable seat and pedals
  • checkWeighted pedals
  • checkIncludes wheels

Cons

  • cross-altBatteries not included

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 300lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes (on frame)
  • Sensors No
  • Guarantee Yes (two years)
5Diamondback Fitness Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

On the other spectrum of the price range is this awesome Diamondback Fitness recumbent exercise bike. It comes at a bigger cost compared to many of the others we have seen so far but it does provide a lot more sophistication.

The combination of trusted steel and a magnetic flywheel ensure you will have a smooth and quiet ride in comfort. Where it really earns its price tag is in its workout settings. It has a whopping 35 workout programs to choose from, providing the ultimate selection in tailored workouts. These programs can be made even more individual by opting for one of 32 different intensity settings.

Even the LCD console is a step above what we have seen so far. The display not only offers insights into real-time performance by measuring speed, distance calories burned and more. It will even show you messages

Other cool features include an adjustable seat, water bottle holder, a foldout rack for your tablet, a fan that also has different cooling settings and even an integrated speaker system to pair with your devices and provide the soundtrack to your race.

Pros

  • checkRenowned fitness brand
  • checkSmooth operation with a magnetic flywheel
  • check35 workout programs
  • check32 intensity levels
  • checkDetailed LCD console
  • checkIntegrated speakers

Cons

  • cross-altPricier option

Specs

  • Weight Capacity N/A
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors No
  • Guarantee Yes (multiple)
6Exerpeutic Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The first of a double serving of the work carried out by Exerpeutic is this quality recumbent exercise bike. It’s also made with a magnetic flywheel to provide a smoother sensation while pedaling. Merged with a V-belt drive, it makes for a quiet bike as well. Like many of the others, this flywheel can be adjusted by resistance to provide an individual workout.

The LCD display offers users the chance to consult a whole load of useful workout data to help you progress and achieve top results. Time, speed, calories and distance are just some of the key information you can find here. Yet, it will also let you maintain a workout within the targeted heart rate for your age due to grip sensors. These sensors can accurately measure your heart rate as you take on the rolling hills and steep climbs.

The weight capacity is slightly bigger than average and with an oversized seat and backrest, we would highly recommend this model for the bigger guys making wanting to make a positive change. Find out more about this recumbent exercise bike by clicking the button just below.

Pros

  • checkAbove-average weight capacity
  • checkEnlarged seat and backrest
  • checkHeart rate sensor
  • checkClear LCD console
  • checkQuiet operation

Cons

  • cross-altTimely process to adjust the seat

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 300lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors Yes
  • Guarantee N/A
7Exerpeutic Recumbent Bike 2500

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you thought most recumbent exercise bikes are the same, you’re mistaken. The second option from the folks at Exerpeutic offers something completely unique. If you’re a guy who is struggling to keep up with deadlines and also struggling to find time for the gym, we have the answer here.

This recumbent exercise bike comes with a desk to place a laptop or smaller device. The desk can even be adjusted to the perfect angle for your wrist and neck position. The desk even has a cushioned wrist platform to prevent typing soreness and wrist pains. Not to forget the LCD display also built in to offer workout data. This innovative time-saving design is certainly special and will be difficult to find elsewhere.

It’s easy to be captivated by the desk and not notice the other great features on offer here. This recumbent exercise bike has an air-soft and oversized adjustable seat and 14 different levels of resistance. For men that work hard in all walks of life, you just found the best recumbent exercise bike for you!

Pros

  • checkInnovative design
  • checkImpeccable desk space
  • checkLCD console
  • check14 resistance levels
  • checkOversized seat

Cons

  • cross-altNiche market

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 250lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors: No
  • Guarantee N/A
8ProGear 555LXT Recumbent Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next on the Men’s Gear podium is the ProGear 555LXT Recumbent Bike. It’s one of the cheapest options on our buyer guide but it certainly doesn’t drop its standards. It even has one of the largest LCD consoles on our list and includes larger numbers, so you can read the performance data easily. The recumbent bike has been designed with a step-through design to make mounting it and dismounting no trouble.

One of the standout features on this design is that you can input your own workout. You can program it to your exercise goals. From completing a certain distance to doing it in a set time, you get a tailored cycle for your needs. Other cool features include transportation wheels to make towing it out of storage to in front of the TV not a workout in itself. Yet, you may not want to position your recumbent exercise bike in front of the TV because this model comes with a tablet holder. Simply secure your tablet in place and get exercising while catching up on your favorite shows.

Pros

  • check14 levels of resistance
  • checkSmartphone or tablet holder
  • checkConsole with larger text
  • checkTailored programs
  • checkConvenient step-through design
  • checkEasy to transport

Cons

  • cross-altSome assembly frustrations reported

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 250lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors No
  • Guarantee Yes (multiple)
9BulbHead Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you thought the recumbent exercise bike with a desk was unique, we may just have a competitor for that title here. The BulbHead Recumbent Bike doesn’t just target your lower body, it has a secret weapon to give you a simultaneous upper-body workout as well.

Let’s first start with the cycling features on offer here. The handles are equipped with sensors to monitor your heart rate and the adjustable seat uses memory foam padding to provide additional comfort. It can be operated with eight different resistances to give a personalized workout. All of your results are then visible on the cool LCD monitor.

Just under the LCD console are two pullies. These can be pulled at different resistances to workout your arm, back and shoulder muscles. This is an ice-cool innovation that enables a traditional cardiovascular machine with a focus on the legs to afford a holistic workout.

This may also be the best recumbent exercise bike when it comes to storage and transportation. Not only does it have durable wheels, but it can also be folded to make the design more compact. You can buy the model without the upper-body sculpting system if desired.

Pros

  • checkUnique design
  • checkOffers a full-body workout
  • checkFoldable for easy storage
  • checkMultiple resistance levels
  • checkLarge LCD console

Cons

  • cross-altSmall backrest

Specs

  • Weight Capacity N/A
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors Yes
  • Guarantee N/A
10Stamina 1350 Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

You could also choose to get your cardio kicks from this Stamina 1350 Recumbent Exercise Bike. It has all the cool features you will now come to expect from the best recumbent exercise bikes. A display provides you with your real-time workout information, so you can know when you need to push a little harder. Even when you do push yourself more, the bike will not get louder and your better half will still be able to hear the TV – and you stay on her nice side.

This exercise bike offers you men up to eight resistance levels, so you get a workout that is bespoke to you. One of the more unique features on this model is that position of the seat. It can be adjusted to your preferences, but it’s also made in a semi-reclined position. This applies more focus on your legs when cycling. For calves of steel choose this awesome recumbent exercise bike.

One last feature worth some column space is the pedals. These pedals are larger than the average design to be more comfortable for those of our pack with larger or wider feet. Need a pit stop on our buyer guide? Take one by learning more about this design and hit the button below.

Pros

  • checkQuieter operation
  • checkMany resistance settings
  • checkSemi-reclined seat
  • checkLarger pedals
  • checkPeace-of-mind guarantee

Cons

  • cross-altOverly simple one-button console

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 250lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors No
  • Guarantee Yes (one year/90 days)
11Merax Magnetic Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

We’ve slipped into a slightly different gear with this model from Merax. It’s still a recumbent exercise bike, but only just. It has a slightly more upright design to it. Yet, it still has the flagship seat other features of a recumbent bike. In fact, this recumbent bike can be adjusted into a completely upright bike with a recumbent seat. Moving on, we’ve finally got an exercise bike that comes with color options too. You can choose between a red and black design or a blue and grey model.

Either color you choose will offer a number of top features. In terms of convenience, this gym bike can be folder to keep it out of the way when not in use. It’s a prime buy for any man creating his own home gym with limited space. We saw this foldable design before and we also featured a recumbent bike with upper-body pullies built in. Look again because these pullies are also on this model. These innovative inclusions let you get a full-body workout from one piece of quality gym equipment.

Pros

  • checkDoubles as an upright bike
  • checkUpper-body pullies included
  • checkColor options!
  • checkInformative console
  • checkFoldable design saves space

Cons

  • cross-altSeat is without cushioning

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 350lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors No
  • Guarantee N/A
12Marcy Adjustable And Transportable Recumbent Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Nearing the end of our race through the best recumbent exercise bikes for men is this Marcy model. The seat adjusts to cater to men of different heights and its bigger-than-average weight capacity also appeals to a select group of guys.

The bike has foam-wrapped handles to add to your comfort when sweating away the pounds. It also has a console to provide you with up-to-speed performance information. This includes your current speed, time elapsed, calories burned, and distance cycled. When you notice your stats getting better it may be time to twist the knob just below the console. This knob allows you to swiftly increase or decrease the resistance of the recumbent bike to match your fitness levels and progressions.

These neat features come in a frame that boasts quality manufacturing and which is also equipped with convenient wheels for transporting ease.

Pros

  • checkSturdy frame
  • checkStep-through model
  • checkMultiple performance stats monitored
  • checkWheels to help you transport it
  • checkQuick resistance adjustments
  • checkAbove-average weight capacity

Cons

  • cross-altSeasoned cyclists need more resistance

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 300lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors No
  • Guarantee N/A
13Harison Recumbent Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

One of the most modern and sophisticated recumbent exercise bikes comes from Harison. It’s certainly one of the strongest models on our shortlist for the best recumbent exercise bike. The frame is made of stainless steel to prevent shaking when riding at a fast pace. The steel has then been treated to provide anti-rust and corrosion resistance, making this a bike for the long haul.

It has one of the most advanced LCD consoles on the market to date due to its ability to record an extensive number of features. We envy any guy owning this gym bike and being able to track their distance, speed, time, calories, reps per minute, heart rate and even more.

The programs available aren’t bad either. Up to 14 levels of resistance can be experienced in smooth fashion on multiple training programs. Choose the one that works for you then get going on a journey to a healthier and trimmer man. Other cool features include a water bottle holder, an iPad holder and a comfortable adjustable seat on a sliding rail. You can sit back on this model’s mesh sweat-wicking mesh seat and enjoy your workout in style.

Pros

  • checkImpeccable manufacturing
  • checkAdvanced console
  • check14 resistance levels
  • checkSmooth and quiet running
  • checkTablet space
  • checkWater bottle holder

Cons

  • cross-altMesh seat not for every taste

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 300lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors Yes
  • Guarantee Yes (multiple)
14MaxKare Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

On the last bend of our cycling trial looking at the best recumbent exercise bikes, we encounter this phenomenal design from MaxKare. The main USP of this model is its comfort. The seat and backrest are made with soft leather stuffed with high-density sponge. If you like a prolonged workout then this will maintain your comfort even when seated for prolonged rides.

No matter which of the eight intensity levels you use, each one will mean you get a smooth motion and a silent ride every time. This is good news when you consider this recumbent exercise bike also has a tablet and phone holder, so you can watch your favorite shows, movies or just listen to your own motivating tunes. One other feature worth mentioning is the handles include sensors, so you can keep track of your heart rate.

Pros

  • checkHeart rate sensors
  • checkUnrivaled comfort
  • checkSmooth operation
  • checkMultiple resistances to choose from
  • checkSecure tablet holder

Cons

  • cross-altSmall LCD console
  • cross-alt No wheels

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 300lbs
  • Seat Adjustment Yes
  • Sensors Yes
  • Guarantee Yes (90 days)
15Sunny Health & Fitness Recumbent Exercise Bike

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Our recumbent-exercise-bike finish line showcases a compact gym bike from Sunny Health and Fitness. This reliable product will have you cycling at your pace due to its eight resistance levels. There will be no slacking as you can get real-time heart rate scores straight to the console via handheld grip sensors. These results let you know how fast to cycle within a safe but effective way.

The LCD console offers more information than your heart rate too. You will also find distance, speed, time and the number of calories burned as the screen alternates through each reading. As you ride you will always feel in control due to the pedal’s grips and the comfortable seat. The quality features on offer here leave us puzzled to why it is priced so low.

Pros

  • checkCompact design
  • checkHeart rate sensors
  • checkMultiple data tracked
  • checkFriction pedals
  • checkAffordable gym bike

Cons

  • cross-altLow weight capacity
  • cross-altSmall console

Specs

  • Weight Capacity 220lbs
  • Seat Adjustment No (frame adjustments)
  • Sensors Yes
  • Guarantee N/A

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What Is A Recumbent Exercise Bike?

A recumbent exercise bike is a staple piece of equipment in any commercial gym. You’ll often find that they’re hot gym real estate among all types of people. From soccer moms to bodybuilders getting in some cardio, all exercisers can reap the benefits of a recumbent exercise bike. We will come onto those benefits in just a moment. But first, what do they look like?

The design of a recumbent exercise bike is what some would call unorthodox. If you expect to see an exercise bike that resembles a typical push bike like you see navigating the confusing New York bike lanes, then you will be surprised.

It’s their design that makes them unique. Unlike those other gym bikes that do resemble a bike you find weaving pedestrian traffic in Central Park, these bikes do not have pedals directly below the seat. Instead, their pedals are situated almost vertical to the seat which gives a somewhat different type of motion when in use.

If you’re reading this in your office cubicle when you should be doing work, you may have just tried to imagine this setup on your office chair. If you did, you’ll have noticed that you needed your chair’s backrest to support you in this position. That’s exactly what a recumbent exercise bike has. These bikes do not have the typical cycling seat that can sometimes be uncomfortable. Instead, they have a chair-like seat with a supporting backrest.

What Are The Benefits Of Using A Recumbent Exercise Bike?

A recumbent exercise bike offers a load of benefits to men who want to get in shape and lose weight. They are a cardiovascular machine which gets your blood pumping and improves your overall fitness. Due to being a type of bike, you use your legs to operate them. This makes a recumbent exercise bike a great piece of gear to target your lower-body strength, including toning your quads and strengthening your hamstrings. However, as we have seen there are some models that have a trick up their sleeve to work your upper body as well.

Such benefits can be found on any exercise bike or other cardiovascular machines such as treadmills and rowing machines. So why a recumbent exercise bike? What makes them special? Well, a recumbent exercise bike has a specific market.

A recumbent exercise bike is perfect for men who suffer from joint pain. Many men want to get in shape but cannot do so because a treadmill causes too many painful impacts or recurring niggles to their fragile ankles and knees. This is especially true for bigger men who want to slim down, but their weight causes them joint pain when jogging.

However, our clever readership will have already thought that this is surely applicable to all exercise bikes. This is certainly true. Any exercise bike allows you to do a cardiovascular workout without experiencing impacts at the joints. However, the seat design on a recumbent bike that we mentioned earlier provides extra support that other exercise bikes do not. The larger seat and backrest are often considered far superior in terms of comfort and support. This also makes the recumbent exercise the go-to gym equipment for older gents needing back support when they exercise.

Just because a recumbent bike caters to a specific group of men, it doesn’t mean it’s not a fantastic piece of kit in general. Anyone can reap the cardiovascular and fitness benefits of a recumbent bike and enjoy enhanced comfort while they do so. These bikes can even help you track your performance, monitor physiological data and be tailored to your workout needs. You can even get models that are perfect for use while catching up on some work. Did you miss that model? Scroll back up to product seven to see this innovative design for yourself!

What Are The Key Considerations When Buying An Exercise Bike?

Choosing a quality recumbent exercise bike is easy. After all, we just listed 20 awesome options above. What isn’t easy is carefully choosing a recumbent bike that is perfect or you. To help you make a personal choice that fits, consider these key things before handing over your card details:

Weight capacity – Most men will be suitable for all recumbent exercise bikes on our list. The best ones are designed in a way to withstand most people’s weight. However, bigger or really tall men may need to keep an eye peeled for the weight capacities on each model to ensure it will be suitable for them.

Size and transportability – you may be getting a recumbent exercise bike for a home gym. Or it may just be a one-off piece of gym equipment to go with your other gym gear. Either way, you need to make sure the recumbent bike you buy fits in your space. You will also want to consider if the bike has wheels for easy transportation and if can be folded to fit in its to-be designated space.

Resistance levels – the resistance levels of the bike need to be considered against your fitness levels. Most men can work with the standard eight resistance levels you find on quality options. Yet, some more experienced cyclists may want to get a model with more sophistication and personal workout programs to match their fitness goals.

Multitasking – they say men can’t multitask. But they’re wrong. We can also be trusted to do two things at once and men are proving it with some of the models here. Albeit watching Game of Thrones or Monday Night Football while getting a few miles in is not the most strenuous of multitasks. But if you do want to do this you may need a tablet holder on your recumbent bike. If you plan on working from your laptop, you can choose a recumbent exercise bike with a built-in desk.

The Chequered Flag!

That concludes our day at the Men’s Gear velodrome. We have featured some of the most durable, reliable, convenient and sophisticated recumbent exercise bikes occupying home gyms and living spaces across the country. We’ve also proven that you can get such a gym essential at an affordable price without sacrificing all the best features.

We hope you managed to find a recumbent bike perfect for your needs and uses. If you have managed to narrow our top 20 down to just a few, use the guidance just above to consider your options meticulously and pick the one that’s right for you. Also, don’t forget to click the links and discover more about your favorites to help you decide.

That’s the victory lap over with. Now it’s time for some of those spicy chicken wings we mentioned before, don’t you think?  Thanks for joining us and remember to check out more cool products on our upcoming buyer guides. On your bike…

13 Best Gaming Desks

BEST GAMING DESKS

1Arozzi’s New Arena Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

There is a reason that we have put Arena at number one on our list of best gaming desks. Well, there are several reasons, in fact. Arena is a product of Swedish design which is a fact that can be seen by its utilitarian nature, great looks, and ease-of-use. This gaming desk has a very large 14 ft² surface which can hold no fewer than three large monitors.

What’s even better is that even with all of your gear on this gaming desk, there is still plenty of room left over for a massive area for mouse play. Whether you like the simplistic look, or you like to put as many things as you possibly can on top of your gaming desk the Arena won’t let you down.

The all metal base and frame make this gaming desk incredibly sturdy, as does the solid desktop. For an even more substantial feel, Arozzi has opted for a mousepad which covers the entire surface of the desk. The mousepad itself has a self-adhesion quality to it, can hold a considerable amount of weight due to its 5mm thickness, and has stitched edges for increased durability and longevity.

Another exciting feature of the Arena is that it is height adjustable which means you don’t have to sacrifice stability when you’re looking for the perfect desk height for your individual body size and posture. Whether you are sitting on a barstool or a top-of-the-line gaming chair you’ll be able to find the perfect line of sight to keep you in the game. As soon as you decide that this gaming desk is the one for you, all that you’ll need to do is choose one of the five colors that are available. You can decide on this black model, as well as white, green, blue, and red.

Pros

  • checkPlenty of space for mouse play
  • checkAdjustable height

Cons

  • cross-altQuality control issues reported on older models

Specs

  • Design Standard
  • Warranty 2-year limited warranty
  • Holders N/A
  • Size 14’sq (27.90″ x 63.00″ x 32.30″)
  • Weight 85.5lbs.
  • Capacity Holds up to three large monitors
2Atlantic Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Coming in at number 2, we have the gaming desk from Atlantic. There are plenty of reasons that would make someone decide on this gaming desk. If not for the slick-looking carbon fiber surface to keep your command station looking the part, the great use of space lets you game for hours on end while never feeling cramped.

Definitely not for the minimalist, this desk is perfect for the storage hound. Do you want to keep all your controllers, game discs, speakers, headphones, and pretty much all your other odds and ends within arm’s reach? You won’t find many other gaming desks that have quite as many storage options.

This gaming desk comes with a charging stand for your smartphone or tablet so that you can stay connected, even through the fiercest battles. There’s even a cup holder to ensure you are always refreshed and playing at your best. Another nice feature of this gaming desk from Atlantic is that it comes with a monitor stand capable of holding screens of up to 40lbs. Cable management is also a cinch with the clever surge protector bracket and cable routes.

One of the best things about this desk is that despite all the bells and whistles, it still gives off a simple and sophisticated look that would fit well into any space. You could easily put this desk into an office setting, a bedroom, a living room, or your dedicated game room, and the transformation that it provides would be equally as impressive. With so many good things going for this gaming desk, we can see where we have decided to put it at number two on our list. The build quality, attention to detail, and convenience that this gaming desk provides definitely makes it a win in our books.

Pros

  • checkTons of storage space
  • checkCompact for all the gear it holds

Cons

  • cross-altAlignment issues on older models

Specs

  • Design Standard
  • Warranty Yes
  • Holders cup, speaker, CD rack, headphone, controller (x2) storage basket, and more
  • Size 44.75 x 26.25 x 7in
  • Weight 37.4lbs.
  • Capacity 40lbs.
3Eureka R1-S Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

For anyone looking to upgrade their gaming station with the desk worthy of the high-end equipment they use, Eureka R1-S Gaming Desk might just be one of the best options out there. The fairly simple, sturdy, spacious, and just plain cool, Eureka R1-S Gaming Desk will certainly make a statement without any unnecessary noise.

The surface area is almost 45 inches wide by almost 25 inches deep which is more than enough room for a full-size keyboard, a large monitor or two, and plenty of mouse play. Size isn’t the only thing that this desk is going for it, though. Eureka R1-S Gaming Desk sports the stealth-like carbon fiber coating that not only looks the part but also improves mouse accuracy while at the same time hindering reflective light making it perfect for late-night gaming sessions. The RGB lighting included on this desktop also gives it a nice dose of style, and of course, can be set to any color making it possible to match your desk with your gaming rig theme.

Eureka R1-S Gaming Desk isn’t just about looks. The R-shape leg design is surprisingly sturdy and wobble free, without being bulky or complicated. The idea behind the design to give you the most stability possible while still creating a minimalist look. The fact that it has a cupholder, headphone hook, racks for your controllers, and an oversized mousepad are just icing on the cake.

This gaming desk is perfect for anyone looking for ample desktop space in a cool design that is as futuristic as it is functional. Whether you’re the type of gamer who likes to go all out, or you just need a space where you can keep all your gear safe, Eureka R1-S Gaming Desk will definitely hold its own.

Pros

  • checkRGB lighting effects
  • checkSturdy
  • checkSleek design
  • checkAmple storage space for peripherals

Cons

  • cross-altShipping issues at times
  • cross-altBranding on mousepad comes off easily

Specs

  • Design: Steel R-Frame/Standard
  • Warranty: Yes/Limited Manufacturer Warranty
  • Holders cup holder, controller holder (x2), CD rack, headphone stand
  • Size 44.5 x 26.6 x 30.5in
  • Weight 55.1lbs.
  • Capacity 40lbs.
4Kinsal Z-Shaped Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Have you ever wondered what it would be like to have a gaming desk that took after some of the most famous F1 racing cars the world has ever known? Why are we even asking that? Of course you have! Well, your wait might just be over. The Kinsal z-shaped gaming desk combines speed and style with stability and design choices proven on the racetrack to provide great balance. Whether you’re into racing games, shooters, or anything else, Kinsal z-shaped gaming desk will definitely supply you with the support you need for all your gear, no matter how much you have.

The large 47 x 25” desktop space is more than enough for just about any kind of kit you have, be it a full-size mechanical keyboard and mouse combo, a joystick set up, or steering wheel. The ability of this desk to hold more than 500 pounds is another impressive feat, and it’s able to do that because of its high-quality steel frame and intelligent design. In fact, all of the materials used for this desk are top-of-the-line and will last very long time. All of that attention to quality comes together to create a gaming computer desk that is about as minimalistic as they come while being more stable than most. If you’re wondering if this thing wobbles? The answer would be, “only as much as your carpet is thick”.

The extra features that come with this desk add to the list of things that make it a great choice for anyone looking for a gaming desk with this form factor. For one thing, it will always look its best thanks to the RGB lighting, clever cable management solutions and rear storage deck. You also won’t have to worry about your headphones getting cracked or damaged as there are convenient hooks within arm’s reach on both sides of the Kinsal z-shaped gaming desk.

Pros

  • checkDesigned to maximize desk space
  • checkGreat cable management
  • checkFull sized mouse pad
  • checkRGB LED lighting with multifunction

Cons

  • cross-altUnclear instructions
  • cross-alt Slight wobble

Specs

  • Design Z-Shaped
  • Warranty Limited Manufacturer warranty
  • Holders headphone holder, cable and power strip bracket, storage space
  • Size 47.2 x 25.2 x 30in
  • Capacity: 550lbs.
5RESPAWN 1010 Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

RESPAWN 1010 is coming in at number five on the list. It could, however, have taken a higher spot with ease. This desk has just about everything it needs going for it. From full accessory support to an elevated monitor stand to great looks and a robust build, RESPAWN 1010 could be used for long, intense gaming sessions and a sleek-looking home office equally well.

The entire desk is blacked out except for a few pieces of blue trim along the sides of the desktop to give it a little flair. It’s just enough style to let you know that it’s meant to house a serious gaming rig, not too much to make you feel like you’re in a teenage gamer’s bedroom.

This is a perfect desk for anybody who has a full-size gaming chair with adjustable height and who needs a little extra legroom as the surface of the desk is about 4 inches higher than the standard 30-inch height. Not every gamer feels comfortable sitting under a compact desk and having the extra space underneath can really make a long gaming session more comfortable. The fact that the monitor sits atop an elevated monitor stand also means that this desk is made for players who like to kick back and relax while getting into the game.

For a 27-pound desk, RESPAWN 1010 is one of the most stable gaming desks we’ve come across in a long time. Not only can RESPAWN 1010 hold up to 200lbs. of gaming rig, theoretically allowing most of us to do a victory dance on top of the desk, but the thing doesn’t wobble at all thanks to the steel construction and top-quality hardware that it comes with. For anyone looking for a good-looking, stealth inspired, understated gaming desk that is a lot sturdier than it looks, RESPAWN 1010 is definitely one that you should check out.

Pros

  • checkCompact
  • checkSturdy
  • checkConvenient peripheral holders
  • checkEasy assembly process

Cons

  • cross-altSurface can scratch

Specs

  • Design Fixed Height/Metal Frame/Standard
  • Warranty Limited manufacturer warranty
  • Holders headphones rack, speaker holders, cup holders
  • Size 23.6 x 52.6 x 34.6in
  • Weight 27lbs.
  • Capacity 200lbs.
6Atlantic Gaming Desk PRO

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another great option to consider is the Atlantic Gaming Desk PRO. Created by a company who is been making office furniture for more than 30 years, this gaming desk might surprise you at how well its manufacturers paid attention to every little detail they included. According to them, this gaming desk is made for gaming sessions spanning several hours with the intention of keeping the gamer comfortable and well-equipped. Sounds like a pretty big claim, but we definitely agree with it.

Atlantic Gaming Desk PRO has all the features you could need in a desk, without including any gimmicks or extras that most players don’t even use. Another fact that shows that the company behind this one knows what they’re doing and understands their customers well, something only an experienced company can do.

The build of this gaming desk is sturdy and very well thought out. There’s a slight curvature the front of the desk that lets you lean in when your gaming session is getting intense, and there are storage racks, hooks, baskets, and shelves to contain every piece of gear you own, and they are all within an arm’s reach.

The built-in cable management system is simple but effective. There is a basket under the backside of the desk for the power strip which allows for a clean aesthetic that fits well with the overall appearance of this gaming desk. For all the extra features and storage space, Atlantic Gaming Desk PRO still managed to have a minimalistic feel to it thanks to its x-shaped leg design, matte black color, and carbon fiber coding on the surface of the desk.

Apart from all the features that this gaming desk provides, and its top-notch build quality, Atlantic Gaming Desk PRO would be a very good option for any gamer looking for some extra leg space and an elevated monitor. With a desk surface of 35 inches off the ground and the monitor sitting even higher, taller gamers certainly appreciate this set up.

Pros

  • checkSolid build and easy installation
  • checkLots of storage space
  • checkClean, minimalistic design
  • checkMonitor stand

Cons

  • cross-altExtra hardware can be confusing
  • cross-altMonitor stand not height adjustable

Specs

  • Design Standard/X-leg design
  • Warranty Yes
  • Holders Charging stand for smartphone or tablet, speaker holders, game racks, storage basket, controller rack, cable management solutions, powerstrip bracket, cup holder, headphone holder
  • Size 51 x 24.5 x 35.8in
  • Weight 41.5lbs.

BEST L SHAPED / CORNER GAMING DESKS

1Walker Edison Soreno 3-Piece Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Walker Edison Soreno gaming desk is number seven on our list, but it’s number one in the L-shaped gaming desk category. This desk is just plain beautiful and would fit in just about anywhere you could think of to put it. The uncomplicated black metal frame, along with the 6 mm thick tempered glass top come together to give this desk a look unlike most other gaming desks out there.

At first glance, it might come across as something you would find in a flatpack furniture store but when you get close enough to touch it you can see how quality craftsmanship and premium materials really make a difference.

This computer gaming desk screams quality and simplicity, but the company behind this product is quick to let you know that durability, stability, and longevity were at the top of their priority list when putting this desk together. Whether you’re a professional looking to put together a workstation that can also serve as a battle station, or you just want a dedicated PC gaming desk it’s large and strong enough to hold all of your gear, while at the same time giving you plenty of space to feel comfortable while you play, Walker Edison Soreno will fit the bill perfectly.

Apart from its attractive design and solid build, there are a lot of other reasons that you would want to go for this gaming desk as well. One of the main reasons that Walker Edison Soreno gets so many great reviews is that it is one of the most stable desks on the market at this price range. The tight corners and clean lines also make this desk perfect for a variety of different setups. A lot of people have taken this desk home have liked it so much, in fact, they bought a second to create a larger U-shaped desk.

Pros

  • checkDesk halves can separate into two desks
  • checkSturdy
  • checkEasily modifiable

Cons

  • cross-altShiny tempered glass surface may not be for everyone

Specs

  • Design L-Shape
  • Warranty Yes/Limited warranty from manufacturer
  • Holders PC holder, keyboard tray
  • Size 20 x 51 x 29in
  • Weight 57lbs.
2Green Forest L-Shape Corner Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another favorite of ours, the Green Forest corner gaming desk, might be the desk you’re looking for if you’ve got a lot of gear to keep track of. L-shaped desks are perfect for anyone looking to sprawl out a little bit as they give twice the desktop space compared with a conventional gaming desk. L-shaped desks allow for a lot more freedom in where you put your speakers, headphone stand, controller racks, and all the other gear that you need to save the world.

Spreading things out also makes for a cleaner, and better organized appearance of your battle station which is always a good idea if you’re gaming desk happens to be in a room with high traffic.

An interesting thing about the Green Forest corner gaming desk, is that unlike other corner desks this one is actually shaped like an L with one side longer than the other. The thick metal frame and glass surface separate into three individual pieces which can be moved around to fit whatever space they are being put into. Each piece can even be used as its own standalone desk, or multiple Green Forest gaming desks can be combined in multiple ways to make all sorts of interesting desk layouts.

Another benefit of the sturdy frame that holds this gaming desk together is that it can take a lot of weight while still maintaining stability. In fact, once you get this desk set up and start playing on it, you’ll quickly forget that wobbliness is even a thing. No matter how long you plan to keep your desk, this computer desk from Green Forest is sure to serve you well for many years to come. Get it for its stability, its looks, its customizability, or any combination of the three.

Pros

  • checkStylish design that looks great in almost every room
  • checkStable and good frame

Cons

  • cross-altNo holders for peripherals

Specs

  • Design L-shape
  • Warranty Yes
  • Holders N/A
  • Size 58.1 x 44.3 x 29.1in
  • Weight 37.2lbs.
3AmazonBasics 3-Piece Gaming Desk (L-Shaped)

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

There is no shortage of L-shaped desks constructed with metal framework and glass tops, but the three-piece gaming desk Amazon basics is one of our favorites. For this style of gaming desk to work it as to have a few things going for it.

The framework has to be extremely strong and durable making it possible for the desk to be virtually wobble free, the glass on top has to be thick, strong, level, and of a quality good enough to look the part, and the assembly process should be pain free. Many of the metal framed L-shaped desks available today fail one, two, for all of these tests and would have no chance making it onto a list of top choices on our site. The AmazonBasics 3-Piece gaming desk is a good example of what happens when the style of desk is done the right way.

While sporting a simplistic, almost industrial design, the AmazonBasics 3-Piece gaming desk can be arranged in a variety of different ways as all three of its parts are independent of each other. They all come together to create a very large workspace where every piece of essential gear can be accessed within a moment’s notice when needed. The desktop on each side extends to more than 50 inches wide means there is plenty of room for several large monitors to be placed side-by-side. Another plus with this gaming desk is that it is designed to be at an optimal height for ergonomics making it a very good choice for anybody who does a lot of keyboard work.

Another nice touch that this selection brings to the table is the CPU stand which can be placed wherever you want. The ability to choose where your PC is located is more important than a lot of people think. Whether you want your gaming rig to set off to the side of your desk or under a specific desk surface, cable management and aesthetics are much easier to maintain when you have the freedom to choose where things go.

Pros

  • checkVery sturdy
  • checkEasy installation
  • checkSleek Design
  • checkCompact

Cons

  • cross-altLack of features such as cup holders and speaker racks
  • cross-altKeyboard tray is on the small side

Specs

  • Design L-shaped
  • Warranty Yes/AmazonBasics 1-year limited warranty
  • Holders keyboard tray, CPU stand,
  • Size 53 x 53 x 29
  • Weight 67.7lbs.
4Clutch Ergonomic L-Shaped Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Clutch Ergonomic gaming desk is not for the faint of heart. To put it shortly, this gaming desk doesn’t mess around. Not only is it one of the best-looking L-shaped gaming desks we’ve seen in a long time, it’s also one of the most robust and well thought out corner desks on our list.

While the Clutch Ergonomic gaming desk could theoretically be used for both gaming and home office setups, it is obviously centered on gaming which explains the mousepad that covers the entire surface of the desk. The branding and color scheme on the mousepad are also reminiscent of E-sports events and competitive matches in the world of gaming.

At first glance, the Clutch Ergonomic gaming desk looks a bit like standard office table with a giant mousepad. A closer look, however, reveals design choices that are extremely clever. The long side of the L-shape, at over 65 inches, as well as the shorter desk coming in hands nearly 30 inches long, have straight backs that would normally have them sitting flush against whatever wall they were pushed up against.

Common problem straight-backed gaming desks is that there is no space for cables which leads to gamers keeping their gaming table a few inches from the wall, reducing their desk’s overall stability. With the Clutch Ergonomic gaming desk, the ends of each side are curved slightly outward creating a natural space between the flat surface of the desk and the wall. The gamer-facing side of the desk is curved inward to create a more comfortable experience, as well.

The Clutch Ergonomic gaming desk is a heavy-duty desk without a lot of bells and whistles, but it’s simplicity and attention to detail makes this L-shaped gaming desk a top choice for gaming pros. Where it lacks in features like headphone hanging hooks, controller stands, and cupholders that makes up for in stability, quality craftsmanship, and spaciousness. We suppose the folks over at Clutch understand that if a pro-gamer opts for this top-of-the-line gaming desk, they likely already have a headphone stand and everything else they would need to house their gear.

Pros

  • check Premium design and weight
  • checkCombines to create a U-shaped command center
  • checkEasy installation & very sturdy design
  • checkFull mousepad

Cons

  • cross-altRequires basic to moderate installation skills (drill required)
  • cross-altInstructions are complex

Specs

  • Design L-shape
  • Warranty Limited manufacturer warranty (3 years)
  • Holders Cable management tube
  • Size 30 x 66 x 48 x 24 x 29in
5HomCom Modern L-Shaped Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

For our final L-shaped gaming desk, we have an option for you that people can’t seem to stop talking about. Coming from long-time quality furniture makers, the HomCom Modern l-shaped gaming desk comprises every bit of the company’s expertise and attention to what makes their customers happy.

This offering from HomCom is not quite as simplistic as many others on the list, but it isn’t what we’d call complex, either. There is a very strong steel frame that runs from below the desk surface to the adjustable feet that creates an extremely stable desk, an MDF board surface, as well as a drawer for a keyboard which can be placed on either side of the desk. Other than that, there aren’t too many other features that stand out apart from the included CPU cart and braces for the frame to add even more stability. In general, this gaming desk owes its popularity to the fact that it is simple and versatile, while being robust and roomy.

For all the surface size that this gaming computer desk offers thanks to its design, it is also surprisingly compact. Putting this corner PC gaming desk into any type of space, including a bedroom, home office, or small office would be incredibly easy, but it looks good in larger setting too. Anyone looking to maximize space without sacrificing room size would do well to consider this gaming desk from HomCom.

Pros

  • checkPremium look and feel
  • checkEasy installation
  • checkVery strong
  • checkPlenty of room for all your gear

Cons

  • cross-altPackaging not the best
  • cross-altLack of height adjustability

Specs

  • Design L-shape design
  • Warranty Yes
  • Holders CPU cart, keyboard tray, cable management
  • Size 64.6 x 54.7 x 29.5in
  • Weight 75lbs.
  • Capacity 110lbs.

BEST STANDING GAMING DESKS

1Vivo Adjustable Workstation

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you’ve never considered a standing desk before, you’d be surprised at how much functionality they can add to a gaming setup. Making sure that your gaming desk is stable and large enough to hold all your gear is a great first step but adding in the capability to raise your monitor and keyboard high enough to game standing up makes a world of difference.

Number twelve on our list is just plain wizardry. Sitting right on top of your current desk, the Vivo Adjustable Workstation is a dual platform, steel frame desk sitting on gas springs allowing you to lift almost 40lbs. of kit to any one of the eight predetermined heights with a simple pull on a lever.

Gone are the days that you need to stop playing because your back starts to get sore. Now, in true warrior fashion, all you need to do to stay in the game is to raise your desk to a standing position and carry on. Health isn’t the only reason that standing desks are starting to take over the scene. Gaming while standing makes you more alert and (quite literally) faster on your toes which turns into you being more of a beast.

Another reason to get the Vivo standing desk is that despite being a desk on top of another desk, it is more spacious that you might think. The top surface is large enough to hold two decently-sized monitors, and a few other odds and ends. What’s even better is that the (optionally removable) lower level of the standing desk meant for the keyboard and mouse is also plenty large making this a comfortable solution for anyone looking to get more out of their setup. Of course, the ease of installation, extra storage baskets that are included with every new desk.

Pros

  • checkIncredibly sturdy
  • checkTransitions from sitting to standing position very easily
  • checkEnough space for two monitors
  • checkStrong enough for heavier equipment

Cons

  • cross-altNot a desk, per say. Sits on top of a desk
  • cross-altGas springs do not completely alleviate weight from gear

Specs

  • Design Adjustable/Standing
  • Warranty Yes, 3-year warranty from manufacturer
  • Holders N/A
  • Size 40 x 24.5 x 9.5in
  • Weight 51.6lbs.
2FlexiSpot Standup Gaming Desk

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you are looking for a sit/stand desk that has the potential to take your game to the next level, the last gaming desk on our list could be the one you are looking for. We’ve seen a lot of standing desks lately but this offering from FlexiSpot is one the best around, according to our extensive testing.

For a gamer, the benefits of a standing desk are many. Heightened senses equal better response times, the better blood flow that comes from standing leads to better in-game bloodletting, and a better posture has a laundry list of benefits all its own. The best thing about this standing desk, is that it works in conjunction with the desk you already entrust with all your equipment. That means you won’t have to give up your headphone rack or cup holder! Just put the FlexiSpot standing desk on top of the existing desk and you’re good to go.

Installation couldn’t be easier, the large surface area accommodates a large amount of gear, gas-spring-powered x-pattern leg design means you can lift this desk from sitting to standing with little to no effort. As the desk raises straight up, you won’t run into any unwanted surprises when you lift it up, either. Oh yeah, did we mention that the lifting mechanism doesn’t have any set heights? You can decide which height is best for your particular needs which is a thing of beauty.

Get into the game with this convertible gaming desk and take a new stance on what makes the perfect gaming desk.

Pros

  • checkIf a desk could be plug and play, this would be it
  • checkAllows you to transition between sitting and standing positions with ease
  • checkLooks great
  • checkMoves up and down smoothly and easily

Cons

  • cross-altMay take an extra person to get it out of its box
  • cross-alt Requires a sturdy desk as it is quite robust

Specs

  • Design Standing desk
  • Holders detachable keyboard
  • Size 28 x 31.5 x 8in
  • Weight 37.5lbs.
  • Capacity 35lb.

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

How we selected our list of best gaming desks?

The process that we go through to select the best gaming available is nothing short of painstakingly tedious. We look at a broad list of features commonly found in today’s best gaming desks. We investigate every gaming desk manufacturer that matters within the industry for details on topics such as warranty information, customer experience policies, and much more.

The first thing that we look for is the number of features that the desk has. Some have many and others just a few, but it is in how those features are implemented that puts them into the territory of being great or just plain sad.

If you’ve ever sprung for a motorized, convertible gaming desk that simply stopped working after a few short months and then found nothing but the sounds of crickets on the line when trying to contact the customer support, you would know how important it is to focus on quality over shiny features. That’s not to say that you should decide on utter simplicity, though. It just means you’ve got to be sure that the features you get will do what they promise.

Some gaming desks come with so many features it’s hard to know exactly which are for you and which will just get in your way. Are you looking for built-in speaker stands, cable management options, modular setups that allow for rearranging and expanding, keyboard drawers, or cupholders? You’ll find countless lists of ‘special features’ on offer and we see it as our duty to tell you whether these features are game-changers or nothing more than gimmicks to sell a product.

Another major focus for us when testing out gaming desks is how effective the design choices from the manufacturers are. There are various styles to choose from, and although many tend to look quite similar to others on the market, differences in height, stability, measurements, and much more come into play when deciding which are the most effective at what they promise to do.

The only gaming desks that you will see on this list are options that have been tried and tested by gamers just like you. They come highly reviewed, in general, and we have also given each one on the list our Men’s Gear stamp of approval.

What features should you look for in a gaming desk?

So, you know there are many features available and you are aware that not all of them are necessary, or even that great to begin with. How do you know how to narrow the list down to find the exact feature set that’s going to bring your gaming into another level? Fortunately for you, we’ve come up with a quick and dirty guide to help with the decision-making process.

When it comes to gaming desks, stability is something that you should never overlook. Gaming setups have many different parts and peripherals and can be quite heavy. Making sure that your gaming desk sturdy enough to withstand the load that you intend to put on it means you aren’t going to end up with a wobbly desk that feels as if it’s going to collapse at any given moment. Product descriptions won’t often tell you how stable a desk is because there is no universally accepted measure for stability other than an in person shake test. We use data from actual gamers to ensure that every gaming desk on our list passes the aforementioned stability tests.

Once you have the stability issue figured out, it’s time to look at whether you need to gaming desk with specialized mounts for your monitor(s) and speakers or if you simply need a tabletop style gaming desk. If mounts are something that you need, opting for mounts with sturdy build quality makes a huge difference in the end product. Nobody wants to see their monitors shaking all over the place as soon as they sit down at the gaming desk. Another feature that mounts often come with is angle and height adjustability which is certainly a good feature for anyone particular about their viewing angles.

Size is another important factor, although it is one of the easiest to figure out. You’ll want to get ballpark measurements for the desk that you have in mind which you can use to make comparisons with the options that you’re sorting through. For room size might be a deciding factor for the size of gaming desk you choose, the amount of equipment that you plan on including in your gaming setup also matters a great deal.

Are you going to put your gaming tower into a cabinet built into the gaming desk or you going to put it on the floor? Are you going to need separate drawers and compartments to keep your gear hidden away or do you want everything on display? Once you’ve taken all of these things into consideration, remember that you want enough space to game comfortably so as not to feel cramped and stressed while you play.

Storage unique features are also something that you want to look at, and every different gaming desk and gaming desk manufacturer is known for its own signature special features. Some come with unique cable management systems, others with modularity built into their designs making it easy to expand and contract your set up, some have heights and angle adjustments baked right in, and some of the higher end options have unique materials and surface types that add to precision mouse movements and stability.

What different types of gaming desks are there?

One decision to make when it comes to choosing a gaming desk is what style you would like. There are many styles to choose from and each one comes with its own set of pros and cons, depending on how you plan to use it. Some of the most popular options available today are z-shaped, l-shaped, u-shaped, wooden, corner, arena-style, convertor, and height adjustable desks. While there are a few other takes on gaming desk styles out there, these are by far the most widely used.

The z-shaped gaming desk is very popular due to its sleek design. From a side view, the leg design on these gaming desks form a z pattern with the desktop and feet of the desk providing a minimalist design that is both functional and great to look at. These types of desks can be outfitted with a number of attachments like a side platform for your PC, a cup holder, a keyboard drawer, a monitor mount, and more, but many who choose this style appreciate the simplicity that comes with them.

A similar desk style to the z-shaped design is the classic arena-style gaming desk which essentially the same thing with legs going straight down and a curvature at the front of the desktop allowing the player to stay close to the action. While they are all often the same basic shape, arena gaming desks come in different sizes to suit different needs.

Simplicity aside, gamers with a lot of gear generally tend to lean more towards larger, heavier options to provide themselves with the storage space they require as well as the stability that comes with them. Of course, the extra elbowroom has got to be a factor, too. L-shaped and corner desks, for example, could be seen as two desks in one. Because of their l shape, a monitor can be placed on either side or directly in the center. The u-shaped design is great too because it makes you feel like you are in a cockpit. With this design, the monitor goes right in the middle and all the peripherals spread to the sides.

For the ultimate in stability, heavy wooden desks are popular too. These come in a variety of sizes and shapes, but the wooden desks designed for gaming are built to house all the usual equipment that comes with a proper gaming setup.

Sometimes, functionality is more important and that’s where convertor desks, modular designs, and height adjustable desks come into play. With these, you can put together a gaming station that not only fits the space and equipment it is intended for but also the way you intend to use it.

What are the benefits of owning a desk for gaming?

At this point, we should address the elephant in the room. Do you really need a gaming desk? Many people believe that any product with the word ‘gaming’ attached to its name is going to come with a fair amount of hype and a healthy price hike as well. Luckily, that reputation for gaming gear doesn’t really hold much water when it comes to gaming desks. Gaming desks are designed more for their features than anything else and that’s what makes them great for their intended purpose.

One benefit that you will quickly notice is that these desks are designed for the PC, the monitor, the keyboard and mouse, and all the other peripherals associated with gaming. That means you’ll never have to worry about having too little space for you gear. That also means you’re not too likely to spill coffee on your $150 mechanical keyboard because you didn’t have anywhere to put it due to all the unnecessary clutter on your desk.

Apart from having plenty of room for all your gear, gaming desks also have clever ways to manage all those pesky cables that end up tangled up everywhere. Bad cable management can wreak havoc on the appearance of your setup, so having a desk that helps you keep the cable situation under control is always a good thing.

The fact gaming desks sit at just the right height also makes for healthier (a fact we go into in more detail further down) gameplay. Not only do the right ergonomics help with posture, stress, eyestrain, and repetitive stress reduction, they also improve the overall comfort levels making you a better gamer.

Speaking of comfort, height, angle, and size aren’t the only things that improve your gaming experience, either. Gaming desks come with many features that make it easier to protect your coveted gear and modify your experience as you see fit.

What is the best height for your desk?

Determining the best desk height for your setup is helpful for many reasons. Having the correct desk height is not only more comfortable and conducive to better gameplay, but it is also connected to your health.

Health may not be one of the first things that comes to mind when thinking about gaming and gaming desks, but it is a factor that should never be ignored. Especially seeing as how gamers tend to sit in front of their computers for hours on end. To maintain your health and comfort, being sure that your eye levels and desk height are at optimal settings is crucial.

Ensuring that your set up encourages proper ergonomics will reduce problems relating to the neck, the back, the arms and joints, as well as tendon related problems and repetitive stress issues.

Finding the perfect height balance for your gaming desk ultimately comes down to your posture while sitting at the desk. Considering your  keyboard, your hands should be able to float on top of the keys and your forearms should be level with the floor, give or take a few degrees for comfort. Excessive forearm and wrist angles can easily lead to serious problems.

Likewise, reaching up or down with your shoulders for long periods of time can be detrimental to your shoulders, neck, upper back, and overall posture. How your monitor is positioned on the desk is also a key piece of the puzzle. While sitting straight back in your chair with your feet flat on the floor, the top of the monitor should be at about eye level.

To put these concepts to numbers, a standard office desk and chair set up for an average height person puts the desk height somewhere between 28 and 30 inches tall. Of course, that’s just an average taken from standard equipment and will vary quite a bit depending on what type of chair you have and where you get your gaming desk.

If you are unsure about how high your gaming desk should be, it could be a good idea to get a gaming desk with adjustable height so that you can experiment until you find the perfect desk height.

Leveling Off

No matter what kind of gaming desk you are looking for, you can definitely find one that’s the best for your needs by looking at what each one provides. As you can see from our buying guide, there is no simple answer to which desk is perfect for each person as every desk comes with its own set of features and unique attributes. Sometimes it comes down to the amount of gear you have, sometimes it’s all about looks, and sometimes you’re looking for an option that looks as good as it is functional. You also might be looking for a gaming desk to meet very specific needs, like a standing desk or one with just the right amount of legroom.

The trick is to figure out how you want your command station to look and what kinds of features you need before you start to shop around. That way, choosing between a modular design, an l-shaped desk, a sit/stand desk, or a competition-style PC gaming desk gets a lot easier. You also have to know whether you want racks and storage options, or if you want to go with a more minimalist approach.

All the desks here on our list of the 13 best computer gaming desks available now are reviewed very highly which means you could choose any one of them and be satisfied with your purchase. As long as the gaming desk that you choose has the features you want, of course. Give each one a look and decide which of the desks from out list is best for you.

Best 17 Electronic Dart Boards

BEST ELECTRONIC DART BOARDS

1Harley-Davidson Electronic Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Let’s start as we mean to go on with this badass Harley-Davidson electronic dart board. Fully emblazoned with the Harley logo and lots of fire, this is one perfect addition to any self-respecting biker or rock ‘n’ roller’s man cave or games room. It looks awesome, it’s true, but it also offers a plethora of great options and features to give you and your buddies hours of fun and games.

High-definition graphics and colors provide a suitable backdrop for an electronic dart board that can track the progress of up to eight players, while offering 48 games. Gone are the chalkboards and notepads, as there’s a crystal-clear four-color LCD scores panel. Wanna know something extremely cool about this, amigo, that makes it all the more a worthwhile investment? When you either hit the bullseye or completely win a game, it makes a noise. Not just any noise though – a Harley-Davidson engine revving noise.

Don’t tell us that doesn’t excite you! We’d never believe you anyway. The board comes complete with everything you need to get started, out of the box, including the required AC-adaptor and six Harley-Davidson darts. You even get extra tips and a rulebook. Who can argue with that value?

Pros

  • checkDecorated with Harley-Davidson colors and logos
  • checkSounds a Harley engine when you win or score a bullseye
  • checkReady to play out of the box

Cons

  • cross-altDarts aren’t the best quality
2Fat Cat Mercury Electronic Dart Board

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next in our guide is this much more intense and feature-filled electronic dart board cabinet from Fat Cat by GLD Products. Rather than just being an electronic dart board, it’s a full-on dart board and unit with doors that close over, hiding it in plain sight, when you’re not using it. Briefly on the doors, they’ve got a nice wooden curved finish, so if you’re looking for an electronic dart board to place ion your main living area, this might be a great match aesthetically.

In terms of the playability offered by this board, you and seven friends or relatives can play together without any hassle or fuss. There’s 34 different games and 183 scoring options, with five skill levels. Thanks to the ultra-thin spider and concave segment holes, bounce-outs are less likely. Everything is operational from the easy-to-use control panel and in addition to the LCD display at the front, there’s also traditional cricket scoreboard on the interior of the cabinet door.

The build quality from the bottom up is outstanding, with built-in slots on the doors that can store a maximum of four sets of darts. With the board and cabinet, you are supplied with the necessary mounting hardware, the AC-adaptor, six darts and six additional tips.

Pros

  • checkWhen closed, the cabinet has an elegant look and feel
  • checkAppealing cricket-style scoreboard
  • checkUltra-thin spider and concave-segment holes prevent darts bouncing out

Cons

  • cross-altDart tips tend to break easily
3Viper X-Treme Electronic Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

What sets the Viper X-Treme apart from many of the others out there is that it features a full-size regulation 15.5” dartboard face. With commercial standard nylon segments, you not only have access to a much quieter game surface, but also a more durable one. Like the above, there’s extra-thin spiders that reduce the number of potential dart bounce outs and allowing you the opportunity to aim darts at the same section as others you’ve thrown to get the best scores.

With it capable of handling as many as 56 games and there being 266 different game options, you and a large group of 16 can enjoy an exhilarating game of darts. Some popular game options include double bull, double in/out, single in/out and cricket. From the LCD display you’ve got full access to not just the current scores, but statistics too. As is standard for many of these, you get 6 darts, 24 additional tips, the necessary mounting hardware and an AC-adaptor.

Regardless of whatever your favorite version of darts is, this is a cool board that you should look at closer.

Pros

  • checkCommercial-standard nylon segments
  • checkRegulation target face size of 15.5”
  • checkAccommodates 16 players

Cons

  • cross-altDifficult to work out how to change settings initially
4Viper Neptune Electronic Dartboard Cabinet

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another regulation size board, the Viper Neptune with 15.5-inch target face. This is another that has closing cabinet doors, a nice decorative piece that would help the dart board fit in with your décor. Whether you’re intent on hanging it in your games room or more general living space. It has the same very slim spider that helps lower the risk of bounce outs, meaning darts can be grouped together on the board more easily for higher scores.

As well as these design elements, the dart board benefits from handling 57 games across 307 different option settings, and a total of 16 players can play at the same time. The LCD display notes scoring, statistics and is very easy to use.

All in all, if you’re looking for a sophisticated electronic board to fire darts at whether it’s a way of chasing frustration away or for some friendly competition among family and friends, this model’s an ideal choice. There’s even an extended and new way to play Cricket, called Spanish Cricket. It comes with the cabinet, the necessary mounting hardware, the AC-power adaptor, along with six soft-tipped darts and places to store them in the cabinet, in both doors on the inside.

Pros

  • check307 game options available
  • checkAccommodates 16 players in total
  • checkWell-constructed cabinet

Cons

  • cross-altControls and settings can be tricky to program at first
5Franklin Sports FS6000 Electronic Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Next in our guide is this very traditional-looking, tournament-size board with a 15.5” playing face that will suit players of all levels. The first thing you’ll notice about this board is the price. Compared to the others we’ve featured so far, it’s considerably cheaper. Although that does mean you get less games and options, what it lacks in quantity, it makes up for it in quality. It’s been designed to be very easy to mount on the wall and play, virtually out of the box.

The games that are included amount to 28 with more than 100 options. So, there’s still some variety. The LED Cricket scoreboard keeps track of score, so you don’t have to. All you need to do is aim and throw those darts. To the sides of the board, there storage holes for the darts to be kept, so you’ll never lose them.

As standard with most electronic dart machines, you get a set of six soft-tipped darts and six replacement tips too. For the price, the quality and the design this is an excellent choice.

Pros

  • checkCompetitively priced
  • checkEasy to mount
  • checkHandy storage space at sides of board

Cons

  • cross-altThe Player 2 green score line is difficult to read from afar
6Arachnid Cricket Pro 300 Electronic Dartboard Game

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Slightly higher in price than the above, but still lower in price than many of the others, the Arachnid Cricket Pro 300 is one that is spoken about with dart enthusiasts and beginners alike. With a 13.5-inch target area and a range of 26 different games and 170 options, including seven Cricket settings, this is an affordable and fun dart board.

It benefits from having very thin segment dividers that reduces the risk of bounce outs exponentially. With the LED display, players can keep track of their scores and the computer even calls out recorded player names, which is a nice touch.

Like others on this list, it comes complete with additional tips and six soft-tipped darts. You’ll also find all the mounting hardware included, so you don’t have to make unnecessary trips to your local hardware store.

Pros

  • checkComputer voice calls out player’s names
  • checkExtremely thin segment dividers to help avoid bounce outs
  • checkEasy to read LED screen

Cons

  • cross-altBullseye spins when it’s hit, sometimes doesn’t register score
7Fat Cat 727 Electronic Dartboard

Another great dartboard from Fat Cat next. This has a 13-inch target area and the obligatory catch ring for missed darts that saves your walls from all those unwanted holes. As this is by far the lowest price in our guide we’ve covered so far, it’s not got many games, but does have a lot of options for the settings, so there’s still plenty of variety to be had.

Like many of the modern electronic dartboards in this guide, it’s got thin spider and polymer compound segments that have been target-tested to ensure you can hit the board without bounce outs occurring.

Even, given its smaller size and lower price than others, the scoring display screen is exceptionally bright and easy to use and read for your cricket scores as you play. As you’d probably expect, even for under 40-bucks it still comes with six soft-tipped darts, although the batteries that it requires, 3 x AA, are not included in the package.

Pros

  • checkFeatures 96 different game options for versatile fun
  • checkCatch ring protection for walls
  • checkEasy to read and control screen

Cons

  • cross-altIssues with mounting bracket
8Viper 797 Electronic Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Back with Viper again and another awesome regulation-size board with a 15.5-inch target area. The segments are also made from competition-standard thermal-resin to provide an incredibly durable surface to play on. Combine that with the extremely-thin spider and you’re sure to have a great board to play with the minimum bounce-outs, if any. The board, like so many others, has handy storage spots for your darts at either side.

When it comes to games, you need to remember that this is another budget-priced board, so there’s not as many as you’d get on more expensive boards. However, with 43 in total and 240 settings, there is more than enough variety to have a whole lot of fun with this product. 16 players can play at the same time and the LCD display screen will keep track of all the scores and statistics, so that you don’t have to. Especially handy, if you’re having a beer or two while playing.

You get six soft tip starter darts, additional tips and the mounting hardware to install on the wall. In addition, as this does not require any batteries, you also get the AC-power adaptor required to use it.

Pros

  • checkShortcut for five programmable favorite games
  • checkFive different difficulty settings
  • checkCricket display for up to four players

Cons

  • cross-altMounting requires additional measuring, not based on bull height
9Arachnid Bullshooter Illuminator 1.0 Electronic Light-Up Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Arachnid are one of the originators of the electronic dartboards. This one is a great addition to any home, especially if you’re not interested in having a tournament-ready board and just want something to do on rainy nights and when you have social gatherings. There’s not many differences between this one and others.

There are only 13 game styles to choose from and you get six soft-tipped darts, red and black so that there’s no confusion. The most striking thing, and fun, if you like that sorta thing, is the ‘heckler’ function. Yes, that’s right, this board will heckle you if you get low scores or play a stinker of a game. This can be annoying for some people, but others will find it hilarious. Especially if you’re getting a little tipsy with your mates and the competitive juices are flowing.

Another great option, if you’re at home alone or in the office on a break and looking to unwind, is the chance to play a solo game. All you need is in the box and it’s ready to go, almost from the moment you take it out.

Pros

  • checkHeckler function ‘can’ be funny for some people
  • checkOption to play solo rounds, if you’re on your own
  • checkAffordable

Cons

  • cross-altQuality control issues
10Arachnid Bullshooter Cricket Maxx Electronic Dartboard Cabinet Set

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Sitting at just under 100 bucks, this electronic dartboard cabinet set from Arachnid and their Bullshooter range is not the most expensive or the cheapest either. It’s a nice happy medium price. What does it offer? Well, you get access to 34 different games and 183 settings, including 4 cricket options, that accommodates as many as 8 players at a time. As with the above model, there’s the option to paly solo so you can hone your skills more and it also comes with the heckler feature.

Admittedly, an electronic voice shouting and pointing out your worst throws and shots might get annoying after a while. Therefore, it’s great to know that you can switch it off, if you want a break from the constant down talking. In terms of scoring, along with the digital screen, there’s also the traditional pub-style X/O cricket scoreboard mounted on the doors for a more authentic feel and game.

Speaking of the doors and the cabinet design, this gives it an extremely elegant look and feel. So, whether it’s destined to go on the wall in your man cave, games room, office or even living room, it’ll not detract from the existing décor. The sophisticated cabinet, as well as providing a way to hide it when not in use, provides a place to store your darts so they don’t get lost and you’re not tearing the house apart trying to find them just to have a quick game.

Pros

  • checkElegant cabinet design
  • checkPub style cricket display scoreboard
  • checkPlenty of great playing options for versatile fun

Cons

  • cross-altPlaying 1 on 1 against computer is extremely difficult
11Viper Showdown Electronic Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Back with Viper again for another tournament regulation-size board. This electronic dartboard has a very bright appearance and offers a versatile range of 32 games and 590 settings, with room for as many as 8 players to play at any one time. Despite its low-ticket price, it still features thermal-resin segments you’d find on competition standard boards and due to the ultra-thin spider in its design, there’s less chance of bounce outs occurring.

Do you often miss the board when firing shots? On a traditional board that might mean your wall would get harm and abuse. However, as this board has a generously-sized catch ring for missed darts, your walls are safe.

Viper Showdown is a gem that’ll get your blood going when there’s that competitive spirit in the air. The LCD display will ensure that scoring is handled in a fair manner and you can even keep track of statistics, if you’re interested in that sorta thing. You get the standard six soft-tipped darts and mounting hardware to get started with this board. However, you will need to remember to invest in batteries, as it takes 3 x AA that are not supplied.

Pros

  • checkPopular game settings like single in/out, double bull and cricket
  • checkGameplay for up to 8 players
  • checkRobust and durable construction

Cons

  • cross-altLCD screen could benefit from being backlit
12Win.Max Electronic Soft-Tip Dartboard Set with Cabinet

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you’re looking for a way to beat those winter blues and want to bring the games hall and old-fashioned pub feel to your home, whether it’s in your man cave or main socializing area, you might want to consider the Win.Max electronic dartboard cabinet. It features an easy-to-use and read control unit and LED screen that is incredibly bright and provides you with crisp and accurate scoring and game statistics.

It supports play involving 8 people at a time and comes with 27 preset games and 195 different scoring settings, to really give your darts and games nights versatility. The addition of five different skill levels adds an extra element of excitement to it.

The construction quality of this board Is very high, with concave-shaped segment holes and an extremely thin spider to reduce the number of bounce-outs. For the less experienced and younger players, there’s a catch ring that provides additional space for your darts to land if you miss the target face, protecting your walls from damage.

The ABS cabinet not only hides the board away but has slots for storing as many as four sets of darts and all other associated accessories when you close it up and aren’t using it. To get you started, you are supplied with 12 soft-tipped darts, 40 additional tips, user manual and mains adaptor.

Pros

  • checkHigh quality construction
  • checkVersatile range of games
  • checkGreat value for money

Cons

  • cross-altDarts could be better quality
13Franklin Sports FS3000 Electronic Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Are you thinking that you’d love to invest in an electronic dartboard, but are looking to avoid spending as much as 100 bucks or more, then this affordable model from Franklin Sports is an ideal choice? Despite the low-price tag, it still measures at 13.5” and features the sound and voice affects you get in higher quality, higher priced boards.

It has a really streamlined design and construction that means it doesn’t take up more space than is necessary. Which is great if you’re looking to have it in a small office, an already busy and full games room or your living room. Even for the price, there’s 90 game options so you’ll have plenty of fun whenever you open those darts up and get throwing those darts.

Also, for the price, there’s a generously-sized LCD display that allows you to keep up with the score, meaning you don’t have to use a notepad or even a chalkboard anymore. Well, you could, if you wanted to, but there could be discrepancies between your score keeping and the computer!

Pros

  • checkGreat quality for the price
  • checkLarge and clear LCD display for scoreboard
  • check90 game choices

Cons

  • cross-altCabinet doors don’t close fully with the darts in place
14Fat Cat Sirius 13.5” Electronic Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Arguably one of the lowest priced electronic dartboards on our list, the Fat Cat Sirius is an awesome treat for the whole family or those game nights with your buddies in your man cave. Despite its low price though, you still get a tournament-style spider and 13” target face. The LCD display is bright and clear and offers cricket scoring and fun sound effects.

With regards to gameplay, as many as 8 players can play at one time, with the choice of 18 preset game styles and 114 options for scoring. So much versatility and so much fun for such a low price. Can you really argue with that?

As standard, you get a user manual to help you navigate your way round the controls, along with six plastic starter darts and 24 additional soft tips. However, the only major downside is that it is powered with 2 x AA batteries and as it doesn’t come with these, you’ll have to invest in some. But, for such a low ticket-price, is that really a big issue?

Pros

  • checkCompetitively priced
  • check114 scoring options and 18 preset game choices
  • checkClear and easy to read LCD screen

Cons

  • cross-altBuild quality could be better
15DMI Sports Deluxe Dartboard Cabinet Set

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Now, with so many electronic dartboards that look more or less the same, this next one from DMI Sports is a bit of a breath of fresh air. It must be said that as the only element that’s electronic is the included electronic scoreboard, this will suit someone who’s looking for that traditional bristle dartboard with the help of technology, without taking away from the look and feel.

What really makes this stand out, apart from the traditional design and construction and the option of both electronic and traditional scoring, is the light cherry finish on the cabinet.

The dartboard itself is a full-size 18-inch by 1 ½-inch bristle board and it comes with two sets of darts. When you’re not playing, you can simply stick the darts in the slots along the bottom of the cabinet, close the doors and it’ll be hidden in plain sight.

Although this guide is all about electronic dartboards, this is one of our favorites. We’re sorry, but not sorry. This will suit someone looking for a bridge between that traditional dart experience, with the sound of darts hitting the bristle board and more accurate scoring.

Pros

  • checkExceptionally beautiful cabinet
  • checkTwo forms of scoring
  • checkFull-size board

Cons

  • cross-altNot technically an electronic board, as it’s just the scorer that’s electronic

BEST BUDGET ELECTRONIC DART BOARD

1Franklin Sports FS1500 Electronic Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Unlike the above model, this from Franklin Sports is most definitely an electronic dartboard that features everything you’d expect from a higher priced item. It features a 13.5-inch board, provides sound and voice effects to bring the dart game experience to life. For versatility and ensuring that you’re not left playing the same game styles all the time, as it provides you with as many as 65 different game options. That should be more than enough to keep you and your friends or family entertained for hours.

The screen is large enough that reading the scores is easy and it’s also been deigned to be easy to use when you’re switching between the various game options and skill difficulties. The board comes with six soft-tipped darts but does not come with the necessary 2 x AA batteries it requires. However, for such a steal of a price as under 30 bucks, you can’t really say fairer than that.

Pros

  • checkFun voice and sounds for more lively games
  • check65 different game options
  • checkSimple mounting system

Cons

  • cross-altDarts could be better quality

BONUS PRODUCT

1Spider 360 Galaxy 3 Home Edition Dartboard

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The last in our guide is this awesome, dripping-with-nostalgia arcade-style electronic dartboard. Unlike others, this does not need to be hung using any convoluted hardware or ineffective hooks, as it’s contained within a cabinet that’s impact-resistant. Yes, we’re totally going to ignore that humdinger of a price tag. Let us entrance you some more with just how cool it is.

It is illuminated with a vibrant and dazzling tri-color LED, while the dartboard itself is set onto a 19-inch wide flat screen LCD monitor and is the full-size tournament-regulation 15-inch. You get the benefit of various game options and can play against other human players or computer opponents. Some of the most popular forms of darts can be played including double and single bull and 25/50. Really, this would make any man cave complete.

As with all the other, more affordable dartboards, you get six darts, but also 500 spare .25-inch plastic soft-tips. If budget isn’t something you have to worry about, we’d suggest you get this in a heartbeat.

Pros

  • checkIt really is stunning and has a nostalgic arcade feel
  • checkNo mounting or hanging required
  • checkVirtually unbreakable

Cons

  • cross-altThe price, that’s all, the price

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What type of electronic dart boards are available?

Most dart boards are more or less the same, in terms of basic construction and layout. Depending on what you’re looking for from at-home darts games, there’s something to suit just about anyone. So, if you’re only interested in playing straightforward darts, there’s very inexpensive models that offer a basic number of games and scoring options. Whereas, if you’re looking for a more intensive and involved experience and are willing to pay a little more, you’ll be able to find an electronic dart board that provides an incredible range of gameplay options and scoring, as well as various skill difficulty levels too.

While some simply light up, others make noises and have voices that are played if you miss the board or hit a bullseye.

What to consider when buying an electronic dart board?

As there’s clearly a wide variety of different electronic dart boards to choose from these days, it helps you have a clear idea in your head what you should be looking for. If the above 17 is still too big a list to decide on just one, why not think about some of the following considerations –

How many players will be playing at any one time? – You probably noticed that one of the key things that differs between electronic dartboards that appear to be the same is the number of players that they can accommodate. While some of the cheaper models will only allow up to six players in a game at a time, there are some that can maintain scoring for games featuring as many as 16 different players.

Therefore, before spending your hard-earned cash, think carefully about how many friends and relatives will be playing and try to find the model that will accommodate your own social circumstances.

Consider the quality of the board itself – While many of the boards in our guide are extremely high-priced, there’s a great deal that are available for next-to-nothing. Although they may seem tempting, you need to think carefully before rushing out and buying them, because the price tag is not a clear indicator of the quality in terms of construction. Some cheaper models hold up against scrutiny better than others, that’s why it always pays to check out customer reviews alongside out overviews of these great boards.

How serious are you about darts? – This is a relevant question to ask, because if you’re not especially serious about the sport, then what’s the point in investing in an expensive tournament-standard electronic dartboard? If you are serious though, then by all means go ahead and do it. We’re not your keepers!

Hit the Bullseye!

Darts can be a fun way to let off some steam and to enjoy some friendly competition between friends. Electronic dartboards add an additional level of entertainment to the game though, as we’ve hopefully shown from our guide above. You can enjoy a livelier game of darts, even if you are just playing off against the computer in one of these great electronic dart machines.

Scoring is where fun and games turns into murder and mayhem…or at least one buddy or uncle storming off in a grumble because they think they’ve been cheated out of some points. Simply because no one can really remember what the points where or because they weren’t jotted down on the chalkboard accurately.

By leaving that side of it up to the computer, you can be sure of a more accurate scoreboard from start to finish. We hope that our guide, whether it’s the top picks or any one of the intriguing and exciting dartboards we’ve covered, helps you get what you’re looking for. We’re sure that your game room, man cave, home office or even workplace rec room could do a lot worse than have one setup. There’s a reason why darts has never gone out of fashion and if you’re new to the sport, it might just be time to find out why!

Best 22 Keychain Multi Tools

BEST KEYCHAIN MULTI TOOLS

1Gerber Dime Multi-Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

First on our extensive list is this awesome keychain multi tool that gives you easy access to a whopping 12 tools. Designed and constructed by arguably one of the best EDC brands, Gerber, this has a sturdy stainless-steel construction that makes it feel like a quality product. Crucially though, without feeling too weighty. It’s lightweight and compact design means it’ll fit nicely into most pockets.

What about the actual tools and accessing them? It has a very simple, but elegantly executed butterfly opening. This gives you full and easy access to the 12 incredibly handy tools stored within. For the DIY workman, there’s not just one but, two different pliers, needle nose and standard, two screwdrivers (both flat and cross heads), wire cutters and a fine-edged blade. Alongside these though are the obligatory scissors and bottle opener most expect from EDC keychain tools. The Dime provides something a little unique in a tool that makes it easy to score and cut plastic packaging. No more blunting those kitchen knives opening Amazon packages.

With a closed length of just 2.75-inches, it’s fair to say we’re impressed with the number of cool things Gerber have fit into the Dime multi tool. Though others may have more than 12 tools, for the quality, brand and price, we think this is a winner.

Pros

  • checkEasy access to tools, even when closed
  • checkExtremely affordable
  • checkSolid stainless-steel construction

Cons

  • cross-altParts have been known to scrape and bend easily

Specs

  • Weight 2.2oz
  • Dimensions 2.75” x 4” x 0.6”
  • Main Features Pliers, wire cutters, tweezers, scissors, bottle opener
2Keyport MOCA 10-in-1 Keychain Multi-Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Sure, it doesn’t look like much if you just give it a glance. Look a little closer at the amazing MOCA keychain multi tool from Keyport and you’ll find a whole world of possibilities. Each nook, tip and neatly machine-cut line or edge is a tool just waiting to be put to good use. Made from aesthetically-pleasing and corrosion-resistant polished 420 stainless-steel, this is built to take price of place on your keychain or, if you’ve got one, Keyport Pivot.

Importantly, it’s TSA-friendly, so if you’re planning on a trip and want to be sure you’re always prepared, this is the perfect companion. Aside from the bottle opener, screwdriver and visible 2-inch ruler, there’s blade that doubles as a box cutter and cord cutter. For the more technical out there, there’s three different sized wrenches (1/4-inch, 5/16-inch and 3/8-inch) all in the same inconspicuous hole that sits alongside a hex bit driver. You can even use the MOCA for any fine scoring work you need to complete.

We’d be lying if we said that we hadn’t fallen a little in love with this tool. It’s not the fanciest, but it’s reliable, functional and exceptionally practical. It also makes for a great talking point, as people will undoubtedly be unconvinced of its proficiency or usefulness. Just don’t let demos of its functionality turn into your buddies getting all those odd jobs sorted around their house for free.

Pros

  • checkCleverly compact and lightweight
  • checkTSA-approved
  • checkThree different wrenches

Cons

  • cross-altBox cutter/wire cutter segment could be sharper, better designed

Specs

  • Weight 0.5oz
  • Dimensions 2.7” x 0.1” x 0.6”
  • Main Features Screwdriver, wrench, hex bit driver, box and bottle opener
3Leatherman Micra Stainless Steel Keychain Size Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Leatherman are a brand known for their ingenuity when it comes to designing practical and lightweight EDC tools. The Micra is one of the most popular of its kind and it’s not too hard to see why. Weighing just 1.8-ounces with a total of 10 tools, including some fine personal grooming and care gizmos, it’s a pocket-sized wonder.

Unlike some of the others on the market, all the sharp edges and tools are kept hidden away when closed. This means you’re unlikely to accidentally snag your clothes or skin when fishing it out of your pocket. Access is still relatively quick and easy though and with its durable stainless-steel build and 25-year manufacturer’s guarantee, your everyday tool needs are looked after.

Leatherman are confident in their ability and proclaim the scissors to be one of the best sets of spring-action cutters on the market. Alongside these sharp and portable scissors in this miniature toolbox, is a knife and three different sizes of screwdrivers. Your beer will not stay closed, because, as you’d imagine there’s a bottle opener. For the guys out there, that like to look after themselves though, there’s also tweezers, a nail file and nail cleaner. It may not be to everyone’s taste, but we love the blend of personal grooming and the most crucial of everyday tools.

Pros

  • checkGood mix of personal grooming and everyday use tools
  • checkSafe, streamlined design
  • checkIncredibly sharp blades and scissors

Cons

  • cross-altSome fixings are not as well finished as they could be

Specs

  • Weight 1.8oz
  • Dimensions 9.4” x 5.3” x 0.4”
  • Main Features Scissors, screwdrivers, bottle opener and ruler
4

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Looking at the Swiss+Tech 7-in-1 tool you could be forgiven for thinking it was just like all the others out there. You’d be wrong, but we’d forgive you for it. One major thing that’s worth highlighting that makes this stand out from the crowd is the fact it’s equipped with a quick-release, fully-patented locking system that means it’s able to attach easily to just about any keyring. So, you don’t need an additional belt or ring holster.

Tools-wise, it’s equipped with both a slotted and Phillips screwdriver, a bottle opener and knife. These are all standard for keychain multi tools. The two stars, in our view, of the Swiss+Tech show are the LED flashlight, which is perfect for all auto work and when you need a fine and bright light on a tight and enclosed fixing or space, and the awl. Think nice and sharp tool for punching holes in more robust materials like leather and wood and you’ll know what an awl is.

It’s fair to say if you’re looking for an all-singing-all-dancing multi tool, then this isn’t for you. However, if you just want to switch up your keychain a little, this is a great way to do it. The one thing we’re surprised about is how heavy it is, but the fact that it feels like a very solid and robust item, that it feels substantial in your hand, is a major plus for us. We hate holding even the most miniature of tools and it feels like it will fall apart any minute.

Pros

  • checkSmall, but effective flashlight
  • checkWell designed
  • checkSolid construction

Cons

  • cross-altSome of the tools are not nearly as effective as they could be

Specs

  • Weight 2.4oz
  • Dimensions 2.38” x 1,12” x 0.5”
  • Main Features LED Flashlight, screwdrivers, bottle opener and knife
5Gerber Shard Airline-Safe 7-in-1 Keychain Multi Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Back with the kings of the tools all men want, Gerber, for their subtle-yet-outstanding Shard. The Shard has a very rugged and masculine-feel to it, something that we’ve come to expect from the manufacturer. The clean edges and Titanium-Nitrate coated stainless-steel tool gives it a real sense of class. It may look a little unwieldly and awkward to use, but Gerber have put a lot of thought into designing it ergonomically so that it feels good whether you’re prying open a can of pickles or finishing off that piece of furniture for your decking.

Weighing at just 0.32-ounces it’s hard to think of another less bulky and lightweight tool that offers so much versatility. Wherever you are, whatever needs handling, this is a great tool to have at your disposal. Yes, we do mean everywhere, because it’s fully airline-safe. Let’s face it, as modern men, with a sense of pride, there’s always something that needs to be screwed in or tightened up. Even when there’s none of those jobs to do, there’s always a bottle or three of the cold stuff that needs opening. For all those scenarios, the Gerber is your new best friend.

In our search through the best keychain multi tools out there, we’ve found that there’s always one random tool that’s not on others. In addition to the usual suspects like screwdrivers and bottle openers. With the Shard, it’s the nifty wire stripper and pry bar. If that wasn’t enough to tempt you, Gerber have also applied a limited lifetime warranty to this sexy little thing.

Pros

  • checkSlick and almost ergonomic design
  • checkTitanium-Nitrate coating
  • checkLimited lifetime warranty

Cons

  • cross-altScrewdrivers can be awkward to use on the keychain

Specs

  • Weight 0.3oz
  • Dimensions 3.1” x 1.3” x 0.6”
  • Main Features Wire stripper, pry bar and three screwdrivers
6Leatherman Style PS Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The next Leatherman keychain multi tool in our guide is this Style PS model. The first thing that’s noticeable in comparison to the other Leatherman we’ve covered so far, is that there’s a lot more substance to this tool. With a weight of under 1.8-ounces though, we don’t really see that as being especially bad or heavyweight.

Stainless-steel is used throughout its construction, with a nice bit of black plastic in the carabiner to offset all that metal. Modern multi tools should be ready to use and portable enough to take with you everywhere. Juist like the Style PS. That includes on flights when you’re travelling, as it’s fully TSA-compliant. Thanks to the carabiner, you can attach this to your rucksack or coat, if you’d rather keep it out of your pocket.

Using it couldn’t be simpler. In fact, Leatherman know as we all do, that sometimes you only have one hand available. So, you can open this bad boy with just one hand. With two types of spring-action pliers (regular and needle nose), spring-action scissors and wire cutter, two kinds of screwdrivers and some handy nail implements, you’re ready for just about anything. And yes, there’s even a bottle opener.

Pros

  • checkStylish and practical carabiner
  • checkOne-hand opening and use
  • checkTSA-compliant

Cons

  • cross-altScissors are known to loosen easily over time

Specs

  • Weight 1.76oz
  • Dimensions 3.1” x 2” x 1.3”
  • Main Features Carabiner/bottle opener combo, needle nose and standard pliers
7Haversport EDC Keychain Multi-Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

This funky looking multi tool may resemble a quirky-designed bottle opener, but trust us, the Haversport 10-in-1 is so much more. This heavy duty, low-cost and exceptionally portable EDC multi tool is constructed from top-grade stainless-steel with a sandblasted surface to give it a more textured feel.

If you’re a keen cyclist, then this is probably one of the best options in our guide for you. Among the various other tools, we want to highlight specifically the fact it features two different sizes of bicycle spoke wrenches. If we had to pick out one tool, we’d not seen featured in another keychain multitools, it’d be that.

Now back to that key-shaped design. It’s more than just a thematic stylistic thing, as it’s designed that way, so it feels comfortable inside your pocket and doesn’t stick out any more than the keys on your chain. With regards to tools, this is an intriguing little thing. We’ve already mentioned the bicycle spoke wrench.

Yes, it’s got a bottle opener, screwdriver and scoring tool. In addition to the regulars though, there’s also three sizes of wrench and a wrecking bar. All in all, Haversport have produced a fine addition to the small multitools market.

Pros

  • checkThe wrecking bar/nail puller
  • checkThoughtful design
  • checkBicycle spoke wrench

Cons

  • cross-altOddly, the bottle opener…

Specs

  • Weight 0.48oz
  • Dimensions 2.5” x 1.3” x 0.12”
  • Main Features Bicycle spoke wrenches, nail puller, wrenches
8Swiss+Tech Polished Stainless-Steel 6-in-1 Keyring Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Introducing the newest member of the Decepticons…Swiss+Tech ST50022. Okay, it’s not the catchiest name. Would Wrench-itWireStrippertron be better? We’ll go back to the drawing board. Anyway, the reason the good ol’ Decepticons are mentioned is because of the neat way this ‘transforms’ and that metallic finish makes it look like the old Megatron Generation 1 toys of the 80’s. What starts off as a compact little rectangle, transforms into a nice pair of precision pliers.

Even some of the best EDC keychain tools suffer from not being able to fit on to all keychains. That’s where Swiss+Tech have really bettered their competition, with the self-locking quick-release jaws that mean it attaches to just about any chain. As well as the pliers there’s also a wire cutter and stripper, sheet shear and two types of screwdriver. We’re not sure what you need from one day to the next, but we’d say this has you covered for most tasks, save for those that are more specialized.

As is the case with many of these mini tools, this has been constructed from high quality stainless-steel. This gives it a nice and reliably solid look and feel. One to consider for your inner handyman.

Pros

  • checkWell-thought-out design
  • checkScrewdriver tips meet ANSI standards
  • checkSolid build, considering its size

Cons

  • cross-altMay have trouble getting it passed TSA officials

Specs

  • Weight 176oz
  • Dimensions 6” x 5” x 1”
  • Main Features Sheet shear, wire cutter and stripper, ANSI standard screwdrivers
9SOG MACV Bite Multi Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

SOG sounds badass. As does their covert operations they were involved in during the Vietnam War. That’s until you realize it’s Studies and Observations abbreviated. No offence, but huh? Really. Anyway, back to matters at hand. Admittedly, this is perhaps the most simplistic tool we’ve covered so far. It’s fierce some-looking. But, given it’s just got a bottle opener – yes, it’s simplistic.

We’re not ragging on it though. We love this and all you COD fans out there or Apocalypse Now! Full Metal Jacket and Platoon fans will adore it. If you’re looking for a small gift to get someone or to treat yourself to, you should consider this.

One thing we will say about it, that makes it different from many on our list, is the design. More than just quirky and cool, the very design is what enables it to attach to backpack straps so easily.

Pros

  • checkBadass design
  • checkGreat bottle opener
  • checkAttaches easily to backpacks

Cons

  • cross-altHardly a multitool…cool though

Specs

  • Weight 0.64oz
  • Dimensions 3.3” x 1.5” x 0.25”
  • Main Features Badass SOG design
10Boar Tools 13-in-1 Keychain Multi Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Another great key-shaped design. This time from the popular Boar Tools. With 13-in-1 this multi tool keychain is one of the most feature-filled in our guide. The key design helps it to fit nicely into your pocket, while the stainless-steel construction gives it a sturdy and very tough quality. All that without being too thick or much longer than the average key in length.

What kind of tools does it have? The 13 includes the inevitable and vital bottle opener, bicycle spoke wrenches, screwdrivers, nail puller, box opener, three wrenches and a 1” ruler. So, just about everything you could need on your keychain. AS well as, if you’re a cyclist, tools to carry out light maintenance and repairs on your bike.

As it has a very streamlined design, it doesn’t feel nearly as bulky as a tool that has 13 different functions should. Anyone that’s familiar with Boar Tools knows they’re committed to designing and manufacturing only the finest tools with long-term, even lifetime use in mind. To that end, they’ve supplied their limited lifetime warranty for the tool.

Pros

  • checkLimited lifetime warranty
  • check13-in-1 tools isn’t something you should pass on easily
  • checkSturdy stainless-steel construction

Cons

  • cross-altFlathead screwdriver is awkward to use

Specs

  • Weight 0.6oz
  • Dimensions 2.5” x 0.1” x 1.12”
  • Main Features Bicycle spoke wrenches, wrenches, box opener and screwdrivers
11Nite Ize DoohiocKey QuicKey 5-in-1 Multi Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Try to say that name without laughing a little. But this doohickey is anything but a joke. Put the silly name to one side for the moment. Key designs are obviously a popular choice among manufacturers and EDC fans. This is probably one of the slickest we’ve looked at. It just looks like a key, until you give it a closer look. Stainless-steel is used to give it a strong and durable quality, while remaining relatively lightweight.

There’s something deftly-clever about a gadget that can do multiple jobs from virtually the same part. And that’s the case with this Nite Ize tool. All the tools are found in the ‘key teeth’. So, whether you’re looking to fasten something with screws, score or cut something or open a bottle of your favorite amber nectar, there’s no complicated usage instructions or opening mechanism.

Like most of the EDC multi tools in this guide, this one is TSA-friendly, so can be taken just about anywhere.

Pros

  • checkClever design
  • checkAffordable
  • checkStainless-steel

Cons

  • cross-altSome tools are not as effective as they could be

Specs

  • Weight 0.7oz
  • Dimensions 2.5” x 0.7” x 0.2”
  • Main Features Serrated edge, scoring point and bottle opener
12Bastex 14-in-1 Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Just when we thought we’d seen the best of the best, Bastex blast much of their competition out of the water with this sensational pocket tool. Are you one of these guys that always has things he needs to get done? This amazing 14-in-1 multi tool is worth considering if you are. Not only does it have a strong metallic construction, but it’s also lightweight, especially when you think about just how many tools are held within it.

About those tools, how does a miniature saw, pocket knife, wire cutters, two types of pliers, screwdrivers and bottle opener sound to you? Pretty awesome, right? Well, hold on a little before you inevitably click trough and purchase this bad boy. If you’re a keen angler, whether for sport or for the belly, there’s a fish hook remover, to help you benefit from your catch. Versatility is the name of the game when Bastex is at the helm, because the same implement can also be used to re-string your guitar too.

After a busy, but undoubtedly fun time using this tool for just about anything, you can kick back and bust open two or three cold ones. But wait, 14 tools in 1 sounds quite dangerous, doesn’t it? Have no fear, hombre, as each individual tool has its own locking mechanism that keeps it securely in place when it’s not in use. So, there’s no need to worry about toes or fingers flying.

Pros

  • checkDid you not read it’s got a mini saw?
  • checkVersatile range of applications
  • checkSafe locking mechanism that keeps tools in place

Cons

  • cross-altPhillips screwdriver head is too small

Specs

  • Weight 10.4oz
  • Dimensions 5” x 2.9” x 1.4”
  • Main Features Saw blade, needle nose pliers, curve jaw pliers and fish hook remover
13Swiss+Tech Polished Stainless-Steel 9-in-1 Micro-Tech EX Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

By now, if you didn’t already realize it, seeing the Swiss+Tech branding emblazoned on a keychain multi tool, is enough to suggest it’s a quality product. That’s what we would say about this 9-in-1 gizmo. Even if it does look like something a serial killer might use when it’s fully open and all the tools are out. Don’t do that at the airport. Seriously, dude. Don’t.

Anyway, back to the tool itself. It’s exceptionally lightweight, comfortable to keep in your pocket and very easy to use. What’s more, thanks to the inclusion of Swiss+Tech’s patented quick-release mechanism this Micro-Plus EX will lock easily and conveniently onto just about any size or style of keyring.

With stainless-steel used throughout, it looks and feels like a professional piece of kit. Think about the tools that are included. There’s pliers, a wire cutter that will also crimp and strip wires if necessary and that bottle opener for when you need a bit of a refreshing break from all that hard work tinkering. Additionally, there’s two flat-head and two Phillips head screwdrivers, whose heads all meet ANSI standards.

Pros

  • checkSwiss+Tech quick-release locking mechanism
  • checkVersatile range of wire tools
  • checkPocket-friendly

Cons

  • cross-altDrivers could be more effective

Specs

  • Weight 2.88oz
  • Dimensions 2” x 1.5” x 0.4”
  • Main Features Wire stripper and crimper, flat and Phillips head screwdrivers and pliers
14Freehawk 7-in-1 Outdoor Tactical Emergency Survival EDC Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Do you want to feel as free as a hawk? The Freehawk outdoor tactical emergency survival tool is just what you need for everyday task but should also be considered for your go bag or camping accessories haul. It’s constructed from high quality, hardened stainless-steel and aluminum with a silver-brushed finish that makes it look very elegant. The stylish layout and Freehawk motif all make it a rather elegant piece.

Elegance aside, this is built for work. The fine-edge knife is ideal for cutting material like rope and other materials, particularly if you are climbing, hiking or just camping out in the great outdoors. Even if you’re back home and need quick and easy access to screwdrivers, the Freehawk EDC multi tool provides you with not just one size of slotted screwdriver, but two and a Phillips head too.

You’ll also never been in the dark again, thanks to the LED flashlight. It’s obviously not going to be as powerful as the torches featured in our guide to the best tactical flashlights, but it’s better than nothing. So, when you’re looking for affordable and reliable pieces of kit to stick in your backpack (you can find some great products in our Best 29 Tactical Backpacks Reviewed post), give this classy tool from Freehawk more than a passing glance.

Pros

  • checkSturdy and durable construction
  • checkHandy and versatile knife
  • checkSlick design

Cons

  • cross-altThe fixings don’t remain secure for long

Specs

  • Weight 2.4oz
  • Dimensions 2.28” x 1.18” x 0.59”
  • Main Features Fine-edge knife, slotted screwdrivers, LED flashlight and bottle opener
15Alotm EDC Keychain Multi Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

This looks like it was built for some serious abuse. The Alotm keychain multi tool has a very curious design. It’s not shaped like a key, for one thing and it’s long and has a cap that you remove to insert the different heads. Although it’s not got any sharp blade or any cutting implement, it does have a wide variety of screwdriver and hex bit carrier heads and an LED flashlight.

The black and silver-tint of the metal make for a very smart-looking accessory. The most appealing part of it’s the carabiner though, as this means it not only can attach to virtually any keychain, but also a belt or backpack, if necessary.

Given that it’s just under 10 bucks, we think this is a rather great bargain. Forget the fact you may never have heard the name before and just think about the quality and versatility of the tool.

Pros

  • checkLED flashlight for close work
  • checkCarabiner makes it easy to attach to belts and keychains
  • checkComes with various hex bits as well as screwdrivers

Cons

  • cross-altBits can go missing easily, would benefit from being magnetic

Specs

  • Weight 2.4oz
  • Dimensions 7” x 2.8” x 0.8”
  • Main Features Carry carabiner, Phillips and flat hex bit carrier and LED flashlight
16Closs Industries 8-in-1 Keychain Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The final of our keychain multitools is this attractive key-style design from Closs Industries. Closs Industries are an American-based company who have a reputation for designing and building high quality products. This keychain tool is no different. The metal construction has been finished with titanium for extra protection. Despite this, it’s still a relatively compact and lightweight multitool.

It’s only got five tools, which admittedly isn’t as many as some of the other EDC tools on this list. However, what it lacks for in quantity, it more than makes up for in quality. The tool has been cleared for airline travel and is TSA-compliant. There’s a flat screwdriver along with different sizes of hex wrenches.

While the obligatory bottle opener is ever present. Our favorite features of this tool are the file on the edge of the tool near where the keychain slot is and the box opener. Don’t be alarmed though. As we said, it’s TSA-complaint, so the box opener isn’t especially sharp, but should be enough to do the job. It may require you to work those guns tho!

If you’re looking for a slick item that looks just like a key, feels just like a key and tastes just like…wait, just the first two. Then, this Closs Industries tool is ideal.

Pros

  • checkSlick and clean design
  • checkUseful array of tools
  • checkTitanium coating for extra protection

Cons

  • cross-altThat darn box opener, but that’s not surprising!

Specs

  • Weight 0.2oz
  • Dimensions 2” x 0.9” x 0.1”
  • Main Features Hex wrenches, file, screwdrivers and box opener

BEST EDC MULTI TOOL CARABINERS

The next section of our guide focuses on a specific sub-section of keychain multi tools – carabiner multi tools. These are very much the same in a lot of ways as the keychain variety, with the main difference being that they’re built around and incorporate a carabiner. Carabiners are type of shackle that feature a metal loop that has a gate that’s spring-loaded for quick and convenient use. They can be used with reversible-connect attachments and are especially useful in systems involving safety.

So, the next six of the best small multi tool market we’re going to showcase revolve around the use of carabiners instead of keychains. We hope you enjoy reading about these more robust and rugged EDC carabiner tools as much as we enjoyed writing about them.

1Northwall Carabiner 12-in-1 Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

First in our guide to the carabiner multi tool is this simplistic, but incredibly practical model from Northwall. Made from titanium alloy, this tool offers a great deal of robustness with more than enough resistance against corrosion, meaning it’s going to last a long time indeed. It’s also suitable for taking on in your carry-on luggage on flights as it’s TSA-compliant.

With regards to the tools, there’s 12. While many of these will be of no use to some people, most will find many of them handy. Even if you’ve got no use for the seven different hex wrench sizes, you’ll probably have flat head and Phillips head screws that you need to install or tighten from time to time. We’re almost 100% sure you’ll find a use for that bottle opener too.

Intriguing, as this is a carabiner multi tool, it still features a keychain loop, providing you with various options for where to hang or keep it. Regardless of where you do, you’ll always be glad you had the smart and manly multi tool.

Pros

  • checkHex bit driver
  • checkKeychain loop for versatile storage options
  • checkSturdy and durable design

Cons

  • cross-altSmaller than it looks in pictures

Specs

  • Weight 0.64oz
  • Dimensions 2.72” x 1.61” x 0.31”
  • Main Features Phillips and flat head screwdrivers, hex wrenches and bottle opener
2Elephant Outdoor Multitool Carabiner Keychain

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Now we’re really hitting our stride with the next EDC carabiner. Considering how inexpensive this is, we’re rather surprised at what it features. With a durable construction of aluminum alloy and stainless-steel and seven amazing tactical accessories, we did fall a bit head over heels for it.

You may well do the same thing to be honest, especially when we point out that there’s a stainless-steel blade. This is essentially the upgraded version of a previous model from the manufacturer. Not only is the bottle opener sharper, but so too is the blade. With that power comes great responsibility and durability. The Elephant outdoor tactical carabiner has it all.

As a safety feature, we were pleased to note it had a locking liner for the blade that ensures it stays tucked in when not in use and that it stays open properly when in use. We also appreciate the inclusion of an easy access LED flashlight. That’s something you need if you’re faced with working with small screws and possibly in low-light environments.

As this is a tactical EDC multi tool, it’s not surprising that there’s a glass breaker. The carabiner part has a locking latch that means your multi tool will be going nowhere once it’s hooked to your bag or belt.

Pros

  • checkStainless-steel blade
  • checkGlass breaker
  • checkSafe-use locking liner for blade

Cons

  • cross-altKnife, though sharp and effective, is rather bulky

Specs

  • Weight 3.8oz
  • Dimensions 4.3” x 2.5” x 0.7”
  • Main Features Stainless-steel blade, glass breaker, LED flashlight and screwdrivers
3Outdoor Element Firebiner Fire-starting EDC Multitool Carabiner

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

As we dive deeper into the EDC carabiner section of the marketplace, you’ll find the attachments and tools featured in products are more leaning towards survivalist needs. Take this so-called Firebiner for instance. Initially it looks just like any other carabiner multitool. However, look closely and you’ll see that alongside the bottle opener and screwdrivers that have become default features, there’s also a small but sharp utility belt, for cutting all sorts of things.

There’s also a special Ever Spark Fire Wheel, as patented by the company. This works in a similar way to the modern EDC fire starters you get. In addition to that, the whole design is basically the carabiner itself. So rather than having features that fold out or detach, it’s all integrated, for convenience and quick access to the tools.

Only the highest quality materials are used, and it has been built with foresight and durability in mind. The price tag is rather attractive too.

Pros

  • checkFire starter wheel
  • checkSharp utility blade
  • checkHang slots for additional storage options

Cons

  • cross-altUtility knife, sometimes, falls apart

Specs

  • Weight 0.16oz
  • Dimensions 3” x 1.5” x 0.4”
  • Main Features Utility blade, Ever Spark fire wheel, hang slots
4Columbia River Knife & Tool Pryma Stainless-Steel Carabiner Multitool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

How about a carabiner multi tool that has a bit more sophistication and elegance? Look no further than this great from Columbia River Knife & Tool. CRKT don’t tend to put their name on anything that’s less than amazing and the Pryma is a multi-tool keychain that stands out even from the other carabiners, because it’s the only one featured in our guide that’s been designed by renowned knife designer Jesper Voxnaes.

His guiding force in the design is evident with its beautiful minimalism and clean lines that echo the Scandinavian look and feel he was inspired by in his childhood. The name is very apt, when it comes to the tools it’s got, as it’s got a pry bar. While it’s not big enough to pry open anything too weighty or big, it’s still useful to have. As is the hex wrench, glass breaker, bottle opener and carabiner attachment concept.

Pros

  • checkPry bar
  • checkLightweight and compact
  • checkStylish Scandinavian design

Cons

  • cross-altSome quality control issues

Specs

  • Weight 0.9oz
  • Dimensions 3.24” x 0.15” x 1.44”
  • Main Features Pry bar, multi-wrench and bottle opener
5Loowoko Multitool Carabiner

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The penultimate carabiner multitool on our list is very simplistic, but nevertheless well-executed model from Loowoko. What we do love about it is its gorgeous look and feel. It’s constructed from a mixture of aluminum alloy and stainless-steel, in fact the same material used in aerospace, so you can’t argue with its toughness.

Additionally, though, it’s the high-elastic spring carabiner we really appreciate and the fact that there’s plenty of hang holes to transform it into a keychain. The one thing that we really love about it though, is the rather long and exceedingly sharp knife.

You’d never think anything of it, as it just looks like an overgrown keychain. With such a lightweight and compact style, we sure you’ll be as transfixed as we are, particularly with the images of the knife retracted.

Pros

  • checkSharp and long utility knife
  • checkNumerous handy hang holes
  • checkStainless-steel and aluminum allot construction

Cons

  • cross-altCould benefit from more tools

Specs

  • Weight 0.16oz
  • Dimensions 2.9” x 1.81”
  • Main Features Utility knife, hang holes
6Rapala Fisherman’s Multi-Tool

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

For all fisherman reading this guide, this is the EDC carabiner multitool you want to invest your money in. Look at it and then look at the features. It’s got scissors for cutting your line, a line threader and even a jig buster. Just about everything you need, apart from bait and an actual rod.

It’s even got a handy bottle opener, so you can enjoy a cold one while waiting for lunch to arrive on the end of your line. Worth the investment.

Pros

  • checkFishing-specific tools
  • checkCompact design
  • checkSoft-grip handle

Cons

  • cross-altCan feel heavy in your hand

Specs

  • Weight 2.4oz
  • Dimensions 1,4” x 9.2” x 4.9”
  • Main Features Retractable jig buster, multi-size line threader, retractable line scissors and bottle opener

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

What is a keychain multi tool and is it a useful EDC tool?

A keychain multi tool is self-explanatory – it’s a Swiss Army Knife-style contraption that has a keychain loop that enables it to sit next to your keys. As an EDC or every day use tool, it can be very useful. It really depends on the model you buy though, as there’s a wide range of sizes and shapes out there.

What sort of features can you expect from a keychain multi tool?

Again, following on from the sentiment above, it really does depend on the model. Some of the most common features and tools in these EDC multi tools include:

  • Utility knives
  • Screwdrivers – both Phillips and flat head
  • Wire cutters, scrimpers and strippers
  • Fire starters
  • Glass breakers
  • Carabiners
  • Bottle openers

What are the best brands for keychain multi tools?

There’s also a wide variety of different brands out there. It seems as if everyone is jumping on the bandwagon and trying to produce the best mini keychain multitool. The brands we think you should look out for though include:

  • Gerber – Manufacturers of high-quality knives and multitools
  • Leatherman
  • Gerber
  • Columbia River Knife and Tool
  • Bastex

What types of multi tool keychains are available in the market?

As we’ve noted previously, there’s a wide variety of different styles out there. While some multitool keychains are simple and practical key-shaped tools, others butterfly-open in the more traditional way. While others still have various other designs. Carabiner multitools are particularly popular, as they’re convenient and provide quick access to the tools.

Cut to the Chase!

So, now you’ve got the big scoop on what’s hot in the world of keychain multi tools, we’re sure you’ll find that special bit of kit that suits your own needs and lifestyle. EDC items like multitools are become incredibly trendy again, and it’s not hard to see why. They help to transform your simple keychain that carries your house keys, car keys and work keys into miniature tool chains.

So, rather than struggling to find that flashlight, or those Phillips or Flat headed screwdrivers, why not invest in a keychain or even carabiner multitool and you’ll never be caught short again. It may not be a life or death situation, but you’ll be able to carry out those pesky jobs around the house. That’s not to say, there’s not carabiner and keychain multitools out there that won’t help you in a life or death situation. Fire starters, utility knives and glass breakers can all be found in some of the best multi tools listed above.

We’ve done the hard work and whittled them down, now you just must decide which one (or if you really can’t make your mind up, two or three) you’re going to spend out on!

Best 7 Small Personal Air Conditioners

Do you feel like you’re always struggling with wheezing, streaming eyes and a runny nose? If so, you’re probably one of the many people who suffers from allergies. If you thought that indoor air quality was going to be better than that outdoors, you should think again.

In fact, the air inside our homes and workspaces is often full of pollutants and contaminants that can cause and exacerbate a whole host of health problems. Dust, pet dander, mold spores and smoke in the air can all combine to make everyday life a misery. Let’s add to that the additional misery of sweating in the office or in your bedroom during a hot summer. If you don’t have central air conditioning, it’s no wonder that you’re feeling hot under the collar. Luckily, there’s a really convenient solution – a personal air conditioner.

A small air conditioner is the perfect way to stop allergies in their tracks at home or at work. Designed to offer just enough air cleaning for one, the smallest portable air conditioner won’t take up too much room on your desk or in your bedroom, but it will keep you comfortable all day and all night, protecting you from the inconvenience of allergic reactions. Air conditioners will also cool down the air around it, helping you to stay cool as a cucumber no matter how high the mercury goes. A personal AC unit is designed to fit conveniently into even compact spaces, but will still work so efficiently that you’ll be able to breathe more easily – no sweat!

Investing in personal ac can make your life a breeze, but it can be difficult to choose the right unit for you. How can you tell which mini air conditioner is worth the money and which one will still leave you sweating? The good news is that we’ve done all the hard work for you. We’ve tried and tested the top-selling portable AC units on the market today and reviewed them to help you avoid making an expensive mistake.

Best Small Personal Air Conditioners

1IQAir Atem Personal Desk Purifier

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The top rated portable air conditioner has super-small dimensions, making it a brilliant choice for next to the bed or on your desk in the office. It’s even small enough to pop into your carry-on luggage, so you can take it anywhere you need to travel without any problems.

The HyperHEPA filters are exclusive to the IQAir brand, and are rated to stop even the smallest particles in the air (as small as 0.003 microns). These tiny parties are 10 times smaller than even a virus, so you’ll really feel the difference in your breathing when you have this handy gadget in your home or workplace. The HyperHEPA filtration is capable of delivering up to 99% purifier air into your own personal breathing space, so allergies will be a thing of the past.

Even more impressive, the IQAir mini AC unit has a fantastically innovative user interface. It’s very sophisticated yet easy to use, putting the user in complete control of their breathing environment. The integrated sensors are touch-sensitive, so you can easily turn this gadget on and off or change the fan speed in an instant.

Even better, this gadget works instantly, delivering clean air directly to you from the moment it’s switched on. It works seamlessly with the Atem downloadable app which allows you to remotely switch the mini AC on or off, change the fan setting and even to activate the proximity sensor which switches the unit off whenever you walk away, helping you to save energy.

Pros

  • checkDownloadable app for easy remote control
  • checkTouch sensitive sensors
  • checkEnergy saving model
  • checkFilters out even the tiniest particles in the air
  • checkSmall enough to fit onto a small desk or bedside table

Cons

  • cross-altThis unit doesn’t have a gas filter and can’t remove VOCs

Specs

  • Warranty 2 Years
  • Weight 8.65lbs
  • Dimensions 11.5 x 3.1 x 11.5 inches
  • Voltage 100-240v
2Ambi Climate 2 Smart Air Conditioner Controller

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

The Ambi Climate 2 Smart Air Conditioner Controller is precisely that – a controller rather than an air conditioner in its own right. However it’s one of the best ways to conserve energy when operating a small portable air conditioner. Featuring an impressive artificial intelligence engine, unlimited timers and smart modes, there’s no better way to create a more personalized and comfortable living environment.

Perhaps the best feature of the Ambi Climate 2 is that it can be voice activated. You’ll never have to get out of your comfy chair to adjust your AC ever again! Fully integrated with either Google Home or Amazon Alexa, you can simply instruct your portable air cooler from wherever you happen to be. Even better, if you’re away from home for a few days, you can use IFTTT and Geolocation so you’ll never come back to an overheated or freezing cold house!

This portable air conditioning unit comes protected by a two-year manufacturer’s warranty and can be used with the downloadable Ambi app so your home can be kept at the right temperature through your smartphone or tablet device. Thanks to the AI engine, you can return feedback on your personal comfort level and your device will begin to auto-adjust your AC to suit your preferences.

There are four different modes to select from to obtain customized comfort so whether you want to minimize your energy costs or control your AC yourself by setting your favorite temperature this handy gadget is the ideal solution.

Pros

  • checkDownloadable app
  • checkFour different modes
  • checkEnergy saving options
  • checkLearns your preferences and auto-adjusts
  • check2 year warranty

Cons

  • cross-altCompleting the setup process is quite complex

Specs

  • Warranty 2 years
  • Weight 1.5lbs
  • Dimensions 7.2 x 7 x 1.8 inches
  • Voltage 240v
3Fridigdaire Connect Smart Portable Conditioner

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you’re looking for a really convenient small portable AC unit for your home or office, this Frigidaire model is ideal. With its Wi-Fi ready functionality, this connected portable a/c unit is compatible with the downloadable Frigidaire smart app to operate the device remotely. It may not be the smallest air conditioner, but it’s a highly effective one.

The 12,000 BTUs ensure that cooling is possible in any room measuring up to 550 square feet, and this small AC unit is capable of delivering dehumidification up to three pints per hour. The 360 degree air flow ensures that the cool air is circulated in a continuous upward spiral to it’ll reach all four corners of the space more rapidly.

This 12v air conditioner offers three different cooling speeds, three different fan speeds and a 24 hour on/off timer so you can customize your temperature to suit your preferences. Meanwhile, the auto cool function, energy saving mode and sleep mode give you even more cooling flexibility.

It’s also a pretty cool unit to look at. With its mesh grill, sleek shape and LED lighting adding plenty of contemporary style, this attractive unit works well in all kinds of rooms.

Pros

  • checkConnects to the Frigidaire app for remote control
  • check12,000 BTUs
  • check360 degree airflow for better cooling
  • checkAttractive contemporary style
  • check3 cooling speeds and a timer

Cons

  • cross-altHeavy unit

Specs

  • Warranty 1 year
  • Weight 8.5lbs
  • Dimensions 12.6 x 12.6 x 36.8 inches
  • Voltage 110v
4LEVOIT Humidifier

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

This humidifier boasts both warm and cool mist functions to offer a host of health benefits to the user. While the warm mist deters harmful bacteria growth and guards against mold and dust mites, the cool mist helps to hydrate the skin, sinuses and nasal passages in dry, hot weather. The super high mist output operates at 450ml per hour and this means that dry air can be moisturized even more rapidly. Meanwhile, the 360 degree nozzles are fully adjustable to disperse the mist evenly in all directions.

The integrated Relative Humidity Indicator and the Ambient Temperature Indicator on the unit’s display allows you to easily keep track of your surroundings. The Auto mode enables the device to manage its own mist output to suit the surrounding temperature.

The water tank capacity is 1.45 gallons and this is big enough to allow for as much as 36 hours of continuous use when using Level 1. This makes this device suitable to cover an office, living room or bedroom with ease.

There are five different mist settings to choose from, and the timer allows programming for up to 12 hours thanks to a touch sensitive panel. There’s also an inclusive remote control to operate the device conveniently.

When you’re using this device in your bedroom, you’ll want it to be as quiet as possible, and the whisper-quiet ultrasonic air diffusion means that you won’t be disturbed while you sleep. There’s even an aroma diffuser which allows you to turn the unit into an aromatherapy device. Simple to clean and use, this efficient and reliable unit comes complete with a one year warranty and its own cleaning brush for easy maintenance.

Pros

  • checkMultifunctional device – can be used for aromatherapy
  • checkEasy to clean and use
  • check1 year warranty
  • check5 mist settings
  • checkProduces both warm and cold mist
  • checkAutomatic mode for complete convenience

Cons

  • cross-altCan’t adjust mist level in auto mode

Specs

  • Warranty 1 year
  • Weight 7.2lbs
  • Dimensions 11 x 7.7 x 12.6 inches
  • Voltage 110v

Best Cheap Portable Air Conditioners

1HoMedics MyChill Personal Space Cooler

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Capable of cooling a radius of 4 feet, this portable unit can cool the space up to 12 degrees Fahrenheit. With its two different fan speeds, this model works most effectively in dry, hot conditions, and thanks to its energy saving functionality, it could even reduce your bills. This is an environmentally friendly unit which doesn’t use any ozone-depleting refrigerants.

It also features an indicator light to tell you when the cooling media needs replacing and when the water needs to be refilled. The clean tank technology works to keep the tank protected from mildew and mold growth, so your office or bedroom can be cool and comfortable. Very simple to use, this unit offers a four hour run time, and although it isn’t designed for cooling whole rooms, it’s great for small personal spaces.

Pros

  • checkIdeal for cooling small spaces
  • checkEnergy saving functionality for lower bills
  • checkIndicator lights for water and cooling media replacement
  • checkClean tank technology to protect from mold and mildew
  • checkUser-friendly functionality

Cons

  • cross-altDoesn’t turn off automatically after the water runs out

Specs

  • Warranty 1 year
  • Weight 2.2lbs
  • Dimensions 7.7 x 7 x 7.9 inches
  • Voltage 120v
2Ontel Arctic Personal Air Cooler

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

Do you need a personal space cooler for a more comfortable bedroom or office? This small yet perfectly formed unit is ideal for cooling the area immediately surrounding the user. Humidifying, purifying and cooling the air, it ensures a healthier indoor environment while its easy to fill water tank can last as long as eight hours. Free of Freon, it is eco-friendly and energy efficient so you can do your bit for the environment while lowering your energy bills.

Although this model is very compact, it’s surprisingly powerful and its inbuilt LED mood light with 7 colors can help to relax you while you unwind. This evaporative model can be simply plugged into either your USB port or regular wall outlet and thanks to its sleek, compact design, it will fit easily into small spaces. It’s even lightweight enough to take anywhere while you’re traveling and it can even be used outdoors on hot days!

Pros

  • checkLightweight, compact design for easy transportation
  • checkInbuilt LED changing mood light
  • checkEco-friendly and energy efficient
  • checkCan be plugged into the wall or a USB

Cons

  • cross-altLoud operation

Specs

  • Weight 3lbs
  • Dimensions 8 x 8 x 10 inches
  • Voltage 120v
3Evapolar Portable Air Conditioner

Editors Rating

  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star
  • star

If you’re looking for a better alternative to a regular desk fan for your office or bedroom, the Evapolar air cooler is the perfect solution. Thanks to its 3-in-1 technology it can cool, humidify and clean dust particles so the indoor environment is even healthier.

This unit is surprisingly user-friendly. All you need to do is full the water tank, plug it in and then enjoy. Even better, since this unit is very small it only uses the same amount of power as a lightbulb. You can stay comfortable without a huge jump in your energy bills.

The evaporative design of this innovative air cooler takes dry, hot air then moistens and cools it so you can feel more comfortable. It’s even made from biodegradable materials for extra eco-friendliness.

Although you can plug this model into a regular power outlet, you can also plug it into a USB port for convenient cooling at your desk. The potential temperature drop when you use this unit is as much as 15 degrees Celsius, with the added benefit of purified and humidified air to help you breathe more easily.

Since this device is very portable and only consumes 10 watts of electricity it’s the ideal choice for use while traveling. It is ten times smaller than a regular AC unit without any of the standard maintenance that goes with a more conventional system.

Pros

  • checkCompact size for great portability
  • checkCan be plugged into a USB or regular power outlet
  • checkEco-friendly design
  • check3 in 1 technology to cool, humidify and purify the air

Cons

  • cross-altNot suitable for use in humid environments
  • cross-altWater tank is small

Specs

  • Weight 2.87lbs
  • Dimensions 6.7 x 6.7 x 6.9 inches
  • Voltage 120v

BUYING GUIDE & FAQ’S

If you’re looking for a portable air conditioner Amazon has plenty to choose from, but how do you know which is the right one for you?

Here are some things to keep in mind to avoid disappointment when buying a personal air conditioner.

  • Cost – depending on the size and type of portable AC unit you’re looking for, you could be looking at considerable variation in cost. The more powerful the unit is, the more you can expect to pay, but if you only need a small model to operate on your desk or bedside table. If you’re keen to choose a portable unit which can double as a dehumidifier, humidifier or purifier, you can expect to pay a little more, and this is even more likely to be the case if there are integrated additional features such as a programmable timer or remote control.While units from the best brands probably cost a little more, they come with better warranties and better customer service which gives you greater peace of mind in your purchase. Don’t forget to keep in mind the energy that your air conditioner will use. Some units aren’t as energy saving as others, and that means you’ll be paying more on your monthly bills. Replacement filters are another cost to add to into the mix. Make sure to add all these extras onto the cost to determine the best value for money for you.
  • Size – depending on the size of the space you need your unit to treat, you’re going to need a different size air conditioner. While these units are described as “portable” that doesn’t necessarily mean the same thing in every case. Some portable units are heavy and large, and are considered portable because of their integrated wheels. Others are truly tiny and can fit onto the corner of your desk without taking up a lot of room.
  • Room Size – make sure to do your research properly to make sure you choose a model that’s the right size for you and which is capable of operating effectively in the space you’ve chosen. Even small units are capable of cooling different sized rooms. Are you only looking for a unit that cools the immediate surrounding area or do you need to cool the whole room? Look for the manufacturer’s BTU rating to help you determine the power of the air conditioner you need. The bigger the BTUs, the bigger the space they can cool.
  • Energy Use – depending on the way in which you use your AC unit, you’ll see a different amount of energy being used. Energy Star rated appliances are low energy models which will protect the environment while also saving you money on your energy bills. You should also look for a model which features a programmable thermostat and an automatic shut-off function.
  • Ventilation – the majority of portable AC units vent hot air. That means you’ll have to keep it by the window so the hot air can escape without causing a condensation or mold problem. Some portable units come with their own window venting kit. While these aren’t especially attractive, they are very functional at keeping the moisture out of your home or office. Make sure to find out more about the ventilation system for your chosen unit as this will be a big part of determining how portable the unit really is. If you’re planning on putting your unit in a place distant from the room’s window, you’ll need to check how far the window vent kit can extend.
  • Dual-Hose or Single Hose – there are two types of hose configuration for vented portable air conditioners – single and dual hose units. A single hose unit uses one hose to intake air and to exhaust it. Although it effectively cools the space it has to work much harder and therefore isn’t as efficient as dual-hose units. Dual hose units have one hose for intake and one for exhaust. This is more energy-efficient and also cools the space around 40% more quickly than a single hose model.
  • Noise – all air conditioning units make a noise. No matter whether they’re ductless, portable or window units, you’ll always hear noises from your air conditioner. However, in many cases, this noise is minimal background noise which goes unnoticed. Nevertheless, there are some units which are louder than others. If you’re planning on using your AC unit in a bedroom, you should definitely look for a very quiet running model so it won’t disturb your sleep.
  • Installation – usually, portable a/c units aren’t too hard to install, however if the model you choose has to be vented, that could be a little more complex. You should ensure that you’re choosing a unit which has clear instructions about how to set up the window kit. If you’re going to be choosing a window ventilated air conditioner, you might want to think about investing in a second vent kit to install in another room, so you can benefit from the portability of the unit.
  • Ease of Use – a lot of the best portable a/c units are quite easy to use however you should do your research thoroughly to check out just how much effort you’re going to need to put into working out the controls. Check out whether the control system is intuitive and how easy it is to choose the right fan setting and temperature. Also, check out how much maintenance is likely to be required. Most devices need their filter to be replaced at regular intervals, however some also require internal cleaning which is more labor intensive.
  • Aesthetics – it doesn’t really matter which room you’re going to be using your air conditioner in, you don’t want it to be an eyesore. This is especially the case if it’s one of the larger portable models. Function is extremely important, but aesthetics also have a role to play for most people. You don’t want your entire space to be dominated by an ugly unit in the corner. Portable a/c units come in lots of different shapes and styles. Some come in a choice of colors, and with a range of sleek, modern designs available, you’re sure to find something that works well in your space and suits your preferences and sense of style.
  • Condensate Type – the type of condensate your air conditioner has will directly relate to how easy it is to use. A drip air conditioner deposits its condensate into its internal bucket which will then need to be emptied on a regular basis. In some cases, the bucket fills up very rapidly, and you’ll find that you need to dump out the water on a frequent basis. If you choose a partial drip a/c unit, you’ll find that the majority of condensate is released via the exhaust hose.However, some water may still be deposited in the drip pan. You will therefore need to check the pan regularly and then dump it out occasionally, however it’ll be able to go for longer intervals in between without needing to be emptied. There is a third option too. This is to select a non-drip air conditioner. This type of unit releases the condensate out into the environment so there’s never any need to empty a pan or bucket. It goes without saying that these models are very popular with homeowners thanks to their convenience and low maintenance.
  • Features – there are a number of features which some air conditioning units boast that give you even more value for money and even greater functionality so you can customize your room temperature even more effectively and efficiently. Some of these include:

Programmable Thermostats – these allow the user to set a precise temperature for the air conditioner. Once the room is sufficiently cool, the unit will automatically turn off. This eliminates any requirement to turn the unit off and on manually, and also frequently allows pre-programming of the unit the begin cooling at a specified time.

Auto Drain Systems – these turn all the condensation liquid into exhaust therefore there’s no need to empty the pan or bucket yourself.

Remote Control – the remote control will give the user the power the control their air conditioning unit from anywhere in the room. This means you can operate it without getting out of bed or off the sofa.

Heating/Air Conditioning Combo – some air conditioners serve double duty as a heater and this means that there’s no need to buy a separate unit to heat your room during cold weather. You’ll get double the value for money from your purchase.

Dehumidifying Function – air conditioners which feature dehumidifiers are able to remove any moisture from the room’s air. This offers a number of health benefits and will also help to protect effectively against the development of mold and mildew which could cause structural damage to your home.

How much electricity does a personal air conditioner use?

Air conditioners work rather like a refrigerator, cooling down the space by passing the warm air over the cold evaporator coil before blowing out cooled air to the room. During this process, hot air is generated which requires venting from the space via an exhaust hose which is usually put through the window. While generating water and drying the air, portable air conditioners also often have a water tank which needs emptying on a regular basis.

If you think about your air conditioner as working in the same way as a fridge, you can see how you can save electricity when running your unit. You wouldn’t leave your fridge door wide open as this would make the appliance work much harder and use a lot more electricity. This also applies to cooling a room with a portable air conditioning unit. Keep the space sealed by shutting windows and doors. This will allow you to get more efficient running from the a/c unit.

If you also close the curtains and blinds, the amount of heat generated inside the room from sunshine coming through the doors and windows will also be reduced. When rooms are well insulated, they’ll stay cool during the summer and warmer during the winter.

You can also choose a unit which comes with its own controllable thermostat and timer. This will allow you to select the optimal temperature to ensure coolness without energy wastage. Your unit won’t be running when you don’t need it, and you’ll only cool your space to the required temperature. Air conditioners are all rated for energy efficiency. That means if you choose one which has a better energy rating, your electricity consumption will be reduced and your energy bills will be lower.

In short, there’s no single cost for running an air conditioning unit at home or in the workplace. The amount you can expect to pay for your electricity bill will vary depending on the size of the unit you’re operating, its power and its energy rating. However, if you make a sensible choice when selecting the right unit for you, you can minimize your energy consumption and therefore your electricity bill.

Is personal air conditioner bad for health?

Some people worry that air conditioners are bad for their health and well-being, however in fact there are many ways in which a personal a/c unit could be very good for you. This is particularly the case if you live in a polluted city, by a main road or have smokers in the home. An air conditioner will reduce the number of pollution particles from outdoors entering your home and therefore lowers the chance of air pollution causing problems to your health.

The best air conditioners purify the air, trapping contaminants like pollen, dust and pet dander so that you can breathe more easily and won’t suffer from allergy symptoms such as wheezing, sneezing and streaming eyes. Air conditioners which dehumidify the air will also reduce the chance of mold and mildew spores taking hold and causing health problems.

However, there’s something to bear in mind. If you don’t maintain the unit properly, you could experience health issues as a result. Let’s take a look at some of the potential problems which could arise.

  • Mould Growth – when you cool down hot air in an air conditioner unit, moisture is created. A central air conditioner will expel the excess moisture via its exhaust vent. This means there’ll be no circulation of the moisture inside the building.However, a portable a/c unit doesn’t always vent through the window. Sometimes, they collect the excess moisture in a bucket or pan. When the pan isn’t emptied regularly or the system isn’t functioning efficiently, the moisture could attract mold growth. Mold inside your portable air conditioning unit is a hazard to health since the unit will make the mold spores circulate through the air where they will be breathed into your lungs causing health issues.
  • Low Humidity – when an air conditioner pulls the moisture out of the air and cools it, the humidity in the room is reduced. During the summer heat, this is often a much welcome relief. However, if there is very low humidity in the room, health issues can arise. Nasal passages are irritated by dry air and this often results in sinus inflammation and congestion. A humidifier is therefore required to counteract the effect.
  • Temperature Fluctuations  – as humans, we’re usually very good at adapting our bodies to temperature changes. In most cases, we adapt perfectly well when moving from the hot air outside to the cooler air indoors. Our health doesn’t suffer any ill effects under normal circumstances. However, for some people who suffer from specific health problems such as diabetes, these temperature fluctuations may be harder to manage. In such cases, individuals may need to minimize the temperature difference between the outdoors and the indoors so they can adjust their body more easily to the change.
  • Airborne Illness – when water is used to cool down the air, there is a risk to health if the water should become stagnant through neglect. This may result in harmful bacteria growing and thriving and this could cause airborne illnesses to spread. While this isn’t a problem in the home environment, it could be a problem if you are using an air conditioner in an office or workplace.

What types of personal air conditioners are available?

There are lots of different types of personal air conditioner on the market. Some take the term “portable” to a whole new level, requiring wheels to move them between spaces due to their weight and bulky size. However, others are very small and lightweight, meaning that they truly are portable. They can be carried in carry-on luggage when going on vacation and can be easily moved from the office desk to the bedside table without any problems.

There are also three different draining options for portable air conditioners. Some are self-evaporating, releasing the water which is produced during the cooling process dispersing into the surrounding air with no need for any drainage. If the room is very humid, there may be a need to manually empty the collection pan or bucket, however the compressor shuts off automatically and the indicator light lets you know when the time has come to empty the pan.

Other models have condensate pumps, which pump excess water out of the pan via a hose through the window. Although extra installation is necessary, this will ensure that moisture is expelled from the building and mold won’t build up. The third type of air conditioner is a manual model which requires the user to empty the tank or pan manually on a regular basis – often as frequently as every two hours if the room has a very humid atmosphere.

Keeping Your Cool With A Personal Air Conditioner

When you look on Amazon portable air conditioner models are a dime a dozen, however not all are created equal. We’ve recommended the best seven personal air conditioners on the market today to suit your needs. Whether your bedroom, living room or office needs a little extra cooling, the personal air conditioner models that we’ve recommended here are ideal for your requirements and will help you keep your cool and breathe more easily.